JPWO2019059308A1 - Light conversion film and image display element using the same - Google Patents

Abstract

One aspect of the present invention is a light conversion layer containing luminescent nanocrystal particles that emit light by converting light having a predetermined wavelength into red, green, or blue light, and at least one side of the light conversion layer And a wavelength-selective transmission layer that transmits light in a specific wavelength region.

Description

  The present invention relates to a light conversion film and an image display element using the same.

  As an image display device that displays a two-dimensional image or a three-dimensional image, there are various devices such as a liquid crystal display element and an inorganic or organic EL (electroluminescence). Since a liquid crystal display element is not a self-luminous type, a light source is required, and a flat and thin image display device that displays an image by using a liquid crystal material as a shutter for light passing through a pixel by voltage control. On the other hand, inorganic or organic EL (electroluminescence) is a self-luminous display device whose light emission intensity can be adjusted by the amount of current, and utilizes a light emitting diode (LED) whose light emitting layer is composed of an inorganic or organic compound. An image display device. In any case, an image display device, in which one pixel is composed of three colors of red, green, and blue and a thin film transistor (TFT) having a switching function for transmitting light to each color, is connected to the current mainstream. ing.

  Due to the excellent display quality, active matrix type liquid crystal display devices have been put on the market for portable terminals, liquid crystal televisions, projectors, computers and the like. In the active matrix display method, TFT (thin film transistor) or MIM (metal insulator metal) is used for each pixel. In combination with a liquid crystal composition having a high voltage holding ratio, TN type (twisted nematic), VA (vertical alignment: vertical alignment), IPS (In Plane Switching), FFS (Fringe Field Switching), etc. are used. In particular, liquid crystal display elements use color filters in combination with liquid crystal elements to realize color display, so it is difficult to improve color reproducibility even if the light source section is improved. Therefore, it is necessary to increase the color purity by increasing the pigment concentration in the color filter or by increasing the color film thickness.

  On the other hand, EL elements typified by organic EL elements are self-luminous and do not require a backlight, can be made thin and light, have fewer members and are easily foldable, but are caused by deterioration of the light-emitting members. There are problems such as poor display. That is, there is a need to solve problems such as high cost due to poor yield during device manufacture, device burn-in due to lifetime, and display unevenness. In addition, when full-color organic EL elements are used, it is necessary to emit red, green, and blue colors independently, and the above problems are likely to occur especially in high-energy rays of short-wavelength blue. In addition, there is a problem that the element is yellowed due to fading of blue.

  Therefore, as a technique for simultaneously solving the color reproducibility and the light emission efficiency of the image display element, a quantum dot technique (see Patent Document 1), which is an example of a light-emitting nanocrystal particle, has attracted attention. A liquid crystal display element with improved color reproducibility is disclosed as a wide color gamut display can be realized because a light source of three primary colors having a small half-value width can be obtained by using quantum dots (Patent Document 2 and Non-Patent Document). Reference 1). Furthermore, a proposal has been made to use three-color quantum dots in place of a conventional color filter using short-wavelength visible light such as near ultraviolet light or blue light as a light source (see Patent Document 3). In principle, these display elements can achieve both high luminous efficiency and color reproducibility.

JP-T-2001-523758 International Publication No. 2004/074739 Pamphlet US Pat. No. 8,648,524

SID 2012 DIGEST, p895-896

  However, as in Patent Documents 2 and 3 and Non-Patent Document 1 described above, when quantum dots, which are examples of luminescent nanocrystal particles, are used as a color filter of an image display element, they are adjacent when the content of the quantum dots is increased Since the quantum dots that are absorbed absorb the light emitted and extinguish, the external quantum efficiency does not increase. On the other hand, when the content of the quantum dots is lowered, there arises a problem that blue light used for light emission of the quantum dots is transmitted and color purity is lowered.

  In addition, there is a problem that the quantum dot is deactivated by an external environment surrounding the quantum dot, and the external quantum efficiency is lower than that of the quantum dot alone due to a ligand, a cured resin, or the like used.

  Therefore, a technical problem to be solved by the present invention is to provide a light conversion film that can achieve both high luminous efficiency and high color purity, and an image display device including the light conversion film.

  As a result of intensive studies to solve the above-mentioned problems, the present inventors have found that the above-mentioned problems can be solved, and have completed the present invention.

  One aspect of the present invention is a light conversion layer containing luminescent nanocrystal particles that emit light by converting light having a predetermined wavelength into red, green, or blue light, and at least one side of the light conversion layer And a wavelength-selective transmission layer that transmits light in a specific wavelength region.

  Since this light conversion film includes a wavelength-selective transmission layer corresponding to the wavelength of incident light and the emission wavelength of the light-emitting nanocrystal particles, a part of the light emitted from the light conversion layer is transferred by the wavelength-selective transmission layer. The light can be reflected, and the light emitted from the light conversion layer on one surface side can be amplified and extracted.

  Another aspect of the present invention includes a light source unit, a light conversion layer containing light-emitting nanocrystal particles that emit light by converting light having a predetermined wavelength into red, green, or blue light, and light. An image display element comprising: a wavelength selective transmission layer that is provided on at least one side of the conversion layer and transmits light in a specific wavelength region.

  Since this image display element includes a light conversion layer and a wavelength selective transmission layer, a part of the light emitted from the light conversion layer can be reflected by the wavelength selective transmission layer, and the light is reflected on the display side. Light emitted by the conversion layer can be amplified and extracted.

  The image display element of the present invention is excellent in luminous efficiency and color purity. The image display element of the present invention has excellent transmittance and maintains a color reproduction region for a long period of time. The light conversion film of the present invention is excellent in luminous efficiency and color purity. The light conversion film of the present invention is excellent in transmittance and maintains a color reproduction region for a long time.

It is a perspective view which shows one Embodiment of an image display element (liquid crystal display element). It is a perspective view which shows other one Embodiment of an image display element (liquid crystal display element). It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the structure of the liquid crystal panel which concerns on one Embodiment. It is sectional drawing which shows one Embodiment of a light conversion film. It is a graph which shows an example of the transmission characteristic of a wavelength selective transmission layer. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the structure of the liquid crystal panel which concerns on other one Embodiment. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the structure of the liquid crystal panel which concerns on other one Embodiment. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the structure of the liquid crystal panel which concerns on other one Embodiment. It is sectional drawing which shows other one Embodiment of a light conversion film. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the structure of the liquid crystal panel which concerns on other one Embodiment. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the structure of the liquid crystal panel which concerns on other one Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows other one Embodiment of a light conversion film. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pixel part of the liquid crystal display element by the equivalent circuit. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the shape of a pixel electrode. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the shape of a pixel electrode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the electrode structure of an IPS type liquid crystal display element. It is one of the examples of sectional drawing which cut | disconnected the liquid crystal display element in the III-III line direction in FIG. It is sectional drawing which cut | disconnected the IPS type liquid crystal panel in the III-III line direction in FIG. It is the top view to which the area | region enclosed with the XIV line of the electrode layer 3 containing the thin-film transistor formed on the board | substrate in FIG. 2 was expanded. It is sectional drawing which cut | disconnected the liquid crystal display element shown in FIG. 2 in the III-III line direction in FIG. It is a schematic diagram which shows one Embodiment of an image display element (OLED). It is the graph which contrasted the Example and the comparative example.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

  First, an embodiment of an image display element will be described. An image display element may be a liquid crystal display element, an organic EL display element, etc., for example. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an embodiment of an image display element (liquid crystal display element). In FIG. 1, for convenience of explanation, each component is shown separately.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a liquid crystal display element 1000A according to an embodiment includes a backlight unit 100A and a liquid crystal panel 200A. The backlight unit 100A includes a light source unit 101A having a plurality of light emitting elements L and a light guide unit 102A that functions as a light guide plate or a light diffusion plate.

  As shown in FIG. 1, in one embodiment of the backlight unit 100A, a light source unit 101A including a plurality of light emitting elements L is arranged on one side surface of the light guide unit 102A. If necessary, the light source unit 101A including the plurality of light-emitting elements L is not limited to one side surface (one side surface of the light guide unit 102A) of the liquid crystal panel 200A, but the other side surface side (opposite side surfaces) of the light guide unit 102A. The light source unit 101A including a plurality of light emitting elements L surrounds the three side surfaces of the light guide unit 102A or the entire periphery of the light guide unit 102A so as to surround the light guide unit 102A. As such, it may be provided on four side surfaces. The light guide unit 102A may include a light diffusing plate instead of the light guide plate as necessary.

  The light emitting element L is a light emitting element that emits light LT1 that is ultraviolet light or visible light. The light emitting element L is not particularly limited with respect to the wavelength region, but preferably has a main light emission peak in the blue region. For example, a light emitting diode (blue light emitting diode) having a main light emission peak in a wavelength region of 420 nm to 480 nm can be suitably used. As such a light emitting element L, a known light emitting element can be used. For example, a seed layer made of AlN formed on a sapphire substrate, an underlayer formed on the seed layer, and GaN. Examples include a light emitting element including at least a laminated semiconductor layer as a main component. The laminated semiconductor layer may be configured by laminating an underlayer, an n-type semiconductor layer, a light emitting layer, and a p-type semiconductor layer in this order from the substrate side.

  The light emitting element L that emits ultraviolet light may be, for example, a low-pressure mercury lamp, a medium-pressure mercury lamp, a high-pressure mercury lamp, an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp, a carbon arc lamp, an electrodeless lamp, a metal halide lamp, a xenon arc lamp, an LED, and preferably an LED. is there.

  In this specification, light in a wavelength region of 420 nm to 480 nm (especially light having an emission center wavelength in the wavelength region) is referred to as blue light, and light in a wavelength region of 500 nm to 560 nm (particularly in the wavelength region). Light having an emission center wavelength) is referred to as green light, and light in a wavelength region of 605 nm to 665 nm (particularly, light having an emission center wavelength in the wavelength region) is referred to as red light. The ultraviolet light in this specification refers to light in a wavelength region of 300 nm or more and less than 420 nm (particularly, light having an emission center wavelength in the wavelength region). Further, in this specification, the “half-value width” refers to the wavelength width of the peak at the peak height ½.

  As shown in FIG. 1, in one embodiment, the liquid crystal panel 200A includes a first polarizing layer 1, a first substrate 2, an electrode layer 3, a first alignment layer 4, a liquid crystal layer 5, The second alignment layer 6, the second polarizing layer 7, the wavelength selective transmission layer 8, the light conversion layer 9, and the second substrate 10 are laminated in this order from the side close to the backlight unit 100A. It has the structure made.

  In other words, the first polarizing layer 1 is provided on one surface of the first substrate 2, and the electrode layer 3 and the first alignment layer 4 covering the electrode layer 3 are provided on the other surface. It has been. The second substrate 10 is provided so as to face the first substrate 2 with the liquid crystal layer 5 interposed therebetween. On the surface of the second substrate 10 on the first substrate 2 side, the light conversion layer 9A ( 9) The wavelength-selective transmission layer 8A (8), the second polarizing layer 7, and the second alignment layer 6 are provided in this order from the side closer to the second substrate 10.

  The first polarizing layer 1 and the second polarizing layer 7 are not particularly limited, and a known polarizing plate (polarizing layer) can be used. Examples of the polarizing plate (polarizing layer) include a dichroic organic dye polarizer, a coating type polarizing layer, a wire grid type polarizer, and a cholesteric liquid crystal type polarizer. For example, the wire grid polarizer is preferably formed by any one of a nanoimprint method, a block copolymer method, an E-beam lithography method, and a glansing angle deposition method. When the polarizing layer is a coating-type polarizing layer, an alignment layer described later may be further provided. That is, in one embodiment, it is preferable that both the coating-type polarizing layer and the alignment layer are provided.

  Each of the first substrate 2 and the second substrate 10 is a transparent insulating substrate having transparency and insulation formed of a flexible material such as glass or plastic.

  The electrode layer 3 is made of a transparent material such as ITO. The liquid crystal panel 200A shown in FIG. 1 shows a mode in which a pixel electrode (not shown) and a common electrode (not shown) are provided as the electrode layer 3 on the first substrate 2 side. In the embodiment, for example, a pixel electrode (first electrode layer) 3a is provided on the first substrate 2 and a common electrode (second electrode layer) 3b is provided, as in a liquid crystal panel 200B shown in FIG. It may be provided on the second substrate 10.

  By providing the first alignment layer 4, the liquid crystal molecules in the liquid crystal layer 5 can be aligned in a predetermined direction with respect to the substrates 2 and 7 when no voltage is applied. Although FIG. 1 shows a mode in which the liquid crystal layer 5 is sandwiched between a pair of alignment layers 4 and 6, in another embodiment, the alignment layer is either the first substrate 2 or the second substrate 10. It may be provided only on one side. In another embodiment, the alignment layer may not be provided on either the first substrate 2 or the second substrate 10. That is, the liquid crystal panel according to another embodiment includes a first polarizing layer 1, a first substrate 2, an electrode layer 3, a liquid crystal layer 5, a second polarizing layer 7, and wavelength selective transmission. The layer 8, the light conversion layer 9, and the second substrate 10 may have a configuration in which they are stacked in this order from the side close to the backlight unit 100A.

  In the liquid crystal display element 1000A shown in FIG. 1, the light LT1 emitted from the light source unit 101A (light emitting element L) passes through the light guide unit 102A (for example, through a light guide plate or a light diffusing plate), and the liquid crystal The light enters the panel 200A. The light that has entered the liquid crystal panel 200 </ b> A is polarized in a specific direction by the first polarizing layer 1 and then enters the liquid crystal layer 5. In the liquid crystal layer 5, the alignment direction of the liquid crystal molecules is controlled by driving the electrode layer 3, whereby the liquid crystal layer 5 plays a role as an optical shutter. The light whose polarization direction has been changed by the liquid crystal layer 5 is blocked by the second polarizing layer 7 or polarized in a specific direction, and then passes through the wavelength selective transmission layer 8 and enters the light conversion layer 9. The light conversion layer 9 converts the color of incident light (details will be described later), and the converted light LT2 is emitted to the outside of the liquid crystal panel 200A.

  At this time, the shape of the light guide portion 102A (particularly the light guide plate) is a flat plate having a side surface whose thickness gradually decreases from the side surface on which the light emitted from the light emitting element L is incident toward the opposing surface (side surface). However, since it is easy to make light incident on the liquid crystal panel 200A, linear light can be converted into surface light.

  FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing a liquid crystal display element according to another embodiment. In the following, description overlapping with the liquid crystal display element shown in FIG. 1 is omitted. As shown in FIG. 2, in the liquid crystal display element 1000B according to another embodiment, the backlight unit 100B includes a plurality of light emitting elements L in the light source unit 101B substantially parallel to the flat light guide unit 102B. You may have what is called a direct type backlight structure arrange | positioned planarly. In the direct type backlight structure, since the light LT1 from the light emitting element L is surface light, the shape of the light guide 102B does not need to be tapered unlike the embodiment shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a first electrode layer (thin film transistor layer or pixel electrode) 3 a may be provided on the surface of the first substrate 2 on the liquid crystal layer 5 side, and the liquid crystal layer of the second substrate 10. A second electrode layer (common electrode) 3b may be provided on the surface on the 5 side. In addition to the first wavelength selective transmission layer 8, a second wavelength selective transmission layer 11 may be further provided on the second substrate 10 side of the liquid crystal layer 5. The second wavelength selective transmission layer 11 may be provided on the opposite side of the liquid crystal layer 5 of the second substrate 10.

  That is, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2, the liquid crystal panel 200B includes the first polarizing layer 1, the first substrate 2, the first electrode layer 3a, the liquid crystal layer 5, and the second electrode layer 3b. The second polarizing layer 7, the first wavelength-selective transmission layer 8, the light conversion layer 9, the second substrate 10, and the second wavelength-selective transmission layer 11 are included in the backlight unit 100B. It has the structure laminated | stacked in this order from the near side.

  As another embodiment, an alignment layer may be further provided in the liquid crystal panel 200B of FIG. That is, the modification of the liquid crystal panel 200B of FIG. 2 includes the first polarizing layer 1, the first substrate 2, the first electrode layer 3a, the alignment layer 4, the liquid crystal layer 5, and the alignment layer 4. The second electrode layer 3b, the second polarizing layer 7, the first wavelength selective transmission layer 8, the light conversion layer 9, the second substrate 10, and the second wavelength selective transmission layer 11 May be stacked in this order from the side close to the backlight unit 100B.

  Hereinafter, the configuration of the polarizing layers 1 and 7, the liquid crystal layer 5, the light conversion layer 9, the wavelength selective transmission layers 8 and 11, etc. in the liquid crystal panel as shown in FIGS. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view for explaining a configuration of a liquid crystal panel according to an embodiment. In FIG. 3, the electrode layers 3, 3 a, 3 b and the alignment layers 4, 6 are omitted for easy understanding of the positional relationship between the polarizing layer, the liquid crystal layer, the light conversion layer, the wavelength selective transmission layer, and the like ( The same may be omitted in the drawings after FIG. 3).

  As shown in FIG. 3, in the liquid crystal panel shown in FIG. 1, as described above, the first polarizing layer 1, the first substrate 2, the liquid crystal layer 5, the second polarizing layer 7, and the wavelength selectivity. The transmissive layer 8A (8), the light conversion layer 9A (9), and the second substrate 10 are laminated in this order from the side close to the backlight unit 100A (incident light is incident). In addition, a laminated body composed of a substrate (first substrate 2) on the backlight unit side (side on which incident light LT1 is incident) and each layer laminated on the substrate with respect to the liquid crystal layer 5 is an array substrate (A-SUB). ), And a laminate composed of a substrate (second substrate 10) on the side opposite to the backlight unit (the side opposite to where the incident light LT1 is incident) and each layer stacked on the substrate is a counter substrate (O-SUB). (Hereinafter the same).

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, the light conversion layer 9A (9) and the wavelength selective transmission layer 8A (8) are provided in the counter substrate (O-SUB). This embodiment has a so-called in-cell configuration in which the light conversion layer 9A (9) and the second polarizing layer 7 are provided between a pair of substrates (the first substrate 2 and the second substrate 10). It is a form to have.

  When the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 is applied to a VA liquid crystal display element, the first electrode layer (pixel electrode) is formed on the first substrate 2, and the counter substrate side O-SUB has the first The second electrode layer (common electrode) is provided between the liquid crystal layer 5 and the second polarizing layer 7 or between the second polarizing layer 7 and the light conversion layer 9A (9). preferable. In at least one of the counter substrate (O-SUB) and the array substrate (A-SUB), an alignment layer is preferably formed on the surface in contact with the liquid crystal layer 5. In FIG. 3, when the liquid crystal display element is an FFS type or an IPS type, it is preferable that the pixel electrode and the common electrode are formed on the first substrate 2.

  A general liquid crystal display element performs wavelength selection by selecting a wavelength of incident light from a white light source in a color filter and absorbing a part of the light, but in the present embodiment, it emits light. One of the features is that a light conversion film including a light conversion layer 9A (9) containing nanocrystal particles and a wavelength selective transmission layer 8A (8) is used as an alternative member of a color filter. That is, the light conversion film includes red (R), green (G), and blue (B) three primary color pixels, and plays the same role as a so-called color filter.

  FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view showing one embodiment of the light conversion film. This light conversion film corresponds to the light conversion film used in the liquid crystal panel shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the light conversion film 90 </ b> A according to the embodiment includes a light conversion layer 9 </ b> A (9) and a wavelength selective transmission layer 8 </ b> A (on one side of the light conversion layer 9 </ b> A (9)). 8).

  The light conversion layer 9A (9) includes a red pixel portion (R: also referred to as a red color layer portion), a green pixel portion (G: also referred to as a green color layer portion), and a blue pixel portion (G: A blue color layer portion). In the light conversion layer 9A (9), as shown in FIG. 3, the three color pixel portions (R, G, B) may be in contact with each other, and as shown in FIG. For the purpose of preventing color mixing, a black matrix (BM) for partitioning the three color pixel portions (R, G, B) from each other may be provided. In this embodiment, a wavelength selective transmission layer 8A (8) is formed (laminated) on one surface of the light conversion layer 9A (9). As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, this light conversion film 90 </ b> A is used so that incident light LT <b> 1 enters from the wavelength selective transmission layer 8 </ b> A (8) side.

  The red pixel portion (R) is, for example, a light conversion pixel layer (NC-Red) including red light emitting nanocrystal particles (NCR) that absorb incident light and emit red light. The green pixel portion (G) is, for example, a light conversion pixel layer (NC-Green) including green luminescent nanocrystal particles (NCG) that absorb incident light and emit green light. The blue pixel portion (B) is, for example, a light conversion pixel layer (NC-Blue) including blue light-emitting nanocrystal particles (NCB) that absorb incident light and emit blue light.

  The incident light LT1 may be, for example, light (blue light) having a main peak near 450 nm emitted from a blue LED or the like. In this case, the blue light emitted from the blue LED can be used as blue light emitted from the light conversion layer. Therefore, when the incident light is blue light, of the three color pixel portions (R, G, B), the blue pixel portion (B) is a light conversion containing blue light-emitting nanocrystal particles (NCB). Instead of the pixel layer, a light transmissive layer that transmits blue light may be used so that blue incident light can be used as it is. In this case, the blue pixel portion (B) can be configured by a color material layer (so-called blue color filter) (CF-Blue) including a transparent resin or a blue color material. Therefore, since the blue light-emitting nanocrystal particles (NCB) can be an optional component, the blue light-emitting nanocrystal particles (NCB) are indicated by broken lines in FIGS.

The wavelength selective transmission layer 8A (8) is a layer that selectively transmits light in a predetermined wavelength region according to the wavelength of the incident light LT1 and the wavelength of the light converted by the light conversion layer 9A (9). . The wavelength-selective transmission layer 8A (8) transmits light in a first wavelength region (for example, WL ¹ nm to WL ² nm), and a second wavelength region (WL ³ nm different from the first wavelength region). It is preferable to reflect light (˜WL ⁴ nm). As a result, among the light converted by the light conversion layer 9A (9) and the light incident on the light conversion layer 9A (9), the light in the first wavelength region is transmitted, and the light other than the first wavelength region is transmitted. By reflecting light in the wavelength region of 2, the color purity can be improved. In other words, since the wavelength selective transmission layer 8A (8) reflects light in a specific wavelength region (second wavelength region), it can also be called a wavelength selective reflection layer (selective reflection layer).

  The wavelength-selective transmission layer 8A (8) may have two or more wavelength regions (first wavelength regions) of light to be transmitted in the visible light region (for example, 380 nm to 780 nm). Two or more wavelength regions (second wavelength regions) may be provided. Thereby, also when wavelength selective transmission layer 8A (8) is a single layer, the purity of two or more kinds of colors can be improved.

  The wavelength selective transmission layer 8A (8) transmits light including a wavelength region other than the blue wavelength region, transmits light including a wavelength region other than the green wavelength region, or other than the red wavelength region. It preferably has at least one property of transmitting light including a wavelength region.

  The wavelength-selective transmission layer 8A (8) reflects at least one of light including a blue wavelength region, reflecting light including a green wavelength region, or reflecting light including a red wavelength region. It preferably has properties.

  The wavelength-selective transmission layer 8A (8) transmits light including a wavelength region other than the blue wavelength region and reflects light including the blue wavelength region, and includes light including a wavelength region other than the green wavelength region. At least one property of reflecting light including a green wavelength region or reflecting light including a wavelength region other than a red wavelength region and reflecting light including a red wavelength region. It is preferable to have.

  In this specification, “the light (in a specific wavelength region) is transmitted through a layer” means that the transmittance of the light (in a specific wavelength region) to the layer is 70% or more in the vertical direction. “The light (in a specific wavelength region) reflects on the layer” means that the reflectance of the light (in the specific wavelength region) to the layer is 10% or more in the vertical direction.

  The wavelength-selective transmission layer 8A (8) transmits the incident light LT1, and the wavelength region of the light emitted from the light conversion layer 9A (9), that is, the wavelength of at least one of blue, green, and red It preferably has a transmission characteristic that selectively reflects light rays in the region. Here, light emission from the light conversion layer 9A (9) is light emission caused by the light-emitting nanocrystal particles that have absorbed the incident light LT1, and depending on the shape of the light-emitting nanocrystal particles, spherical waves (such as quantum dots) Emitting forms such as isotropic particles) or dipole waves (anisotropic particles such as quantum rods) appear. On the other hand, when the wavelength selective transmission layer 8A (8) that transmits the incident light LT1 and reflects the light emitted from the light conversion layer 9A (9) is adjacent to the light conversion layer 9A (9), the required wavelength is obtained. The light in the region (light to be extracted outside) can be focused in one direction. Thereby, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, the incident light LT1 can be preferably incident on the light conversion layer 9A (9), and the light emitted from the light conversion layer 9A (9) is emitted to the liquid crystal layer 5 side. Since light is reflected by the wavelength selective transmission layer 8A (8), light emitted from the light conversion layer 9A (9) to the second substrate 10 side and the wavelength selective transmission layer 8A. Since the light reflected in (8) is combined (displayed), the light emission efficiency and the color purity are improved.

  FIG. 5 is a graph showing an example of transmission characteristics (wavelength dependence of transmittance) of the wavelength selective transmission layer. For example, when the wavelength selective transmission layer 8A (8) has transmission characteristics as shown in FIG. 5, the wavelength selective transmission layer 8A (8) selectively reflects only the red wavelength region of about 620 nm to 700 nm. (In other words, light in the blue wavelength region and green wavelength region is transmitted), the light in the red wavelength region converted by the light conversion layer 9A (9) is transmitted through the wavelength selective transmission layer 8A (8). It is considered that the color purity of the light in the red wavelength region is improved by the amplification by reflection.

  As a particularly preferred embodiment, incident light is light having a main peak in the vicinity of 450 nm (blue light) emitted from a blue LED or the like, and the red pixel portion (R) absorbs incident light (blue light) to produce red light. It contains red luminescent nanocrystal particles (NCR) that emit light, green pixel portions (G) contain green luminescent nanocrystal particles (NCG) that absorb incident light (blue light) and emit green light, The blue pixel portion (B) is a blue light transmission layer that transmits incident light (blue light), and the wavelength selective transmission layer 8A (8) has a blue wavelength region (other than the red wavelength region and the green wavelength region). (Wavelength region) light is transmitted, and light in the red wavelength region and green wavelength region is reflected (but is not limited to this form).

  In this case, the incident light is preferably transmitted through the wavelength-selective transmission layer 8A (8), is incident on the light conversion layer 9A (9), is absorbed by the luminescent nanocrystal particles, and the red pixel portion (R). The light in the red wavelength region is converted into light in the green wavelength region in the green pixel portion (G), while being transmitted as it is in the blue pixel portion (B). Of the light emitted from the red pixel portion (R) and the green pixel portion (G) of the light conversion layer 9A (9), the light emitted to the liquid crystal layer 5 side is the wavelength selective transmission layer 8A ( 8) is reflected (other light is absorbed or transmitted), and is displayed together with the light emitted from the light conversion layer 9A (9) to the second substrate 10 side. Thus, by using the combination of the light conversion layer 9A (9) and the wavelength selective transmission layer 8A (8), both high luminous efficiency and high color purity can be achieved.

  The liquid crystal panel may be another embodiment. Hereinafter, other embodiments will be described, but descriptions overlapping with the above-described embodiments will be omitted.

  FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view for explaining a configuration of a liquid crystal panel according to another embodiment. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, the light conversion layer 9A (9) and the wavelength selective transmission layer 8A (8) are provided in the counter substrate (O-SUB), and the light conversion layer 9A (9 ) Is provided outside the pair of substrates (first substrate 2 and second substrate 10). Also in this embodiment, the light conversion film shown in FIG. 4 may be used. In this embodiment, a support substrate 12 that supports the second polarizing layer 7, the light conversion layer 9A (9), and the wavelength selective transmission layer 8A (8) is further provided. The support substrate 12 is preferably a transparent substrate.

  That is, in the liquid crystal panel according to this embodiment, the first polarizing layer 1, the first substrate 2, the liquid crystal layer 5, the second substrate 10, the second polarizing layer 7, and the wavelength selective transmission. The layer 8A (8), the light conversion layer 9A (9), and the support substrate 12 are stacked in this order from the side closer to the backlight unit (the side on which the incident light LT1 is incident).

  When the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 is applied to a VA liquid crystal display element, the first electrode layer (pixel electrode) is formed on the first substrate 2 and the counter substrate (O-SUB) The second electrode layer (common electrode) is preferably provided between the liquid crystal layer 5 and the second polarizing layer 7. In at least one of the counter substrate (O-SUB) and the array substrate (A-SUB), an alignment layer is preferably formed on the surface in contact with the liquid crystal layer 5. In FIG. 6, when the liquid crystal display element is an FFS type or an IPS type, the pixel electrode and the common electrode are preferably formed on the first substrate 2.

  FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view for explaining a configuration of a liquid crystal panel according to another embodiment. As shown in FIG. 7, this embodiment is an in-cell type as in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, but the configuration of the light conversion layer 9B (9) is different from the embodiment shown in FIG.

  Specifically, in the light conversion layer 9B (9), the red pixel portion (R) includes a light conversion pixel layer (NC-Red) containing red light emitting nanocrystal particles (NCR), and a red color material. And a color material layer (so-called red color filter) (CF-Red) including two layers are stacked in this order from the side closer to the backlight unit (side on which incident light LT1 is incident). The green pixel portion (G) includes a light conversion pixel layer (NC-Green) containing green luminescent nanocrystal particles (NCG) that emits green light, and a color material layer (so-called green color filter) including a green color material. ) (CF-Green) has a two-layer structure laminated in this order from the side closer to the backlight unit (the side on which the incident light LT1 is incident).

  In this case, in the red pixel portion (R) and the green pixel portion (G), all of the incident light (preferably blue light) is not converted by the light conversion pixel layer containing the luminescent nanocrystal particles. In addition, since each of the red color filter (CF-Red) and the green color filter (CF-Green) absorbs incident light without transmitting it, the color purity of red and green is further improved.

  FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view for explaining a configuration of a liquid crystal panel according to another embodiment. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view showing another embodiment of the light conversion film. This light conversion film is suitably used for the liquid crystal panel shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, this embodiment is an in-cell type like the embodiment shown in FIG. 7, but the configuration of the wavelength selective transmission layer is different from the embodiment shown in FIG.

  Specifically, in this embodiment, the first wavelength-selective transmission layer 8A (8) is provided on the backlight unit side (the side on which the incident light LT1 is incident) of the light conversion layer 9A (9). The second wavelength-selective transmission layer 11 is provided on the side opposite to the backlight unit of the light conversion layer 9A (9) (the side opposite to the incident light LT1 is incident). That is, in the liquid crystal panel according to this embodiment, the first polarizing layer 1, the first substrate 2, the liquid crystal layer 5, the second polarizing layer 7, and the first wavelength-selective transmission layer 8A (8 ), The light conversion layer 9A (9), the second wavelength-selective transmission layer 11, and the second substrate 10 are stacked in this order from the side closer to the backlight unit (the side on which the incident light LT1 is incident). Has been.

  Similarly, the light conversion film 90B shown in FIG. 9 includes a wavelength selective transmission layer 8A (8), a light conversion layer 9A (9), and a second wavelength selective transmission layer 11 in this order. In other words, the light conversion film includes a light conversion layer 9A (9), a wavelength selective transmission layer 8A (8) provided on both sides of the light conversion layer 9A (9), and a second wavelength selective transmission layer. 11.

  The second wavelength selective transmission layer 11 is, for example, a color material layer containing a yellow color material (so-called yellow color) that absorbs light in a blue wavelength region and transmits light in a wavelength region other than the blue wavelength region. Filter) (CF-Yellow). The second wavelength selective transmission layer 11 may be, for example, a second wavelength selective transmission layer that partially reflects light in the blue wavelength region and partially transmits light. By providing the second wavelength-selective transmission layer 11 as described above, when the incident light is blue, it is possible to suppress deterioration in image quality due to intrusion of unnecessary light (particularly blue light) from the outside, and Even when the light emission from the pixel portion (B) is stronger than the light emission from the red pixel portion (R) and the green pixel portion (G), the color tone can be suitably adjusted.

  In the light conversion layer 9C (9) of the light conversion film 90B, a red pixel portion, a green pixel portion, and a blue pixel portion are partitioned from each other by a black matrix (BM). The red pixel portion includes a light conversion pixel layer (NC-Red) containing red light emitting nanocrystal particles (NCR) and a color material layer (red color filter) (CF-Red) including a red color material. The two-layer structure is laminated in this order from the side close to the backlight unit (the side on which the incident light LT1 is incident). The green pixel portion includes a light conversion pixel layer (NC-Green) containing green luminescent nanocrystal particles (NCG) that emits green light, and a color material layer (green color filter) (CF-) containing a green color material. Green) has a two-layer structure in which layers are stacked in this order from the side closer to the backlight unit (the side on which the incident light LT1 is incident). The blue pixel portion is composed of a color material layer (blue color filter) (CF-Blue) including a blue color material.

  In this case, in the red pixel portion and the green pixel portion, even if the incident light (preferably blue light) is not converted by the light conversion pixel layer containing the luminescent nanocrystal particles, the red color filter ( Since each of the CF-Red and green color filters (CF-Green) absorbs incident light without transmitting it, the color purity of red and green is further improved.

  When the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 is applied to a VA liquid crystal display element, the first electrode layer (pixel electrode) is formed on the first substrate 2 and the counter substrate (O-SUB) The second electrode layer (common electrode) is preferably provided between the liquid crystal layer 5 and the second polarizing layer 7. In at least one of the counter substrate (O-SUB) and the array substrate (A-SUB), an alignment layer is preferably formed on the surface in contact with the liquid crystal layer 5. In FIG. 8, when the liquid crystal display element is an FFS type or an IPS type, the pixel electrode and the common electrode are preferably formed on the first substrate 2.

  FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view for explaining a configuration of a liquid crystal panel according to another embodiment. As shown in FIG. 10, this embodiment is an in-cell type as in the embodiments shown in FIGS. 3 and 7, but the configuration of the light conversion layer 9D (9) is the same as the embodiment shown in FIGS. Different.

  Specifically, the light conversion layer 9A (9) includes the light emitting layer (NCL) provided over the pixel portions (R, G, B) of each color and the pixel portions (R, G, B) of each color. A color material layer (so-called color filter) (CFL) provided in a divided manner is stacked in this order from the side closer to the backlight unit (the side on which the incident light LT1 is incident).

  The light emitting layer (NCL) contains light emitting nanocrystal particles (NC) including at least red light emitting nanocrystal particles and green light emitting nanocrystal particles. The luminescent nanocrystal particles (NC) may further contain blue luminescent nanocrystal particles as necessary.

  The color material layer (CFL) has a red color layer portion (red color filter, not including luminescent nanocrystal particles) (CF-Red) at a position corresponding to the red pixel portion (R), and a green pixel. A green color layer portion (green color filter) (CF-Green, which does not include luminescent nanocrystal particles) is placed at a position corresponding to the portion (G), and a blue color portion is placed at a position corresponding to the blue pixel portion (B). Each has a color layer portion (blue color filter, not including luminescent nanocrystal particles) (CF-Blue). The green color layer portion may be a color material layer (yellow color filter) (CF-Yellow) including a yellow color material in order to perform color correction in consideration of transmission of excitation light. The red color layer portion (CF-Red), the green color layer portion (CF-Green), and the blue color layer portion (CF-Blue) may be in contact with each other as shown in FIG. In order to prevent this, a black matrix may be disposed as a light shielding layer between the color layer portions of the respective colors.

  When the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 is applied to a VA liquid crystal display element, the first electrode layer (pixel electrode) is formed on the first substrate 2 and the counter substrate (O-SUB) The second electrode layer (common electrode) is preferably provided between the liquid crystal layer 5 and the second polarizing layer 7. In FIG. 10, when the liquid crystal display element is an FFS type or an IPS type, the pixel electrode and the common electrode are preferably formed on the first substrate 2. In the VA-type, FFS-type, or IPS-type liquid crystal display element, an alignment layer is preferably formed on a surface in contact with the liquid crystal layer 5 on at least one of the counter substrate (O-SUB) and the array substrate (A-SUB). .

  FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view for explaining a configuration of a liquid crystal panel according to another embodiment. As shown in FIG. 11, the wavelength-selective transmission layer 8A (8) and the light conversion layer 9A (9) may be provided in the array substrate (A-SUB), unlike the above-described embodiment. In this embodiment, the light conversion layer 9A (9), the first polarizing layer 1 and the second polarizing layer 7 are provided between a pair of substrates (first substrate 2 and second substrate 10). This is a form having a so-called in-cell type configuration.

  That is, in the liquid crystal panel according to this embodiment, the first substrate 2, the wavelength-selective transmission layer 8A (8), the light conversion layer 9A (9), the first polarizing layer 1, the liquid crystal layer 5, The second polarizing layer 7 and the second substrate 10 are laminated in this order from the side close to the backlight unit (the side on which the incident light LT1 is incident).

  In each of the embodiments described above, the second polarizing layer 7 and the second substrate 10 may be interchanged, and the electrode layer (TFT electrode layer) including the TFT is the liquid crystal layer 5 and the first polarizing layer. It may be provided between the layer 1 and the liquid crystal layer 5 and the second polarizing layer 7.

  That is, in the liquid crystal panel according to one modification, the TFT electrode layer, the liquid crystal layer 5, the second substrate 10, and the second polarizing layer 7 are closer to the backlight unit (incident light LT1 enters. From the side) in this order. To give a more specific example, in the liquid crystal panel according to a modification of the embodiment shown in FIG. 11, the first substrate 2, the wavelength-selective transmission layer 8A (8), and the light conversion layer 9A (9). The first polarizing layer 1, the TFT electrode layer, the liquid crystal layer 5, the second substrate 10, and the second polarizing layer 7 are closer to the backlight unit (the side on which the incident light LT1 is incident). ) In this order.

  In a liquid crystal panel according to another modification, the liquid crystal layer 5, the TFT electrode layer, the second polarizing layer 7, and the second substrate 10 are closer to the backlight unit (incident light LT1 is incident). From the side) in this order. To give a more specific example, in the liquid crystal panel according to another modification of the embodiment shown in FIG. 11, the first substrate 2, the wavelength selective transmission layer 8A (8), and the light conversion layer 9A ( 9), the first polarizing layer 1, the liquid crystal layer 5, the TFT electrode layer, the second polarizing layer 7, and the second substrate 10 are closer to the backlight unit (incident light LT1 is incident). May be laminated in this order.

  In the liquid crystal panel according to another modification, the liquid crystal layer 5, the TFT electrode layer, the second substrate 10, and the second polarizing layer 7 are closer to the backlight unit (incident light LT1 is incident). From the side) in this order. To give a more specific example, in the liquid crystal panel according to another modification of the embodiment shown in FIG. 11, the first substrate 2, the wavelength selective transmission layer 8A (8), and the light conversion layer 9A ( 9), the first polarizing layer 1, the liquid crystal layer 5, the TFT electrode layer, the second substrate 10, and the second polarizing layer 7 are closer to the backlight unit (incident light LT1 is incident). May be laminated in this order.

  In each of the embodiments described in detail above, light (incident light) using a high energy light source such as short-wavelength visible light or ultraviolet light is transmitted through the liquid crystal layer 5 and the polarizing layers 1 and 7 that function as an optical switch. The light-emitting nanocrystal particles contained in the light conversion layer 9 absorb, and the absorbed light is converted into light of a specific wavelength by the light-emitting nanocrystal particles to emit light, thereby displaying a color.

  Among the embodiments, in particular, the configuration in which the light conversion layer 9 is provided on the counter substrate (O-SUB) has a remarkable effect of suppressing or preventing the deterioration of the liquid crystal layer 5 due to the irradiation of high energy rays. It is preferable from the point of appearance.

  In the embodiment described above, in the embodiment having the configuration in which the wavelength selective transmission layer 8 is provided only on the backlight unit side (the side on which the incident light LT1 is incident) of the light conversion layer 9, the type of light source used (light emission) As in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8, the wavelength of the light conversion layer 9 on the side opposite to the backlight unit (the side opposite to where the incident light LT1 is incident) depends on the intensity of light and the blue LED as the element. A selective transmission layer (second wavelength selective transmission layer 11) may be further provided, and the wavelength selective transmission layer (second wavelength selectivity) is provided between the wavelength conversion transmission layer 8 and the light conversion layer. A transmissive layer 11) may be further provided. In these cases as well, as in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8, it is possible to suppress deterioration in image quality due to intrusion of unnecessary light (particularly blue light) from outside.

  In these forms, the first wavelength selective transmission layer 8 and the second wavelength selective transmission layer 11 may be the same as or different from each other. In a preferred embodiment, the wavelength-selective transmission layer 8 transmits light incident on the light conversion layer 9 and emits red light emitted from the light conversion pixel layer (NC-Red) including red light-emitting nanocrystal particles (NCR). The green light emitted from the light conversion pixel layer (NC-Green) including light and / or green light-emitting nanocrystal particles (NCG) is reflected, and the second wavelength-selective transmission layer 11 includes red light-emitting nano-particles. Red light emitted from the light conversion pixel layer (NC-Red) including crystal particles (NCR) and / or light emitted from the light conversion pixel layer (NC-Green) including green light emitting nanocrystal particles (NCG) The green light is transmitted, and the light of other colors (especially incident light (blue light)) is reflected or absorbed. In this form, the color purity of red or green can be further improved.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the light conversion layer 9 includes at least one selected from the group consisting of blue light-emitting nanocrystal particles NCB, green light-emitting nanocrystal particles NCG, and red light-emitting nanocrystal particles NCR. The light conversion layer 9 includes at least 2 selected from the group consisting of the blue light-emitting nanocrystal particles NCB, the green light-emitting nanocrystal particles NCG, and the red light-emitting nanocrystal particles NCR, including the above-described embodiments. Preferably it contains seeds.

  In one embodiment, the wavelength-selective transmission layer 8 in each embodiment described above is partitioned corresponding to the pixel portions (R, G, B) of each color. FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view showing another embodiment of the light conversion film. This light conversion film 90C is used in a form in which the wavelength selective transmission layer 8B (8) is partitioned corresponding to the pixel portions (R, G, B) of the respective colors.

  This light conversion film 90C includes the light conversion layer 9A (9) and the wavelength selective transmission layer 8B (8), as in the above-described embodiment, but the configuration of the wavelength selective transmission layer 8B (8). Is different from the embodiment described above. Specifically, the wavelength-selective transmission layer 8B (8) is provided at a position corresponding to the red pixel portion (R), selectively reflects light in the red wavelength region, and other wavelength regions. Is provided at a position corresponding to the green pixel portion (G), selectively reflects the light in the green wavelength region, and reflects the light in the other wavelength regions. A wavelength that is provided at a position corresponding to the wavelength-selective transmission part SRG that transmits and the blue pixel part (B), selectively reflects light in the blue wavelength region, and transmits light in other wavelength regions And a selective transmission part SRB.

  In this embodiment, incident light LT1 such as blue light from a blue LED is transmitted through the wavelength selective transmission layer 8B (8), and includes a light conversion pixel layer (NC-Red) including red light emitting nanocrystal particles (NCR). In the case of emitting red light after being absorbed by the light, an emission wave depending on the shape of the red light-emitting nanocrystal particles is emitted, but the red emitted light in the direction in which the incident light is incident is the light in the red wavelength region. Since it is reflected by the wavelength selective transmission portion SRR that selectively reflects, the intensity of red light toward the light conversion layer 9A (9) is improved. Similarly, the light incident on the green pixel portion (G) is also reflected by the wavelength-selective transmission portion SRG that selectively reflects light in the green wavelength region, so that the green color toward the light conversion layer 9A (9) side is reduced. The light intensity is improved.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 12, a wavelength selective transmission part SRB that selectively reflects light in the blue wavelength region and transmits light in other wavelength regions is provided in the blue pixel part (B). However, the wavelength selective transmission part SRB may not be provided depending on the type and intensity of incident light. For example, when the emission intensity of incident light (blue light) is strong, light in the red wavelength region and / or light in the green wavelength region is selectively transmitted (blue light) as in the embodiment shown in FIG. A second wavelength-selective transmission layer 11 that absorbs the light conversion layer 9A (9) may be provided on the side opposite to the wavelength-selective transmission layer 8B (8) (the side opposite to the backlight unit).

  In each of the above-described embodiments (light conversion films), the light conversion layer 9 and the wavelength selective transmission layer 8 are laminated so as to be in direct contact with each other. However, in other embodiments, the light conversion layer 9 and the wavelength selection layer are stacked. The transparent permeable layer 8 may be laminated with another layer interposed therebetween. The other layer may be, for example, an adhesive layer.

  In each of the embodiments (light conversion films) described above, the wavelength selective transmission layer 8 is provided over the entire surface of the light conversion layer 9, but in other embodiments, the wavelength selective transmission layer 8 is a light conversion layer. 9 may be provided in a part.

  Next, the light conversion layer and the wavelength selective transmission layer in each embodiment described above will be described in detail.

(Light conversion layer)
The components of the pixel portion of the light conversion layer include luminescent nanocrystal particles as essential components, resin components, other molecules having an affinity for the luminescent nanocrystals as necessary, known additives, and other coloring materials. It may contain. Further, as described above, it is preferable from the viewpoint of contrast that the boundary portion of each pixel portion has a black matrix.

  The light conversion layer according to the present embodiment contains luminescent nanocrystal particles. As used herein, the term “nanocrystalline particle” preferably refers to a particle having at least one length of 100 nm or less. The shape of the nanocrystals may have any geometric shape and may be symmetric or asymmetric. Specific examples of the shape of the nanocrystal include an elongated shape, a rod shape, a circle shape (spherical shape), an ellipse shape, a pyramid shape, a disk shape, a branch shape, a net shape, or any irregular shape. In some embodiments, the nanocrystals are preferably quantum dots or quantum rods.

  The luminescent nanocrystal particle preferably has a core including at least one first semiconductor material and a shell that covers the core and includes a second semiconductor material that is the same as or different from the core.

  Therefore, the luminescent nanocrystal particles are composed of at least a core containing the first semiconductor material and a shell containing the second semiconductor material, and the first semiconductor material and the second semiconductor material may be the same or different. . Further, the core and / or the shell may include a third semiconductor material other than the first semiconductor and / or the second semiconductor. In addition, what is necessary is just to coat | cover at least one part of a core with the core covering here.

  Further, the luminescent nanocrystal particle includes a core including at least one first semiconductor material, a first shell that covers the core and includes a second semiconductor material that is the same as or different from the core, If necessary, it is preferable to have a second shell that covers the first shell and includes a third semiconductor material that is the same as or different from the first shell.

  Therefore, the luminescent nanocrystal particle according to the present embodiment has a core including a first semiconductor material and a shell that covers the core and includes a second semiconductor material identical to the core, that is, one type. Alternatively, an embodiment composed of two or more kinds of semiconductor materials (= a core-only structure (also referred to as a core structure)), a core containing a first semiconductor material, and a second coating that covers the core and is different from the core A form having a shell including a semiconductor material, ie, a core / shell structure; a core including a first semiconductor material; and a first shell covering the core and including a second semiconductor material different from the core; Of the three structures of the core / shell / shell structure, having a second shell that covers the first shell and includes a third semiconductor material different from the first shell It is preferred to have one even without.

  Further, as described above, the luminescent nanocrystal particle according to the present embodiment preferably includes three forms of a core structure, a core / shell structure, and a core / shell / shell structure. In this case, the core has two or more types. It may be a mixed crystal containing any of the above semiconductor materials (for example, CdSe + CdS, CIS + ZnS, etc.). Furthermore, the shell may also be a mixed crystal containing two or more semiconductor materials.

  The semiconductor material according to this embodiment is selected from the group consisting of II-VI group semiconductors, III-V group semiconductors, I-III-VI group semiconductors, IV group semiconductors and I-II-IV-VI group semiconductors. It is preferable that it is a seed | species or 2 or more types. Preferable examples of the first semiconductor material, the first semiconductor material, and the third semiconductor material according to this embodiment are the same as the above-described semiconductor materials.

Specifically, the semiconductor material according to the present embodiment includes CdS, CdSe, CdTe, ZnS, ZnSe, ZnTe, ZnO, HgS, HgSe, HgTe, CdSeS, CdSeTe, CdSTe, ZnSeS, ZnSeTe, ZnSTTe, HgSeT, HgSeT, HgSTe, CdZnS, CdZnSe, CdZnTe, CdHgS, CdHgSe, CdHgTe, HgZnS, HgZnSe, CdHgZnTe, CdZnSeS, CdZnSeTe, CdZnSe, CdHgSeS, CdHgSeS, CdHgSeS AlAs, AlSb, InN, InP, InAs, InSb, GaNP, GANAS, GaNSb, G PAs, GaPSb, AlNP, AlNAs, AlNSb, AlPAs, AlPSb, InNP, InNAs, InNSb, InPAs, InPSb, GaAlNP, GaAlNAs, GaAlNSb, GaAlPAs, GaAlPSb, GaInNP, GaInNAsIn, GaInPSIn, GaInPSIn InAlPAs, InAlPSb; SnS, SnSe, SnTe, PbS, PbSe, PbTe, SnSeS, SnSeTe, SnSTe, PbSeS, PbSeTe, PbSTe, SnPbS, SnPbSe, SnPbTe, Sn; CuGaSe2, CuInS , CuGaS2, CuInSe2, AgInS2, AgGaSe2, AgGaS2, C, Si, and Ge, at least one selected from the group consisting of these, and these compound semiconductors may be used alone or in combination of two or more At best, CdS, CdSe, CdTe, ZnS , ZnSe, ZnTe, ZnO, HgS, HgSe, HgTe, InP, InAs, InSb, GaP, GaAs, GaSb, AgInS 2, AgInSe 2, AgInTe 2, AgGaS 2, AgGaSe 2 And at least one selected from the group consisting of AgGaTe ₂ , CuInS ₂ , CuInSe ₂ , CuInTe ₂ , CuGaS ₂ , CuGaSe ₂ , CuGaTe ₂ , Si, C, Ge, and Cu ₂ ZnSnS _4. Preferably, these compound semiconductors may be used alone or in combination of two or more.

  The luminescent nanocrystal particles according to the present embodiment are a group consisting of red luminescent nanocrystal particles that emit red light, green luminescent nanocrystal particles that emit green light, and blue luminescent nanocrystal particles that emit blue light. It is preferable to include at least one nanocrystal selected from: In general, the luminescent color of luminescent nanocrystal particles depends on the particle size according to the Schrodinger wave equation of the well-type potential model, but also depends on the energy gap of the luminescent nanocrystal particles, so the luminescence used. The luminescent color is selected by adjusting the conductive nanocrystal particles and the particle diameter thereof.

  In this embodiment, the upper limit of the wavelength peak of the fluorescence spectrum of the red light emitting nanocrystal particles emitting red light is 665 nm, 663 nm, 660 nm, 658 nm, 655 nm, 653 nm, 651 nm, 650 nm, 647 nm, 645 nm, 643 nm, 640 nm, 637 nm. 635 nm, 632 nm, or 630 nm, and the lower limit of the wavelength peak is preferably 628 nm, 625 nm, 623 nm, 620 nm, 615 nm, 610 nm, 607 nm, or 605 nm.

  In this embodiment, the upper limit of the wavelength peak of the fluorescence spectrum of green-emitting nanocrystal particles emitting green light is 560 nm, 557 nm, 555 nm, 550 nm, 547 nm, 545 nm, 543 nm, 540 nm, 537 nm, 535 nm, 532 nm or 530 nm. The lower limit of the wavelength peak is preferably 528 nm, 525 nm, 523 nm, 520 nm, 515 nm, 510 nm, 507 nm, 505 nm, 503 nm or 500 nm.

  In this embodiment, the upper limit of the wavelength peak of the fluorescence spectrum of the blue light-emitting nanocrystal particles that emit blue light is 480 nm, 477 nm, 475 nm, 470 nm, 467 nm, 465 nm, 463 nm, 460 nm, 457 nm, 455 nm, 452 nm, or 450 nm. The lower limit of the wavelength peak is preferably 450 nm, 445 nm, 440 nm, 435 nm, 430 nm, 428 nm, 425 nm, 422 nm, or 420 nm.

  In the present embodiment, it is desirable that the semiconductor material used for the red light-emitting nanocrystal particles emitting red light has a peak wavelength of light emission in the range of 635 nm ± 30 nm. Similarly, the semiconductor material used for the green light-emitting nanocrystal particles that emit green light preferably has a peak emission wavelength in the range of 530 nm ± 30 nm, and the blue light-emitting nanocrystal particles that emit blue light It is desirable that the semiconductor material used in the above has a peak wavelength of light emission in the range of 450 nm ± 30 nm.

  The lower limit of the fluorescence quantum yield of the luminescent nanocrystal particles according to the present embodiment is preferable in the order of 40% or more, 30% or more, 20% or more, and 10% or more.

  The upper limit of the full width at half maximum of the fluorescence spectrum of the luminescent nanocrystal particles according to this embodiment is preferable in the order of 60 nm or less, 55 nm or less, 50 nm or less, and 45 nm or less.

  The upper limit value of the particle diameter (primary particle) of the red light-emitting nanocrystal particles according to the present embodiment is preferable in the order of 50 nm or less, 40 nm or less, 30 nm or less, and 20 nm or less.

  The upper limit value of the peak wavelength of the red light-emitting nanocrystal particles according to this embodiment is 665 nm, and the lower limit value is 605 nm. The compound and the particle size thereof are selected so as to match this peak wavelength. Similarly, the upper limit value of the peak wavelength of the green light-emitting nanocrystal particles is 560 nm, the lower limit value is 500 nm, the upper limit value of the peak wavelength of the blue light-emitting nanocrystal particles is 420 nm, and the lower limit value is 480 nm. Similarly, the compound and its particle size are selected.

  The liquid crystal display element according to this embodiment includes at least one pixel. The color constituting the pixel is obtained by three adjacent pixels, and each pixel is red (for example, a CdSe luminescent nanocrystal particle, a CdSe rod-shaped luminescent nanocrystal particle, a rod-like shape having a core-shell structure) It is a luminescent nanocrystal particle, the shell part is CdS, the inner core part is CdSe, and is a rod-like luminescent nanocrystal particle having a core-shell structure, the shell part is CdS, and the inner core part Is a luminescent nanocrystal particle having ZnSe and a core-shell structure, the shell portion is CdS, the inner core portion is CdSe, and the luminescent nanocrystal particle having a core-shell structure, and the shell portion is CdS. The inner core portion is ZnSe, a mixed crystal luminescent nanocrystal particle of CdSe and ZnS, and a mixed crystal rod-shaped luminescent nanocrystal of CdSe and ZnS. Luminescent nanocrystalline particles of InP, luminescent nanocrystalline particles of InP, rod-shaped luminescent nanocrystalline particles of InP, luminescent nanocrystalline particles of mixed crystals of CdSe and CdS, mixed crystals of CdSe and CdS Rod-shaped luminescent nanocrystal particles, ZnSe and CdS mixed crystal luminescent nanocrystal particles, ZnSe and CdS mixed crystal rod-shaped luminescent nanocrystal particles, etc.), green (CdSe luminescent nanocrystal particles, CdSe rod-shaped luminescent nanocrystal particles, CdSe and ZnS mixed crystal luminescent nanocrystal particles, CdSe and ZnS mixed crystal rod-shaped luminescent nanocrystal particles, etc.) and blue (ZnSe luminescent nanocrystal particles) Crystal particle, ZnSe rod-like luminescent nanocrystal particle, ZnS luminescent nanocrystal particle, ZnS rod-like luminescent nanocrystal particle, luminescent nanocrystal particle with core-shell structure Yes, the shell portion is ZnSe, the inner core portion is ZnS, and rod-like light-emitting nanocrystal particles having a core-shell structure. The shell portion is ZnSe and the inner core portion is ZnS, CdS light emission. Nanocrystal particles, rod-like light-emitting nanocrystal particles of CdS). Other colors (for example, yellow) may be contained in the light conversion layer as necessary, and different colors of four or more adjacent pixels may be used.

  The average particle diameter (primary particles) of the luminescent nanocrystal particles according to this embodiment in the present specification can be measured by TEM observation. In general, examples of the method for measuring the average particle size of nanocrystals include a light scattering method, a sedimentation type particle size measurement method using a solvent, and a method of actually observing particles with an electron microscope and measuring the average particle size. Since the luminescent nanocrystal particles are easily deteriorated by moisture or the like, in this embodiment, a plurality of crystals are directly observed with a transmission electron microscope (TEM) or a scanning electron microscope (SEM), and a projection two-dimensional image is displayed. Therefore, a method of calculating the particle diameter from the long / short diameter ratio and obtaining the average is preferable. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the average particle diameter is calculated by applying the above method. The primary particle of the luminescent nanocrystal particle is a single crystal having a size of several to several tens of nm or a crystallite close thereto, and the size and shape of the primary particle of the luminescent nanocrystal particle are It is considered to depend on the chemical composition, structure, production method, production conditions, etc. of the primary particles.

  In the light conversion layer according to this embodiment, the luminescent nanocrystal particles preferably have an organic ligand on the surface thereof from the viewpoint of dispersion stability. The organic ligand may be coordinated to the surface of the luminescent nanocrystal particle, for example. In other words, the surface of the luminescent nanocrystal particle may be passivated by the organic ligand. Moreover, the luminescent nanocrystal particle | grains may have a polymer dispersing agent on the surface. In one embodiment, for example, the organic dispersant is removed from the luminescent nanocrystal particles having the above-described organic ligand, and the organic dispersant and the polymer dispersant are exchanged, whereby the polymer dispersant is formed on the surface of the luminescent nanocrystal particle. May be combined. However, from the viewpoint of dispersion stability when an inkjet ink is used, it is preferable that a polymer dispersant is added to the luminescent nanocrystal particles in which the organic ligand is coordinated.

  Examples of the organic ligand include low molecules and polymers having a functional group having affinity for the luminescent nanocrystal particles, and the functional group having affinity is not particularly limited, but nitrogen, oxygen, A group containing one element selected from the group consisting of sulfur and phosphorus is preferable. Examples thereof include an organic sulfur group, an organic phosphate group pyrrolidone group, a pyridine group, an amino group, an amide group, an isocyanate group, a carbonyl group, and a hydroxyl group. For example, TOP (trioctylphosphine), TOPO (trioctylphosphine oxide), oleic acid, oleylamine, octylamine, trioctylamine, hexadecylamine, octanethiol, dodecanethiol, hexylphosphonic acid (HPA), tetradecyl Examples include phosphonic acid (TDPA) and octylphosphinic acid (OPA).

  As the luminescent nanocrystal particles, those dispersed in a colloidal form in an organic solvent can be used. It is preferable that the surface of the luminescent nanocrystal particles dispersed in the organic solvent is passivated by the above-described organic ligand. Examples of the organic solvent include cyclohexane, hexane, heptane, chloroform, toluene, octane, chlorobenzene, tetralin, diphenyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, butyl carbitol acetate, or a mixture thereof.

  The light conversion layer (or the ink composition for preparing the light conversion layer) according to this embodiment preferably contains a polymer dispersant. The polymer dispersant can uniformly disperse the light scattering particles in the ink.

  The light conversion layer in the present embodiment preferably contains a polymer dispersant that moderately stabilizes the luminescent nanocrystal particles in addition to the luminescent nanocrystal particles described above.

  In this embodiment, the polymer dispersant is a polymer compound having a weight average molecular weight of 750 or more and having a functional group having an affinity for the light scattering particles, and disperses the light scattering particles. It has a function. The polymer dispersant is adsorbed to the light-scattering particles through a functional group having an affinity for the light-scattering particles, and electrostatic and / or steric repulsion between the polymer dispersants. Light scattering particles are dispersed in the ink composition. The polymer dispersant is preferably bonded to the surface of the light-scattering particle and adsorbed to the light-scattering particle, but is bonded to the surface of the light-emitting nanocrystal particle and adsorbed to the light-emitting nanoparticle. It may be free in the ink composition.

  Examples of the functional group having an affinity for the light-scattering particles include an acidic functional group, a basic functional group, and a nonionic functional group. The acidic functional group has a dissociable proton and may be neutralized with a base such as amine or hydroxide ion, and the basic functional group is neutralized with an acid such as organic acid or inorganic acid. May be.

Examples of the acidic functional group include a carboxyl group (—COOH), a sulfo group (—SO ₃ H), a sulfuric acid group (—OSO ₃ H), a phosphonic acid group (—PO (OH) ₃ ), and a phosphoric acid group (—OPO ( OH) ₃ ), a phosphinic acid group (—PO (OH) —), and a mercapto group (—SH).

  Examples of basic functional groups include primary, secondary and tertiary amino groups, ammonium groups, imino groups, and nitrogen-containing heterocyclic groups such as pyridine, pyrimidine, pyrazine, imidazole and triazole.

Nonionic functional groups include hydroxy groups, ether groups, thioether groups, sulfinyl groups (—SO—), sulfonyl groups (—SO ₂ —), carbonyl groups, formyl groups, ester groups, carbonate groups, amide groups, Examples thereof include a carbamoyl group, a ureido group, a thioamide group, a thioureido group, a sulfamoyl group, a cyano group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a phosphine oxide group, and a phosphine sulfide group.

  From the viewpoint of dispersion stability of light-scattering particles, from the viewpoint of hardly causing the side effect that the luminescent nanocrystal particles settle, from the viewpoint of ease of synthesis of the polymer dispersant, and from the viewpoint of stability of the functional group, acidic functional As the group, a carboxyl group, a sulfo group, a phosphonic acid group, and a phosphoric acid group are preferably used, and as the basic functional group, an amino group is preferably used. Among these, a carboxyl group, a phosphonic acid group, and an amino group are more preferably used, and most preferably an amino group is used.

  The polymer dispersant having an acidic functional group has an acid value. The acid value of the polymer dispersant having an acidic functional group is preferably 1 to 150 mgKOH / g in terms of solid content. When the acid value is 1 or more, sufficient dispersibility of the light-scattering particles can be easily obtained, and when the acid value is 150 or less, the storage stability of the pixel portion (cured product of the ink composition) is hardly lowered. .

  In addition, the polymer dispersant having a basic functional group has an amine value. The amine value of the polymer dispersant having a basic functional group is preferably 1 to 200 mgKOH / g in terms of solid content. When the amine value is 1 or more, sufficient dispersibility of the light-scattering particles can be easily obtained, and when the amine value is 200 or less, the storage stability of the pixel portion (cured product of the ink composition) is hardly lowered. .

  The polymer dispersant may be a polymer (homopolymer) of a single monomer, or may be a copolymer (copolymer) of a plurality of types of monomers. The polymer dispersant may be any of a random copolymer, a block copolymer, or a graft copolymer. When the polymer dispersant is a graft copolymer, it may be a comb-shaped graft copolymer or a star-shaped graft copolymer. Polymer dispersants include, for example, acrylic resins, polyester resins, polyurethane resins, polyamide resins, polyethers, phenol resins, silicone resins, polyurea resins, amino resins, polyethylamines and other polyamines, epoxy resins, polyimides, etc. It may be.

  Commercially available products can also be used as the polymer dispersant, and examples of commercially available products include Ajinomoto Fine Techno Co., Ltd. Ajisper PB series, BYK's DISPERBYK series and BYK- series, BASF's Efka series. Etc. can be used.

  The light conversion layer (or the ink composition for preparing the light conversion layer) according to this embodiment preferably contains a resin component that functions as a binder in the cured product. The resin component according to the present embodiment is preferably a curable resin, and the curable resin is preferably a thermosetting resin or a UV curable resin.

  The thermosetting resin has a curable group, and examples of the curable group include an epoxy group, an oxetane group, an isocyanate group, an amino group, a carboxyl group, and a methylol group. From the viewpoint of excellent heat resistance and storage stability, and from the viewpoint of excellent adhesion to a light shielding part (for example, a black matrix) and a substrate, an epoxy group is preferable. The thermosetting resin may have one type of curable group or may have two or more types of curable groups.

  The thermosetting resin may be a polymer (homopolymer) of a single monomer, or may be a copolymer (copolymer) of a plurality of types of monomers. Further, the thermosetting resin may be any of a random copolymer, a block copolymer, or a graft copolymer.

  As the thermosetting resin, a compound having two or more thermosetting functional groups in one molecule is used, and it is usually used in combination with a curing agent. When using a thermosetting resin, you may further add the catalyst (curing accelerator) which can accelerate | stimulate a thermosetting reaction. In other words, the ink composition may contain a thermosetting component including a thermosetting resin (and a curing agent and a curing accelerator used as necessary). In addition to these, a polymer having no polymerization reactivity per se may be further used.

  As a compound having two or more thermosetting functional groups in one molecule, for example, an epoxy resin having two or more epoxy groups in one molecule (hereinafter also referred to as “polyfunctional epoxy resin”) may be used. “Epoxy resin” includes both monomeric epoxy resins and polymeric epoxy resins. The number of epoxy groups contained in one molecule of the polyfunctional epoxy resin is preferably 2 to 50, and more preferably 2 to 20. The epoxy group may be a structure having an oxirane ring structure, and may be a glycidyl group, an oxyethylene group, an epoxycyclohexyl group, or the like. As an epoxy resin, the well-known polyvalent epoxy resin which can be hardened | cured with carboxylic acid can be mentioned. Such epoxy resins are widely disclosed in, for example, published by Masaki Shinbo, “Epoxy Resin Handbook” published by Nikkan Kogyo Shimbun (1987), and these can be used.

  When a polyfunctional epoxy resin having a relatively low molecular weight is used as the thermosetting resin, the epoxy group is replenished in the ink composition (inkjet ink) to increase the concentration of epoxy reactive sites and increase the crosslinking density. it can.

  As the curing agent and curing accelerator used for curing the thermosetting resin, any known and commonly used one that can be dissolved or dispersed in the organic solvent described above can be used.

  The thermosetting resin may be insoluble in alkali from the viewpoint of easily obtaining a color filter pixel portion having excellent reliability. The thermosetting resin is alkali-insoluble means that the amount of the thermosetting resin dissolved in a 1% by mass potassium hydroxide aqueous solution at 25 ° C. is 30% by mass or less based on the total mass of the thermosetting resin. Means that. The dissolution amount of the thermosetting resin is preferably 10% by mass or less, and more preferably 3% by mass or less.

  The weight-average molecular weight of the thermosetting resin is such that an appropriate viscosity is easily obtained as an ink-jet ink, the ink composition has good curability, and the solvent resistance of the pixel portion (cured product of the ink composition). From the viewpoint of improving the wear resistance, it may be 750 or more, 1000 or more, or 2000 or more. From the viewpoint of obtaining an appropriate viscosity as an inkjet ink, it may be 500000 or less, 300000 or less, or 200000 or less. However, the molecular weight after crosslinking is not limited to this.

  The content of the thermosetting resin is the viewpoint that an appropriate viscosity is easily obtained as an inkjet ink, the viewpoint that the curability of the ink composition is good, and the solvent resistance of the pixel portion (cured product of the ink composition). From the viewpoint of improving the wear resistance, it may be 10% by mass or more, 15% by mass or more, or 20% by mass or more, based on the mass of the nonvolatile content of the ink composition. The content of the thermosetting resin may be 90% by mass or less based on the mass of the nonvolatile content of the ink composition from the viewpoint that the thickness of the pixel portion does not become too thick for the light conversion function. It may be not more than mass%, may be not more than 70 mass%, may be not more than 60 mass%, and may be not more than 50 mass%.

  The UV curable resin is preferably a resin obtained by polymerizing a photo radical polymerizable compound or a photo cationic polymerizable compound that is polymerized by light irradiation, and may be a photo polymerizable monomer or oligomer. These are used together with a photopolymerization initiator. The photoradical polymerizable compound is preferably used with a photoradical polymerization initiator, and the photocationic polymerizable compound is preferably used with a photocationic polymerization initiator. In other words, the ink composition for the light conversion layer according to this embodiment may contain a photopolymerizable component including a photopolymerizable compound and a photopolymerization initiator, and the photoradical polymerizable compound and the photoradical polymerization start. A photo radical polymerizable component containing an agent may be contained, and a photo cation polymerizable component containing a photo cation polymerizable compound and a photo cation polymerization initiator may be contained. A photo radical polymerizable compound and a photo cationic polymerizable compound may be used in combination, or a compound having a photo radical polymerizable property and a photo cationic polymerizable property may be used. A photo radical polymerization initiator, a photo cationic polymerization initiator, May be used in combination. A photopolymerizable compound may be used individually by 1 type, and may use 2 or more types together.

  Examples of the radical photopolymerizable compound include (meth) acrylate compounds. The (meth) acrylate compound may be a monofunctional (meth) acrylate having one (meth) acryloyl group or a polyfunctional (meth) acrylate having a plurality of (meth) acryloyl groups. It is preferable to use a monofunctional (meth) acrylate and a polyfunctional (meth) acrylate in combination from the viewpoint of suppressing a decrease in smoothness due to curing shrinkage during the production of the color filter. In the present specification, (meth) acrylate means “acrylate” and “methacrylate” corresponding thereto. The same applies to the expression “(meth) acryloyl”.

  Examples of the cationic photopolymerizable compound include an epoxy compound, an oxetane compound, and a vinyl ether compound.

  In addition, as the photopolymerizable compound in the present embodiment, the photopolymerizable compounds described in paragraphs 0042 to 0049 of JP2013-182215A can also be used.

  In the ink composition for the light conversion layer according to the present embodiment, when the curable component is composed solely of the photopolymerizable compound or the main component thereof, the photopolymerizable compound as described above is polymerizable. It is more preferable to use a bifunctional or polyfunctional photopolymerizable compound having two or more functional groups in one molecule as an essential component because durability (strength, heat resistance, etc.) of the cured product can be further improved. .

  The photopolymerizable compound may be insoluble in alkali from the viewpoint of easily obtaining a color filter pixel portion having excellent reliability. In the present specification, the photopolymerizable compound is alkali-insoluble means that the amount of the photopolymerizable compound dissolved in a 1% by mass aqueous potassium hydroxide solution at 25 ° C. is 30 based on the total mass of the photopolymerizable compound. It means that it is below mass%. The dissolution amount of the photopolymerizable compound is preferably 10% by mass or less, and more preferably 3% by mass or less.

  The content of the photopolymerizable compound is selected from the viewpoints of improving the curability of the ink composition and improving the solvent resistance and wear resistance of the pixel portion (cured product of the ink composition). Based on the mass of the nonvolatile content, it may be 10% by mass or more, 15% by mass or more, or 20% by mass or more. The content of the photopolymerizable compound may be 90% by mass or less and 80% by mass or less based on the mass of the nonvolatile content of the ink composition from the viewpoint of obtaining more excellent optical properties (leakage light). It may be 70% by mass or less, 60% by mass or less, or 50% by mass or less.

  The photopolymerizable compound has a crosslinkable group from the viewpoint of excellent stability of the pixel portion (cured product of the ink composition) (for example, it can suppress deterioration over time and is excellent in high-temperature storage stability and wet heat storage stability). You may do it. The crosslinkable group is a functional group that reacts with other crosslinkable groups by heat or active energy rays (for example, ultraviolet rays), such as an epoxy group, an oxetane group, a vinyl group, an acryloyl group, an acryloyloxy group, and a vinyl ether group. Is mentioned.

  As the radical photopolymerization initiator, a molecular cleavage type or hydrogen abstraction type radical photopolymerization initiator is suitable.

  The content of the photopolymerization initiator may be 0.1 parts by mass or more and 0.5 parts by mass or more with respect to 100 parts by mass of the photopolymerizable compound from the viewpoint of curability of the ink composition. It may be 1 part by mass or more. The content of the photopolymerization initiator may be 40 parts by mass or less and 30 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the photopolymerizable compound from the viewpoint of temporal stability of the pixel part (cured product of the ink composition). Or 20 parts by mass or less.

  Along with these UV curable resins, some thermoplastic resins may be used in combination. Examples of the thermoplastic resins include urethane resins, acrylic resins, polyamide resins, polyimide resins, and styrene maleic acid resins. Examples thereof include resins and styrene maleic anhydride resins.

  The ink composition for preparing the light conversion layer according to this embodiment may use a known organic solvent, for example, ethylene glycol monobutyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol monobutyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol diester. Examples include butyl ether, diethyl adipate, dibutyl oxalate, dimethyl malonate, diethyl malonate, dimethyl succinate, diethyl succinate, 1,4-butane, all diacetate, and glyceryl triacetate.

  Further, in the light conversion layer (or the ink composition for preparing the light conversion layer) according to this embodiment, in addition to the curable resin, the polymer dispersant, and the luminescent nanocrystal particles, light scattering particles Such known additives may be included.

  When a color filter pixel portion (hereinafter also simply referred to as a “pixel portion”) is formed from an ink composition using luminescent nanocrystal particles, light from the light source is not absorbed by the luminescent nanocrystal particles and the pixel portion. May leak. Since such leakage light reduces the color reproducibility of the pixel portion, when the pixel portion is used as the light conversion layer, it is preferable to reduce the leakage light as much as possible. The light scattering particles are preferably used in order to prevent leakage light from the pixel portion. The light scattering particles are, for example, optically inactive inorganic fine particles. The light scattering particles can scatter light from the light source irradiated to the color filter pixel portion.

  Examples of the material constituting the light scattering particles include simple metals such as tungsten, zirconium, titanium, platinum, bismuth, rhodium, palladium, silver, tin, platinum, and gold; silica, barium sulfate, barium carbonate, calcium carbonate, Metal oxides such as talc, titanium oxide, clay, kaolin, barium sulfate, barium carbonate, calcium carbonate, alumina white, titanium oxide, magnesium oxide, barium oxide, aluminum oxide, bismuth oxide, zirconium oxide, zinc oxide; magnesium carbonate, Metal carbonates such as barium carbonate, bismuth subcarbonate and calcium carbonate; metal hydroxides such as aluminum hydroxide; complex oxides such as barium zirconate, calcium zirconate, calcium titanate, barium titanate, strontium titanate, Bis nitrate Such as a metal salt of the scan, and the like. The light-scattering particles preferably include at least one selected from the group consisting of titanium oxide, alumina, zirconium oxide, zinc oxide, calcium carbonate, barium sulfate, and silica, from the viewpoint of being more effective in reducing leakage light. More preferably, it contains at least one selected from the group consisting of titanium oxide, barium sulfate and calcium carbonate.

  The shape of the light scattering particles may be spherical, filamentous, indeterminate. However, as the light scattering particles, it is possible to use particles having less directivity as the particle shape (for example, spherical, tetrahedral, etc. particles), thereby improving the uniformity, fluidity and light scattering of the ink composition. It is preferable in that it can be improved.

  The average particle diameter (volume average diameter) of the light-scattering particles in the ink composition may be 0.05 μm or more, or 0.2 μm or more, from the viewpoint of being excellent in the effect of reducing leakage light. It may be 0.3 μm or more. The average particle diameter (volume average diameter) of the light-scattering particles in the ink composition may be 1.0 μm or less, 0.6 μm or less, from the viewpoint of excellent ejection stability. It may be 4 μm or less. The average particle diameter (volume average diameter) of the light-scattering particles in the ink composition is 0.05 to 1.0 μm, 0.05 to 0.6 μm, 0.05 to 0.4 μm, and 0.2 to 1. It may be 0.0 μm, 0.2 to 0.6 μm, 0.2 to 0.4 μm, 0.3 to 1.0 μm, 0.3 to 0.6 μm, or 0.3 to 0.4 μm. From the viewpoint of easily obtaining such an average particle diameter (volume average diameter), the average particle diameter (volume average diameter) of the light-scattering particles to be used may be 50 nm or more and 1000 nm or less. The average particle diameter (volume average diameter) of the light-scattering particles is obtained by measuring with a dynamic light scattering nanotrack particle size distribution meter and calculating the volume average diameter. The average particle diameter (volume average diameter) of the light-scattering particles used is obtained by measuring the particle diameter of each particle with, for example, a transmission electron microscope or a scanning electron microscope and calculating the volume average diameter.

  The content of the light-scattering particles may be 0.1% by mass or more based on the non-volatile content of the ink composition, and may be 1% by mass or more from the viewpoint of being excellent in the effect of reducing leakage light. Alternatively, it may be 5% by mass or more, 7% by mass or more, 10% by mass or more, or 12% by mass or more. The content of the light-scattering particles may be 60% by mass or less and 50% by mass based on the mass of the non-volatile content of the ink composition from the viewpoint of being excellent in the effect of reducing leakage light and excellent in ejection stability. Or 40% by mass or less, 30% by mass or less, 25% by mass or less, 20% by mass or less, or 15% by mass. It may be the following. In this embodiment, since the ink composition contains a polymer dispersant, the light scattering particles can be favorably dispersed even when the content of the light scattering particles is within the above range.

  The mass ratio of the content of the light scattering particles to the content of the light emitting nanocrystal particles (light scattering particles / light emitting nanocrystal particles) is 0.1 to 5.0. The mass ratio (light-scattering particles / light-emitting nanocrystal particles) may be 0.2 or more or 0.5 or more from the viewpoint of excellent leakage light reduction effect. The mass ratio (light-scattering particles / light-emitting nanocrystal particles) may be 2.0 or less or 1.5 or less from the viewpoint of excellent leakage light reduction effect. The mass ratios (light scattering particles / luminescent nanocrystal particles) are 0.1 to 2.0, 0.1 to 1.5, 0.2 to 5.0, 0.2 to 2.0, 0.0. It may be 2 to 1.5, 0.5 to 5.0, 0.5 to 2.0, or 0.5 to 1.5. In addition, it is thought that leakage light reduction by light-scattering particles is based on the following mechanism. That is, when no light-scattering particles are present, it is considered that the backlight light only passes almost straight through the pixel portion and is less likely to be absorbed by the light-emitting nanocrystal particles. On the other hand, if the light-scattering particles are present in the same pixel portion as the light-emitting nanocrystal particles, the backlight light is scattered in all directions in the pixel portion, and the light-emitting nanocrystal particles can receive it. Even if the same backlight is used, it is considered that the light absorption amount in the pixel portion increases. As a result, it is considered that leakage light can be prevented by such a mechanism.

  The light conversion layer according to the present embodiment includes a three-color pixel portion of red (R), green (G), and blue (B), and may include a color material if necessary. For example, a diketopyrrolopyrrole pigment and / or an anionic red organic dye in the red (R) pixel portion, and a copper halide phthalocyanine pigment, phthalocyanine in the green (G) pixel portion. At least one selected from the group consisting of a green dye, a mixture of a phthalocyanine blue dye and an azo yellow organic dye, and an ε-type copper phthalocyanine pigment and / or a cationic blue organic dye in the blue (B) pixel portion It is preferable to contain.

  Further, when the light conversion layer according to the present embodiment includes a yellow (Y) pixel portion (yellow color layer), as a color material, the yellow color layer includes C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 150, 215, 185, 138, 139, C.I. I. It is also preferable to contain at least one yellow organic dye / pigment selected from the group consisting of Solvent Yellow 21, 82, 83: 1, 33, 162.

  The color filter is preferably formed using the above color material. For example, diketopyrrolopyrrole pigment and / or anionic red organic dye in red (R) color filter, copper halide phthalocyanine pigment, phthalocyanine green dye, phthalocyanine blue dye in green (G) color filter It is preferable that at least one selected from the group consisting of a mixture of an azo-based yellow organic dye contains an ε-type copper phthalocyanine pigment and / or a cationic blue organic dye in a blue (B) color filter.

  In addition, the color filter may contain the above-described transparent resin, a photocurable compound described later, a dispersant, and the like, if necessary, and the color filter can be produced by a known photolithography method or the like.

(Method for producing light conversion layer)
The light conversion layer can be formed by a conventionally known method. A typical method for forming the pixel portion is a photolithography method, which is provided with a light-curable nanocrystal-containing photocurable composition to be described later and a transparent matrix black matrix for a conventional color filter. After applying to the surface on the side, heating and drying (pre-baking), pattern exposure is performed by irradiating ultraviolet rays through a photomask to cure the photocurable compound at the location corresponding to the pixel portion, and then unexposed In this method, the portion is developed with a developing solution, the non-pixel portion is removed, and the pixel portion is fixed to the transparent substrate. In this method, a pixel portion composed of a cured colored film of a light-emitting nanocrystal-containing photocurable composition is formed on a transparent substrate.

  A photocurable composition to be described later is prepared for each of other color pixels such as a red (R) pixel, a green (G) pixel, a blue (B) pixel, and a yellow (Y) pixel as necessary, By repeating these operations, a light conversion layer having colored pixel portions of red (R) pixels, green (G) pixels, blue (B) pixels, and yellow (Y) pixels at a predetermined position can be manufactured.

  Examples of the method for applying a light-emitting nanocrystal particle-containing photocurable composition to be described later on a transparent substrate such as glass include a spin coating method, a roll coating method, and an ink jet method.

  Although the drying conditions of the coating film of the light-emitting nanocrystal particle-containing photocurable composition applied to the transparent substrate vary depending on the type of each component, the blending ratio, etc., it is usually 50 to 150 ° C. for about 1 to 15 minutes. It is. Moreover, as light used for photocuring of the luminescent nanocrystal particle containing photocurable composition, it is preferable to use the ultraviolet rays of a wavelength range of 200-500 nm, or visible light. Various light sources that emit light in this wavelength range can be used.

  Examples of the developing method include a liquid piling method, a dipping method, and a spray method. After exposure and development of the photocurable composition, the transparent substrate on which the necessary color pixel portion is formed is washed with water and dried. The color filter thus obtained is subjected to heat treatment (post-baking) at 90 to 280 ° C. for a predetermined time with a heating device such as a hot plate or an oven, thereby removing volatile components in the colored coating film and simultaneously emitting light. The unreacted photocurable compound remaining in the cured colored film of the photocurable composition containing the curable nanocrystal particles is thermally cured to complete the light conversion layer.

  The color material and resin for the light conversion layer of the present embodiment are used with the luminescent nanocrystal particles of the present embodiment, so that the voltage holding ratio (VHR) of the liquid crystal layer is lowered, the blue light or the ultraviolet light is deteriorated, the ion density It is possible to provide a liquid crystal display device that prevents an increase in (ID) and solves display defect problems such as white spots, uneven alignment, and baking.

  As a manufacturing method of the said luminescent nanocrystal particle containing photocurable composition, a luminescent nanocrystal particle and an organic solvent are mixed, and if necessary, it has an affinity molecule | numerator, a dispersing agent, a coloring material (= Dye and / or pigment composition), and stirring and dispersing so as to be uniform. First, a dispersion liquid for forming the pixel portion of the light conversion layer is prepared, and then the photo-curing property is prepared there. A method is generally used in which a compound and, if necessary, a thermoplastic resin, a photopolymerization initiator, and the like are added to form a luminescent nanocrystal particle-containing photocurable composition containing luminescent nanocrystal particles.

  Examples of the organic solvent used here include aromatic solvents such as toluene, xylene, methoxybenzene, ethyl acetate, propyl acetate, butyl acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol methyl ether acetate. , Acetate solvents such as diethylene glycol ethyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol propyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol butyl ether acetate, propionate solvents such as ethoxyethyl propionate, alcohol solvents such as methanol and ethanol, butyl cellosolve, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol ethyl Ether, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether Ether solvents such as methyl, ketone solvents such as methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone and cyclohexanone, aliphatic hydrocarbon solvents such as hexane, N, N-dimethylformamide, γ-butyrolactam, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, aniline And nitrogen compound solvents such as pyridine, lactone solvents such as γ-butyrolactone, and carbamic acid esters such as a 48:52 mixture of methyl carbamate and ethyl carbamate.

  Dispersants used here include, for example, Big Chemie's Dispersic 130, Dispersic 161, Dispersic 162, Dispersic 163, Dispersic 170, Dispersic 171, Dispersic 174, Dispersic 180, Dispersic 182, Dispersic 183, Dispersic 184, Dispersic 185, Dispersic 2000, Dispersic 2001, Dispersic 2020, Dispersic 2050, Dispersic 2070, Dispersic 2096, Dispersic 2150, Dispersic LPN21116, Dispersic LPN6919 Efka EFKA46, EFKA47, EFKA452, EFKALP4008, EFKA4 09, EFKA LP4010, EFKA LP4050, LP4055, EFKA400, EFKA401, EFKA402, EFKA403, EFKA450, EFKA451, EFKA453, EFKA4540, EFKA4550, EFKALP4560, EFKA120, EFKA150, EFKA1501, EFKA1501, EFKA1501, EFKA1501 1502, Efka 1503, Lubrizol's Sol Sparse 3000, Sol Sparse 9000, Sol Sparse 13240, Sol Sparse 13650, Sol Sparse 13940, Sol Sparse 17000, 18000, Sol Sparse 20000, Sol Sparse 21000, Sol Sparse 20000, Sol Sparse 24000, Sol Sparse 26000, Sol Sparse 28000, Sol Sparse 28000, Solsparse 32000, Solsparse 36 00, Solsperse 37000, Solsperse 38000, Solsperse 41000, Solsperse 42000, Solsperse 43000, Solsperse 44000, Solsperse 71000, Ajinomoto Co., Ltd. Agents, natural rosin such as acrylic resin, urethane resin, alkyd resin, wood rosin, gum rosin, tall oil rosin, polymerized rosin, disproportionated rosin, hydrogenated rosin, oxidized rosin, modified rosin such as maleated rosin, Rosin derivatives such as rosinamine, lime rosin, rosin alkylene oxide adduct, rosin alkyd adduct, rosin modified phenol, etc. A synthetic resin that is liquid and water-insoluble at room temperature can be contained. Addition of these dispersants and resins also contributes to reduction of flocculation, improvement of pigment dispersion stability, and improvement of viscosity characteristics of the dispersion.

  Further, as a dispersion aid, organic pigment derivatives such as phthalimidomethyl derivatives, sulfonic acid derivatives, N- (dialkylamino) methyl derivatives, N- (dialkylaminoalkyl) sulfonic acid amide derivatives, etc. You can also. Of course, two or more of these derivatives can be used in combination.

  Examples of the thermoplastic resin used for the preparation of the photocurable composition containing luminescent nanocrystal particles include urethane resin, acrylic resin, polyamide resin, polyimide resin, styrene maleic acid resin, and styrene maleic anhydride. Based resins and the like.

  Examples of the photocurable compound containing luminescent nanocrystal particles include 1,6-hexanediol diacrylate, ethylene glycol diacrylate, neopentyl glycol diacrylate, triethylene glycol diacrylate, bis (acryloxyethoxy) bisphenol A, Bifunctional monomers such as 3-methylpentanediol diacrylate, trimethylol propaton triacrylate, pentaerythritol triacrylate, tris [2- (meth) acryloyloxyethyl) isocyanurate, dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate, dipentaerythritol Polyfunctional monomers with relatively low molecular weight such as pentaacrylate, polyester acrylate, polyurethane acrylate, polyether acrylate, etc. Relatively large polyfunctional monomer having a molecular weight thereof.

  Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include acetophenone, benzophenone, benzyldimethylketanol, benzoyl peroxide, 2-chlorothioxanthone, 1,3-bis (4′-azidobenzal) -2-propane, 1,3-bis (4 ′). -Azidobenzal) -2-propane-2'-sulfonic acid, 4,4'-diazidostilbene-2,2'-disulfonic acid and the like. Examples of commercially available photopolymerization initiators include “Irgacure (trade name) -184”, “Irgacure (trade name) -369”, “Darocur (trade name) -1173” manufactured by BASF, and “Lucirin-” manufactured by BASF. "TPO", Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. "Kayacure (trade name) DETX", "Kayacure (trade name) OA", Stofer "Bicure 10", "Bicure 55", Akzo "Trigonal PI", Sand "Sandray 1000" manufactured by Upjohn, "Deep" manufactured by Upjohn, and "Biimidazole" manufactured by Kurokin Kasei.

  Moreover, a well-known and usual photosensitizer can also be used together with the said photoinitiator. Examples of the photosensitizer include amines, ureas, compounds having a sulfur atom, compounds having a phosphorus atom, compounds having a chlorine atom, nitriles or other compounds having a nitrogen atom. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.

  The blending ratio of the photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited, but is preferably in the range of 0.1 to 30% with respect to the compound having a photopolymerizable or photocurable functional group on a mass basis. If it is less than 0.1%, the photosensitivity at the time of photocuring tends to decrease, and if it exceeds 30%, crystals of the photopolymerization initiator are precipitated when the pigment-dispersed resist coating film is dried. May cause deterioration of film properties.

  Using each of the materials as described above, 300 to 100,000 parts of an organic solvent and 1 to 500 parts of an affinity molecule or dispersant per 100 parts of the luminescent nanocrystal particles of the present embodiment on a mass basis. Can be stirred and dispersed in a uniform manner to obtain the dye / pigment solution. Then, per 100 parts of this pigment dispersion, a total of 0.125 to 2500 parts of thermoplastic resin and photocurable compound, 0.05 to 10 parts of photopolymerization initiator per 1 part of photocurable compound, and if necessary In addition, an organic solvent can be further added, and the photocurable composition containing luminescent nanocrystal particles for forming a pixel portion by stirring and dispersing so as to be uniform can be obtained.

  As the developer, a known and commonly used organic solvent or alkaline aqueous solution can be used. In particular, when the photocurable composition contains a thermoplastic resin or a photocurable compound, and at least one of them has an acid value and exhibits alkali solubility, the color filter can be washed with an alkaline aqueous solution. It is effective for forming the pixel portion.

  Here, although the manufacturing method of the colored pixel part of R pixel, G pixel, B pixel, and Y pixel by the photolithography method was described in detail, it was prepared using the luminescent nanocrystal particle containing composition of this embodiment. For the pixel portion, each color pixel portion is formed by other electrodeposition methods, transfer methods, micellar electrolysis methods, PVED (Photovoltaic Electrodeposition) methods, ink jet methods, reverse printing methods, thermosetting methods, etc., and a light conversion layer is manufactured. May be.

  A method for producing an ink composition for a light conversion layer according to this embodiment will be described. The method for producing an ink composition includes, for example, a first step of preparing a dispersion of light scattering particles containing light scattering particles and a polymer dispersant, a dispersion of light scattering particles, and a light-emitting nanoparticle. A second step of mixing the crystal particles. In this method, the dispersion of light scattering particles may further contain a thermosetting resin, and in the second step, a thermosetting resin may be further mixed. According to this method, the light scattering particles can be sufficiently dispersed. Therefore, an ink composition that can reduce leakage light in the pixel portion can be easily obtained.

  In the step of preparing a dispersion of light-scattering particles, the dispersion of light-scattering particles is performed by mixing the light-scattering particles, a polymer dispersant, and optionally a thermosetting resin, and performing a dispersion treatment. May be prepared. The mixing and dispersing treatment may be performed using a dispersing device such as a bead mill, a paint conditioner, a planetary stirrer or the like. It is preferable to use a bead mill or a paint conditioner from the viewpoint of good dispersibility of the light scattering particles and easy adjustment of the average particle diameter of the light scattering particles to a desired range.

  The method for producing an ink composition may further include a step of preparing a dispersion of luminescent nanocrystal particles containing the luminescent nanocrystal particles and a thermosetting resin before the second step. Good. In this case, in the second step, the dispersion of light scattering particles and the dispersion of luminescent nanocrystal particles are mixed. According to this method, the luminescent nanocrystal particles can be sufficiently dispersed. Therefore, an ink composition that can reduce leakage light in the pixel portion can be easily obtained. In the step of preparing a dispersion of luminescent nanocrystal particles, mixing and dispersion of the luminescent nanocrystal particles and the thermosetting resin are performed using the same dispersing device as the step of preparing the dispersion of light scattering particles. Processing may be performed.

  When the ink composition of this embodiment is used as an ink composition for an ink jet system, it is preferably applied to a piezo jet ink jet recording apparatus using a mechanical ejection mechanism using a piezoelectric element. In the piezo jet method, the ink composition is not instantaneously exposed to high temperatures during ejection, the luminescent nanocrystal particles are not easily altered, and the light emission characteristics as expected by the color filter pixel part (light conversion layer) Is easier to obtain.

  The light conversion layer according to the present embodiment is, for example, the embodiment described above in which the black matrix that is the light shielding portion is formed in a pattern on the base material, and then the pixel portion forming region partitioned by the light shielding portion on the base material. The ink composition (inkjet ink) can be selectively adhered by an inkjet method, and the ink composition is cured by irradiation with active energy rays or heating.

  The method for forming the light-shielding part is to form a metal thin film such as chromium or a resin composition thin film containing light-shielding particles in a region that becomes a boundary between a plurality of pixel parts on one side of the substrate, A method of patterning this thin film is exemplified. The metal thin film can be formed by, for example, a sputtering method, a vacuum deposition method, or the like, and the thin film of the resin composition containing the light-shielding particles can be formed by, for example, a method such as coating or printing. Examples of the patterning method include a photolithography method.

  Examples of the inkjet method include a bubble jet (registered trademark) method using an electrothermal transducer as an energy generating element, a piezo jet method using a piezoelectric element, and the like.

When the ink composition is cured by irradiation with active energy rays (for example, ultraviolet rays), for example, a mercury lamp, a metal halide lamp, a xenon lamp, an LED, or the like may be used. The wavelength of the irradiated light may be, for example, 200 nm or more and 440 nm or less. The exposure amount may be, for example, 10 mJ / cm ² or more, and 4000 mJ / cm ² or less.

  When the ink composition is cured by heating, the heating temperature may be, for example, 110 ° C. or higher and 250 ° C. or lower. The heating time may be, for example, 10 minutes or more and 120 minutes or less.

  As mentioned above, although one embodiment of the color filter, the light conversion layer, and the manufacturing method thereof has been described, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment.

(Wavelength selective transmission layer)
The average film thickness of the wavelength-selective transmission layer according to this embodiment is appropriately selected according to the desired wavelength range of transmitted light, the desired wavelength range of reflected light, and the like. Preferably, 0.7-12 micrometers is more preferable, and 1-10 micrometers is further more preferable.

  The light conversion film according to the present embodiment may have a support base (also referred to as a support substrate, which corresponds to the support substrate 12 shown in FIG. 6) as necessary. For example, in order to support the light conversion layer, A support substrate is used to support the wavelength selective transmission layer or to support the light conversion film. The supporting substrate is preferably a glass substrate or a transparent substrate (plastic film or plastic sheet). The plastic transparent substrate is a polyolefin resin, vinyl resin, polyester resin, acrylic resin, polyamide resin, cellulose resin, polystyrene. Preferred examples include those made of resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, polyimide resin, and the like, polyester resins such as polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film, and cellulose resins such as triacetyl cellulose (TAC).

  From the viewpoint of adhesion with the layer (light conversion layer or wavelength-selective transmission layer) provided thereon, the support substrate is optionally subjected to corona discharge treatment, chromium oxidation treatment, hot air treatment, ozone treatment on one or both sides. A physical or chemical surface treatment such as a method, an ultraviolet treatment method, a sand blast method, a solvent treatment method or a plasma treatment may be performed.

  Although there is no restriction | limiting in particular about the thickness of the support base material which concerns on this embodiment, When durability is ensured and versatility is considered, it is about 20-200 micrometers normally, Preferably it is the range of 30-150 micrometers.

  The support material may be subjected to a treatment such as forming a primer layer or a back primer layer from the viewpoint of enhancing adhesion and adhesion between the substrate and the wavelength selective transmission layer or the light conversion layer. . The material used for forming the primer layer is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include acrylic resins, vinyl chloride-vinyl acetate copolymers, polyesters, polyurethanes, chlorinated polypropylenes, and chlorinated polyethylenes. The material used for the back primer layer is appropriately selected depending on the adherend.

  Although there is no restriction | limiting in particular about the thickness of the transparent base material which concerns on this embodiment, When durability is ensured and versatility is considered, it is about 20-200 micrometers normally, Preferably it is the range of 30-150 micrometers.

  The wavelength selective transmission layer according to this embodiment is preferably a dielectric multilayer film or a cholestic liquid crystal layer.

  The dielectric multilayer film includes two layers having different refractive indexes, a high refractive index layer having a higher refractive index than the other, a low refractive index layer having a lower refractive index than the high refractive index layer, Is a multilayer structure in which a plurality of sets (for example, 2 to 9 sets) are stacked. This laminated multilayer structure is described in, for example, “Surface Technology”, p890-894, Vol. 9, 1997, written by Keiji Kuriyama.

  With such a multilayer structure, it is possible to obtain a mirror having high reflectivity and edge filters (a short wave pass filter, a long wave pass filter, etc.) that divide light in a specific wavelength range into reflection and transmission. In general, a dielectric multilayer film can increase the reflectance of light having a desired wavelength with a small number of layers by designing a large difference in refractive index between a high refractive index layer and a low refractive index layer. Further, at this time, when the thickness d of each refractive index layer is set to the optical film thickness, the refractive index of the layer material with respect to the quarter wavelength, that is, the wavelength λ of the desired reflected light is n, and d = λ / 4n It is known that the wave reflected at the layer boundary cancels out and a forbidden band is created for the wave, thereby reducing the transmittance.

  In the present embodiment, in at least one set including a high refractive index layer and a low refractive index layer in contact with the high refractive index layer, the refractive index difference between the high refractive index layer and the low refractive index layer is 0. It is preferably 04 or more, more preferably 0.05 or more, still more preferably 0.08 or more, still more preferably 0.11 or more, and 0.21 or more. Even more preferably, it is particularly preferably 0.38 or more.

  For example, the preferable refractive index of the high refractive index layer is 1.2 to 2.7, more preferably 1.5 to 2.5, still more preferably 1.7 to 2.3, and particularly preferably. Is 1.9 to 2.2. Moreover, as a preferable refractive index of a low-refractive-index layer, it is preferable that it is 0.9-1.7, it is more preferable that it is 1.2-1.55, and 1.25-1.5 is further more preferable. .

  The dielectric multilayer film is used for a DBR (Distributed Bragg Reflector) film or the like, and can selectively reflect light having a predetermined wavelength. As a material of the dielectric multilayer film according to this embodiment, it can be formed including at least one oxide or nitride selected from the group consisting of Si, Ti, Zr, Nb, Ta, and Al. The total thickness of the dielectric multilayer film is preferably about 0.05 μm to 2 μm, and more preferably about 0.1 μm to 1.5 μm.

The dielectric multilayer film according to this embodiment includes a stack of titanium oxide and silicon oxide, for example, an oxide film having a low refractive index such as SiO ₂ , MgF ₂ , and CaF ₂ , TiO ₂ , ZnO ₂ , CeO ₂ , and Ta _2. It can be obtained by alternately forming oxide films with a high refractive index such as O ₃ or Nb ₂ O ₅ by vacuum deposition or the like. In addition, a film having a two-layer structure of silver and SiO ₂ or Al ₂ O ₃ , a film in which silica (SiO ₂ ) layers and titania (TiO ₂ ) layers are alternately stacked, an aluminum nitride (AlN) layer, and aluminum oxide Examples include a film in which (Al ₂ O ₃ ) layers are alternately stacked, and materials of layers constituting the dielectric multilayer film include AlN, SiO ₂ , SiN, ZrO ₂ , SiO ₂ , TiO ₂ , Ta ₂ O ₃ , ITONb ₂ O ₅ , ITO, etc. can be selected, for example, a dielectric multilayer film of a combination of SiO ₂ / Ta ₂ O ₃ , SiO ₂ / Nb ₂ O ₅ , SiO ₂ / TiO ₂ It is done. The order of these materials _(TiO 2, _Nb 2 _{O 5} and _Ta 2 _{O 3)} refractive index _{is TiO 2> Nb 2 O 5>} Ta 2 O 3, the total thickness of the SiO ₂ is _SiO 2 / TiO ₂ When the dielectric multilayer film of the combination of is thinned.

  For example, as a multilayered dielectric film currently on the market, DFY-520 (yellow) (manufactured by Optical Solutions), DFM-495 (magenta) (manufactured by Optical Solutions), DFC-590 (cyan) (optical solutions) DFB-500 (Blue) (manufactured by Optical Solutions), DFG-505 (green) (manufactured by Optical Solutions), DFR-610 (red) (manufactured by Optical Solutions), DIF-50S-BLE (Sigma) Manufactured by Koki Co., Ltd.), DIF-50S-GRE (manufactured by Sigma Koki Co., Ltd.), DIF-50S-RED (manufactured by Sigma Koki Co., Ltd.), DIF-50S-YEL (manufactured by Sigma Koki Co., Ltd.), DIF-50S-MAG (Manufactured by Sigma Koki Co., Ltd.) or DIF-50S-CY (Sigma Koki Co., Ltd.) and the like.

  As the dielectric multilayer film, a film that transmits a wavelength region in a desired range and reflects a wavelength region other than the desired wavelength region can be used as appropriate.

  Although there is no restriction | limiting in particular as a manufacturing method of the dielectric multilayer film which concerns on this embodiment, For example, the method as described in patent 3704364, patent 4037835, patent 4091978, patent 3709402, patent 4860729, patent 3448626 etc. The contents of these patent publications are incorporated in this embodiment.

  In the light conversion film according to the present embodiment, as a method for producing a light conversion film in the case of using a dielectric multilayer film, as described above, at least one surface of a light conversion layer produced by an inkjet method or a photolithography method is used. A light conversion film is produced when a dielectric multilayer film is used by laminating a flattening film and then forming a selective light transmission layer on it by a vapor deposition method such as sputtering according to the method described in the above document. can do.

  The planarizing film has a function of planarizing the light conversion layer, and may be an organic material or an inorganic material. In the case of an organic material, an insulating film formed by using a photosensitive resin composition can be obtained. That is, the planarizing film is a film made of a cyclic olefin resin, acrylic resin, acrylamide resin, polysiloxane, epoxy resin, phenol resin, cardo resin, polyimide resin, polyamideimide resin, polycarbonate resin, polyethylene terephthalate resin or novolac resin. It is preferable that the passivation film made of the organic material used in the present embodiment is formed of a resin composition containing the resin and a known organic solvent.

  Moreover, in the case of an inorganic material, the film | membrane which consists of inorganic compounds, such as a silicon nitride and a silicon oxide, is mentioned. These flattening films (passivation films) may be formed by a known method according to a film forming material, and can be formed by a plasma CVD method, a vapor deposition method, or the like. The planarizing film according to this embodiment is preferably formed with an average film thickness of 0.1 μm to 5 μm.

  The cholesteric liquid crystal layer according to the present embodiment selectively reflects the light of the right circularly polarized light component or the light of the left circularly polarized light component among the light (electromagnetic wave) incident from one surface and transmits the light of the other component. Is a layer. Further, as a material that can transmit (or reflect) only light of a specific circularly polarized component, it is preferable to use a cholesteric liquid crystal or a chiral nematic liquid crystal. Cholesteric liquid crystals are known to have circular dichroism properties, and either right-handed or left-handed circles of light (electromagnetic waves) incident along the helical axis of the liquid crystal planar array. It exhibits the property of selectively reflecting one of the polarized light. Therefore, by appropriately selecting the turning direction of the cholesteric liquid crystal, circularly polarized light having the same optical rotation direction as that turning direction can be selectively reflected.

  That is, the selective reflection layer of the cholesteric liquid crystal according to the present embodiment has a spiral structure (cholesteric structure) having a multilayer structure in a normal direction (light incident angle θ = 0 °) with respect to the surface of the transparent substrate. And has a wavelength selective reflectivity of reflecting circularly polarized light having a wavelength corresponding to the helical pitch. The relationship between the selective reflection wavelength (λ) and the helical pitch (p) is represented by the relationship of λ = p · N (N is the average refractive index of the polymerizable cholesteric liquid crystal composition), and the width of the wavelength indicating selective reflection ( (Δλ) is represented by the product of birefringence anisotropy (Δn) of the polymerizable liquid crystal composition and p.

  The peak wavelength of selective reflection of the cholesteric liquid crystal according to the present embodiment is determined by the pitch length of the cholesteric structure, and when a cholesteric liquid crystal is obtained using a nematic liquid crystal molecule (liquid crystal compound) and a chiral compound, The helical pitch length can be controlled by adjusting the addition amount and the like. Therefore, in order to obtain a desired helical pitch length, the selected wavelength region can be arbitrarily selected by appropriately adjusting according to the type of chiral compound, the amount of chiral compound added, and the type of liquid crystal compound to be used.

  The cholesteric liquid crystal layer according to this embodiment is preferably obtained by polymerizing a polymerizable liquid crystal composition containing a polymerizable liquid crystal compound, a chiral compound, and a polymerization initiator.

  In the present embodiment, the “liquid crystal” of the polymerizable liquid crystal compound is a mixture of a liquid crystal compound that is intended to exhibit liquid crystal properties with only one type of polymerizable liquid crystal compound to be used, or is mixed with another liquid crystal compound. In some cases it is intended to exhibit liquid crystallinity. The polymerizable liquid crystal composition can be polymerized (formed into a film) by performing a polymerization treatment by irradiation with light such as ultraviolet rays, heating, or a combination thereof.

  As a form using a cholesteric liquid crystal layer as the wavelength selective transmission layer according to the present embodiment, a cholesteric liquid crystal layer having a dextrorotatory (also referred to as right-handed) and a cholesteric liquid crystal layer having a left-handed (also referred to as left-handed) are disclosed. A laminated body in which a λ / 2 plate is sandwiched between two dextrorotatory cholesteric liquid crystal layers (a dextrorotatory cholesteric liquid crystal layer, a λ / 2 plate, and a dextrorotatory layer). Laminated body in the order of cholesteric liquid crystal layers) Laminated body with a λ / 2 plate sandwiched between two levorotatory cholesteric liquid crystal layers (a levorotatory cholesteric liquid crystal layer, a λ / 2 plate and a levorotatory cholesteric layer) A laminate in which the liquid crystal layers are laminated in this order is preferable.

  As a preferred form of the light conversion layer according to the present embodiment, a form in which a two-layer laminate in which a dextrorotatory cholesteric liquid crystal layer and a levorotatory cholesteric liquid crystal layer are laminated on one surface of the light conversion layer is formed. A layered structure in which a λ / 2 plate is sandwiched between two dextrorotatory cholesteric liquid crystal layers on one surface of the light conversion layer, and two levorotatory layers on one surface of the light conversion layer Form in which a laminated body with a λ / 2 plate sandwiched between cholesteric liquid crystal layers is formed, and a two-layer structure in which a dextrorotatory cholesteric liquid crystal layer and a levorotatory cholesteric liquid crystal layer are laminated on one surface of the light conversion layer A laminate in which a yellow color filter is formed on the other surface, and a laminate in which a λ / 2 plate is sandwiched between two dextrorotatory cholesteric liquid crystal layers on one surface of the light conversion layer. Formed with a yellow color filter formed on the other side There are six forms in which a laminated body in which a λ / 2 plate is sandwiched between two levorotatory cholesteric liquid crystal layers is formed on one surface of the light conversion layer, and a yellow color filter is formed on the other surface. It is done.

  The total film thickness of the cholesteric liquid crystal layer according to this embodiment is preferably about 1 μm to 12 μm, more preferably about 1 μm to 10 μm, and even more preferably about 2 μm to 8 μm. The total film thickness here means the average film thickness, which means the total film thickness of the two cholesteric liquid crystal layers (right-handed and left-handed) and the necessary λ / 2 plate, and if necessary The thickness of the provided substrate is not included. In the above description, six forms (laminates) using a cholesteric liquid crystal layer as the wavelength-selective transmission layer according to the present embodiment have been described. However, each dextrorotatory cholesteric liquid crystal layer and / or each levorotatory cholesteric is described. The average thickness of the single layer of the liquid crystal layer is preferably 4.1 μm or less, and more preferably 3.1 μm or less. The average thickness of the λ / 2 plate provided as necessary is preferably 2 μm or less.

  The polymerizable liquid crystal composition used for the cholesteric liquid crystal layer according to this embodiment contains a liquid crystal compound having at least one polymerizable group as an essential component. The liquid crystalline compound having at least one polymerizable group in the present embodiment may be a polymerizable compound having a mesogenic skeleton, and the compound alone may not exhibit liquid crystallinity.

  For example, Handbook of Liquid Crystals (D. Demus, J.W.Goodby, G.W.Gray, H.W.Spiess, V.Vill, published by Wiley-VCH, 1998), Quarterly Chemical Review No. 22, Liquid Crystal Chemistry (edited by the Chemical Society of Japan, 1994), or JP-A-7-294735, JP-A-8-3111, JP-A-8-29618, JP-A-11-80090, A rigid part called a mesogen in which a plurality of structures such as 1,4-phenylene group and 1,4-cyclohexylene group are connected as described in Kaihei 11-116538, JP-A-11-148079, etc. And a rod-like polymerizable liquid crystal compound having two or more polymerizable functional groups such as a vinyl group, an acrylic group, and a (meth) acryl group, or JP-A Nos. 2004-2373 and 2004-99446. Examples thereof include a rod-like polymerizable liquid crystal compound having two or more polymerizable groups having a maleimide group. Among them, a rod-like liquid crystal compound having two or more polymerizable groups is preferable because it can easily produce a liquid crystal having a temperature range around room temperature.

  When reflecting light having a green wavelength region (for example, 490 to 595 nm, more preferably 510 to 590 nm) as the cholesteric liquid crystal layer according to the present embodiment, p (spiral pitch) and N (polymerizable cholesteric liquid crystal composition) The product with the average refractive index is adjusted so as to satisfy the relational expression of 490 = p × N, 595 = p × N. Similarly, when reflecting light in the red wavelength region (for example, 600 to 710 nm, more preferably 610 to 700 nm), the product of p (spiral pitch) and N (average refractive index of the polymerizable cholesteric liquid crystal composition) is 620 = p × N and 690 = p × N.

  Specifically, the average refractive index of each layer of the cured product of the polymerizable cholesteric liquid crystal composition according to this embodiment is preferably in the range of 0.9 to 2.1, and is preferably 1.0 to 2.0. More preferably, the range is 1.1 to 1.9, even more preferably 1.2 to 1.8, and more preferably 1.4 to 1.75. It is particularly preferable that Further, the helical pitch p of the cured product of the polymerizable cholesteric liquid crystal composition according to the present embodiment is appropriately adjusted depending on the amount and type of the chiral compound to be added, and in the polymerizable cholesteric liquid crystal composition according to the present embodiment. If the helical twisting power (HTP) of the chiral compound is strong, the amount of the chiral compound added may be small, and if the HTP of the chiral compound in the composition is weak, the amount of the chiral compound tends to increase.

  In the light conversion film according to the present embodiment, as a method for producing a light conversion film when using a cholesteric liquid crystal layer, as described above, at least one surface of a light conversion layer produced by an inkjet method or a photolithography method is used. For example, after rubbing with a roll of cloth made of fibers such as nylon, rayon and cotton, rubbing in a certain direction, applying a polymerizable cholesteric liquid crystal composition and orienting cholesteric liquid crystal molecules, A method of polymerizing and curing may be mentioned. As another method for producing a light conversion film, a composition for forming a planarizing film (organic material) or a (light) alignment layer is applied and cured on at least one surface of the light conversion layer, and then cured. A method of rubbing in a certain direction with a roll wound with a fiber made of nylon, rayon, cotton or the like, or a photo-alignment layer (a photo-alignment film described later) Examples include a method of performing photo-alignment treatment by irradiating polarized or non-polarized radiation.

The polymerizable liquid crystal composition used for the cholesteric liquid crystal layer according to this embodiment has the following general formula (I-2) as a first component:
(Wherein P ¹²¹ and P ¹²² each independently represent a polymerizable functional group, and Sp ¹²¹ and Sp ¹²² each independently represent an alkylene group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms or a single bond, One —CH ₂ — or two or more non-adjacent —CH ₂ — in the group may be each independently substituted by —COO—, —OCO— or —OCO—O—, One or more hydrogen atoms of the group may be substituted by a halogen atom (fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, iodine atom) or a CN group, and X ¹²¹ and X ¹²² are each independently _{-O -, - S -, -} OCH 2 -, - CH 2 O -, - CO -, - COO -, - OCO -, - CO-S -, - S-CO -, - OCO-O- , -CO-NH-, -NH-CO-, _{SCH 2 -, - CH 2 S} -, - CF 2 O -, - OCF 2 -, - CF 2 S -, - SCF 2 -, - CH = CH-COO -, - CH = CH-OCO -, - COO _{-CH = CH -, - OCO-} CH = CH -, - COO-CH 2 CH 2 -, - OCO-CH 2 CH 2 -, - CH 2 CH 2 -COO -, - CH 2 CH 2 -OCO-, _{-COO-CH 2 -, - OCO} -CH 2 -, - CH 2 -COO -, - CH 2 -OCO -, - CH = CH -, - N = N -, - CH = N-N = CH-, —CF═CF—, —C≡C— or a single bond (wherein P ¹²¹ -Sp ¹²¹ , P ¹²² -Sp ¹²² , Sp ¹²¹ -X ¹²¹ and Sp ¹²² -X ¹²² are direct bonds between heteroatoms. Q121 and q122 are respectively Independently represents 0 or 1,
MG ¹²² represents a mesogenic group represented by the following general formula (I-2-b),
In general formula (I-2-b), A1, A2 and A3 are each independently 1,4-phenylene group, 1,4-cyclohexylene group, 1,4-cyclohexenyl group, tetrahydropyran-2, 5-diyl group, 1,3-dioxane-2,5-diyl group, tetrahydrothiopyran-2,5-diyl group, 1,4-bicyclo (2,2,2) octylene group, decahydronaphthalene-2, 6-diyl group, pyridine-2,5-diyl group, pyrimidine-2,5-diyl group, pyrazine-2,5-diyl group, thiophene-2,5-diyl group-, 1,2,3,4 Tetrahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group, 2,6-naphthylene group, phenanthrene-2,7-diyl group, 9,10-dihydrophenanthrene-2,7-diyl group, 1,2,3,4,4a, 9,10a-octa Drophenanthrene-2,7-diyl group, 1,4-naphthylene group, benzo [1,2-b: 4,5-b ′] dithiophene-2,6-diyl group, benzo [1,2-b: 4 , 5-b ′] diselenophen-2,6-diyl group, [1] benzothieno [3,2-b] thiophene-2,7-diyl group, [1] benzoselenopheno [3,2-b] selenophene- 2,7-diyl group, or a fluorene-2,7-diyl group, the Z1 and Z2 each _{independently, -COO -, - OCO -,} - CH 2 CH 2 -, - OCH 2 -, - CH ₂ O—, —CH═CH—, —C≡C—, —CH═CHCOO—, —OCOCH═CH—, —CH ₂ CH ₂ COO—, —CH ₂ CH ₂ OCO—, —COOCH ₂ CH ₂ —. _{, -OCOCH 2 CH 2 -, -} C = N -, - N = C -, - CONH -, - NHCO -, - C (CF 3) 2 -, a halogen atom (fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, iodine atom) alkyl optionally C2-10 have a Represents a group or a single bond, r1 represents 0, 1, 2 or 3, and when a plurality of A1 and Z1 are present, they may be the same or different. It is preferable to contain the polymerizable liquid crystal compound represented by this.

The polymerizable liquid crystal composition has the following general formula (II-2) as a second component:
(In the formula, P ²²¹ represents a polymerizable functional group, Sp ²²¹ represents an alkylene group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, and one —CH ₂ — in the alkylene group or two or more non-adjacent ones. -CH ₂ - are each independently -O -, - COO -, - may be substituted OCO- or by --OCO-O-, 1 or 2 or more hydrogen atoms possessed by the alkylene group, halogen It may be substituted by an atom (a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom) or a CN group, and X ²²¹ is —O—, —S—, —OCH ₂ —, —CH ₂ O—, —CO—, -COO -, - OCO -, - CO-S -, - S-CO -, - OCO-O -, - CO-NH -, - NH-CO -, - SCH 2 -, - CH 2 S- _{, -CF 2 O -, - OCF} 2 -, - CF 2 S -, - SCF 2 -, - C = CH-COO -, - CH = CH-OCO -, - COO-CH = CH -, - OCO-CH = CH -, - COO-CH 2 CH 2 -, - OCO-CH 2 CH 2 -, - CH ₂ CH ₂ —COO—, —CH ₂ CH ₂ —OCO—, —COO—CH ₂ —, —OCO—CH ₂ —, —CH ₂ —COO—, —CH ₂ —OCO—, —CH═CH—, -N = N-, -CH = N-N = CH-, -CF = CF-, -C≡C- or a single bond (wherein P ²²¹ -Sp ²²¹ and Sp ²²¹ -X ²²¹ are C , MG ²²¹ represents a mesogenic group, R ²²¹ represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom), a cyano group, Straight chain or branched chain having 1 to 12 carbon atoms Alkyl group, a straight-chain or branched alkenyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, the alkyl group and one -CH 2 in the alkenyl group _- independently each _- or nonadjacent two or more -CH 2 -O-, -S-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -CO-S-, -S-CO-, -O-CO-O-, -CO-NH-, -NH _{-CO -, - NH -, -} N (CH 3) -, - CH = CH-COO -, - CH = CH-OCO -, - COO-CH = CH -, - OCO-CH = CH -, - CH ═CH—, —CF═CF— or —C≡C— may be substituted, and one or more hydrogen atoms of the alkyl group and the alkenyl group are each independently a halogen atom (fluorine Atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, iodine atom) or cyano group Even respectively If a plurality substituted the same or may be different. It is preferable to contain a polymerizable liquid crystal compound selected from the compounds represented by:

The polymerizable liquid crystal composition has the following general formula (II-1) as a third component:
(In General Formula (II-1), ^P211 represents a polymerizable functional group,
A ²¹¹ and A ²¹² are each independently 1,4-phenylene group, 1,4-cyclohexylene group, bicyclo [2.2.2] octane-1,4-diyl group, pyridine-2,5-diyl. Group, pyrimidine-2,5-diyl group, naphthalene-2,6-diyl group, naphthalene-1,4-diyl group, tetrahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group, decahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group or Represents a 1,3-dioxane-2,5-diyl group, these groups may be unsubstituted or substituted by one or more substituents L;
L is a fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, iodine atom, pentafluorosulfuranyl group, nitro group, cyano group, isocyano group, amino group, hydroxyl group, mercapto group, methylamino group, dimethylamino group, diethylamino group, Diisopropylamino group, trimethylsilyl group, dimethylsilyl group, thioisocyano group, optionally substituted phenyl group, optionally substituted phenylalkyl group, optionally substituted cyclohexylalkyl group, or one —CH _2- or two or more non-adjacent —CH ₂ — are each independently —O—, —S—, —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—, —CO—S—, —S—CO. ^{-, - OCO-O -,} - CO-NR 0 -, - NR 0 -CO -, - CH = CH-COO -, - CH = CH-OCO -, - C O-CH = CH -, - OCO-CH = CH -, - CH = CH -, - N = N -, - CR 0 = N -, - N = CR 0 -, - CH = N-N = CH- , —CF═CF— or —C≡C— (wherein R ⁰ represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms), and is a straight chain having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. A hydrogen atom in the alkyl group may be substituted with a fluorine atom, and when a plurality of L are present in the compound, they may be the same or different. , A ²¹² may be the same or different when there are multiple,
Z ²¹¹ _{is, -O -, - S -,} - OCH 2 -, - CH 2 O -, - CH 2 CH 2 -, - CO -, - COO -, - OCO -, - CO-S -, - S -CO-, -O-CO-O-, -CO-NH-, -NH-CO-, -OCO-NH-, -NH-COO-, -NH-CO-NH-, -NH-O-, _{-O-NH -, - SCH 2} -, - CH 2 S -, - CF 2 O -, - OCF 2 -, - CF 2 S -, - SCF 2 -, - CH = CH-COO -, - CH = CH—OCO—, —COO—CH═CH—, —OCO—CH═CH—, —COO—CH ₂ CH ₂ —, —OCO—CH ₂ CH ₂ —, —CH ₂ CH ₂ —COO—, —CH _{2 CH 2 -OCO -, - COO} -CH 2 -, - OCO-CH 2 -, - CH 2 -COO -, - CH 2 -OCO-, CH = CH-, -N = N-, -CH = N-, -N = CH-, -CH = NN-CH-, -CF = CF-, -C≡C- or a single bond. , When there are a plurality of Z ^211, they may be the same or different,
m211 represents an integer of 1 to 3,
T ²¹¹ is a hydrogen atom, —OH group, —SH group, —CN group, —COOH group, —NH ₂ group, —NO ₂ group, —COCH ₃ group, —O (CH ₂ ) _n CH ₃ , or — ( It represents CH _{2) n} CH _{3, n} is an integer of 0 to 20. It is preferable to contain the polymerizable liquid crystal compound represented by this.

  The polymerizable liquid crystal composition preferably contains a chiral compound as the fourth component.

In the general formula (I-2), P ¹²¹ and P ¹²² each independently represent a polymerizable functional group, but the following formulas (P-1) to (P-17):
It is preferable to represent a group selected from the group consisting of these, and these polymerizable groups are polymerized by radical polymerization, radical addition polymerization, cationic polymerization and anionic polymerization. In particular, when ultraviolet polymerization is performed as a polymerization method, the formula (P-1), formula (P-2), formula (P-3), formula (P-4), formula (P-8), formula (P -10), Formula (P-12) or Formula (P-15) is preferred, Formula (P-1), Formula (P-2), Formula (P-3), Formula (P-4), Formula (P P-8) or formula (P-10) is more preferred, formula (P-1), formula (P-2) or formula (P-3) is more preferred, and formula (P-1) or formula (P-) 2) is particularly preferred.

In the general formula (I-2), Sp ¹²¹ and Sp ¹²² each independently preferably represent an alkylene group having 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and one —CH ₂ — or adjacent group in the alkylene group. Two or more —CH ₂ — that are not present may be each independently substituted by —COO—, —OCO—, or —OCO—O—, and one or more hydrogen atoms of the alkylene group May be substituted by a halogen atom (preferably a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom) or a CN group, and Sp ¹¹ and Sp ¹² are each independently an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms. it is more preferable that represents, one -CH ₂ in the alkylene group - or nonadjacent two or more -CH ₂ - are each independently -O -, - COO -, - OCO- or -O O-O-by may be substituted.

In the general formula (I-2), X ¹²¹ and X ¹²² are each independently —O—, —OCH ₂ —, —CH ₂ O—, —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—, —O. _{-CO-O -, - CO-} NH -, - NH-CO -, - CF 2 O -, - OCF 2 -, - CH = CH-COO -, - CH = CH-OCO -, - COO-CH = _{CH -, - OCO-CH =} CH -, - COO-CH 2 CH 2 -, - OCO-CH 2 CH 2 -, - CH 2 CH 2 -COO -, - CH 2 CH 2 -OCO -, - COO- _{CH 2 -, - OCO-CH} 2 -, - CH 2 -COO -, - CH 2 -OCO -, - CH = CH -, - N = N -, - CH = N-N = CH -, - CF = CF -, - C≡C- or preferably a single ^{bond, X 121} and ^{X 122} each independently _{Te, -O -, - OCH 2 -} , - CH 2 O -, - CO -, - COO -, - OCO -, - OCO-O -, - CF 2 O -, - OCF 2 -, - CH = CH-COO -, - CH = CH-OCO -, - COO-CH = CH -, - OCO-CH = CH -, - COO-CH 2 CH 2 -, - OCO-CH 2 CH 2 -, - CH ₂ CH ₂ —COO—, —CH ₂ CH ₂ —OCO—, —COO—CH ₂ —, —OCO—CH ₂ —, —CH ₂ —COO—, —CH ₂ —OCO—, —CH═CH—, More preferably, it represents —CF═CF—, —C≡C— or a single bond.

MG ¹²² represents a mesogenic group and has the general formula (I-2-b)
In general formula (I-2-b), A1, A2 and A3 are each independently 1,4-phenylene group, 1,4-cyclohexylene group, 1,4-cyclohexenyl group, tetrahydropyran-2, 5-diyl group, 1,3-dioxane-2,5-diyl group, tetrahydrothiopyran-2,5-diyl group, 1,4-bicyclo (2,2,2) octylene group, decahydronaphthalene-2, 6-diyl group, pyridine-2,5-diyl group, pyrimidine-2,5-diyl group, pyrazine-2,5-diyl group, thiophene-2,5-diyl group-, 1,2,3,4 Tetrahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group, 2,6-naphthylene group, phenanthrene-2,7-diyl group, 9,10-dihydrophenanthrene-2,7-diyl group, 1,2,3,4,4a, 9,10a-octa Drophenanthrene-2,7-diyl group, 1,4-naphthylene group, benzo [1,2-b: 4,5-b ′] dithiophene-2,6-diyl group, benzo [1,2-b: 4 , 5-b ′] diselenophen-2,6-diyl group, [1] benzothieno [3,2-b] thiophene-2,7-diyl group, [1] benzoselenopheno [3,2-b] selenophene- Represents a 2,7-diyl group or a fluorene-2,7-diyl group, and the substituent L ² is one or more of F, Cl, CF ₃ , OCF ₃ , CN group, C 1-8 alkyl group , An alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkanoyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkanoyloxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkoxycarbonyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and 2 to 8 carbon atoms Alkenyl group, alkeni having 2 to 8 carbon atoms Oxy group, alkenoyl group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, and / or, have a alkenoyloxy group having from 2 to 8 carbon atoms may,
Z1 and Z2 are each independently —COO—, —OCO—, —CH ₂ CH ₂ —, —OCH ₂ —, —CH ₂ O—, —CH═CH—, —C≡C—, —CH═. _{CHCOO -, - OCOCH = CH -} , - CH 2 CH 2 COO -, - CH 2 CH 2 OCO -, - COOCH 2 CH 2 -, - OCOCH 2 CH 2 -, - C = N -, - N = C- , -CONH -, - NHCO -, - C (CF 3) 2 -, a halogen atom (preferably fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, iodine atom) alkyl group which may C2-10 have a Or Z 1 and Z 2 are each independently —COO—, —OCO—, —CH ₂ CH ₂ —, —OCH ₂ —, —CH ₂ O—, —CH═CH—, —C≡C. -, -CH = CHCOO-, -OCOCH = CH- _{, - - -CH 2 CH 2 COO} CH 2 CH 2 OCO -, - COOCH 2 CH 2 -, - OCOCH 2 CH 2 - or preferably a single bond, -COO -, - OCO -, - OCH 2 - _{, -CH 2 O -, - CH} 2 CH 2 O -, - CH 2 CH 2 OCO -, - COOCH 2 CH 2 -, - OCOCH 2 CH 2 - or more preferably a single bond, r1 is 0, In the case where a plurality of A1 and Z1 are present, they may be the same or different. Of these, A1, A2 and A3 are each independently 1,4-phenylene group, 1,4-cyclohexylene group, 2,6-naphthylene group (the 1,4-phenylene group, 2,6-naphthylene group). Preferably represents a substituent L ² ).

Examples of the general formula (I-2) include compounds represented by the following general formulas (I-2-1) to (I-2-4), but are limited to the following general formulas. Do not mean.

In the formula, P ¹²¹ , Sp ¹²¹ , X ¹²¹ , q ¹²¹ , X ¹²² , Sp ¹²² , q ¹²² , and P ¹²² each represent the same definition as in the general formula (I-2),
A11, A12, A13, A2, and A3 represent the same definitions as A1 to A3 in the general formula (I-2-b), and may be the same or different,
Z11, Z12, Z13, and Z2 represent the same definitions as Z1 and Z2 in the general formula (I-2-b), respectively, and may be the same or different.

  Of the compounds represented by the general formulas (I-1-1-1) to (I-1-1-4), those represented by the general formulas (I-2-2) to (I-2-4) It is preferable to use a compound having three or more ring structures in the compound because the orientation of the obtained optical anisotropic body is good, and the general formula (I-2-2) having three ring structures in the compound is preferable. It is particularly preferable to use the compound represented by 2).

  Examples of the compounds represented by the general formulas (I-2-1) to (I-2-4) include the following general formulas (I-2-1-1) to (I-2-1-21). ) Is exemplified, but not limited thereto.

In General Formula (I-2-1-1) to General Formula (I-2-1-21), R ^d and R ^e each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a methyl group,
The cyclic group has one or more F, Cl, CF ₃ , OCF ₃ , CN groups, an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and 1 to 1 carbon atoms as substituents. 8 alkanoyl groups, alkanoyloxy groups having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, alkoxycarbonyl groups having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, alkenyl groups having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, alkenyloxy groups having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, carbon atoms It may have an alkenoyl group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms or an alkenoyloxy group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms,
m1, m2, m3, and m4 each independently represents an integer of 0 to 18, but each independently represents an integer of 0 to 8, and n1, n2, n3, and n4 each independently represents 0 or 1. To express.

  The bifunctional polymerizable liquid crystal compound represented by the general formula (I-2) may be used alone or in combination of two or more, but the total of the bifunctional polymerizable liquid crystal compound represented by the general formula (I-2) The content is preferably 0 to 50% by mass, more preferably 0 to 30% by mass, out of the total amount of the polymerizable liquid crystal compound used in the polymerizable liquid crystal composition. In addition, when a chiral compound is added to the polymerizable liquid crystal composition, in order to easily develop a twisted nematic phase or a cholesteric phase, the compound has an asymmetric structure or has a substituent in the mesogenic skeleton. In particular, it is particularly preferable to contain 0 to 20% by mass of the total amount of the polymerizable liquid crystal compound used in the polymerizable liquid crystal composition. Further, specifically, the compounds represented by the general formulas (I-2-1) to (I-2-4), and further, the general formulas (I-2-1-1) to the general formula (I- Also when the compound represented by 2-1-21) is used, it is preferably contained in this proportion.

  The compounds represented by the general formula (I-2-1-1) to the general formula (I-2-1-21) are more specifically represented by the following general formulas (I-2-2-1) to the general formula. Although the compound represented by (I-2-2-24) can be illustrated, it is not necessarily limited to these.

  The bifunctional polymerizable liquid crystal compound represented by the general formula (I-2) may be used alone or in combination of two or more, but the total of the bifunctional polymerizable liquid crystal compound represented by the general formula (I-2) The content is preferably 5 to 50% by mass, more preferably 5 to 40% by mass, particularly preferably 5 to 30% by mass from the viewpoints of adhesion and heat resistance. It is most preferable to contain by mass%.

Further, specifically, compounds represented by the following formulas (I-1-1) to (I-1-7) are preferable as the compounds represented by the general formula (I-2).
(In the above general formula (I-1-1) to general formula (I-1-7), R ^e and R ^d each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and m1 and m2 each independently Represents an integer of 0 to 8, and n1 and n2 each independently represent 0 or 1, but when m1 = 0, n1 = 0 is represented, and when m2 = 0, n2 = 0 is represented.)
Among the general formula (I-1-1) to general formula (I-1-7), the compound represented by the general formula (1-1-1) is most preferable.

  The bifunctional polymerizable liquid crystal compound represented by the general formula (I-2) may be used alone or in combination of two or more, but the total of the bifunctional polymerizable liquid crystal compound represented by the general formula (I-2) The content is preferably 5 to 50% by mass, more preferably 5 to 40% by mass, and 5 to 30% by mass in the total amount of the polymerizable liquid crystal compound used in the polymerizable liquid crystal composition. It is particularly preferred to contain 5 to 20% by mass, and most preferred.

The polymerizable liquid crystal composition of the present embodiment preferably contains a bifunctional polymerizable liquid crystal compound represented by the general formula (I-2), and together with the bifunctional polymerizable liquid crystal compound, as a second component It is more preferable to use a monofunctional polymerizable liquid crystal compound represented by the following general formula (II-2) in combination. Thereby, the compatibility of the polymerizable liquid crystal composition is increased, and the change in the selective reflection wavelength after being left at a high temperature when measured at a practical level of UV irradiation is reduced.
In the formula, P ²²¹ represents a polymerizable functional group, Sp ²²¹ represents an alkylene group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, and one —CH ₂ — in the alkylene group or two or more non-adjacent — CH ₂ — may be independently substituted with —O—, —COO—, —OCO— or —OCO—O—, and one or more hydrogen atoms of the alkylene group may be a halogen atom. (fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, iodine atom) may be replaced by or CN ^{group, X 221} is _{-O -, - S -, -} OCH 2 -, - CH 2 O -, - CO -, - COO—, —OCO—, —CO—S—, —S—CO—, —O—CO—O—, —CO—NH—, —NH—CO—, —SCH ₂ —, —CH ₂ S—, _{-CF 2 O -, - OCF 2} -, - CF 2 S -, - SCF 2 -, - CH CH-COO -, - CH = CH-OCO -, - COO-CH = CH -, - OCO-CH = CH -, - COO-CH 2 CH 2 -, - OCO-CH 2 CH 2 -, - CH 2 CH ₂ —COO—, —CH ₂ CH ₂ —OCO—, —COO—CH ₂ —, —OCO—CH ₂ —, —CH ₂ —COO—, —CH ₂ —OCO—, —CH═CH—, — N═N—, —CH═N—N═CH—, —CF═CF—, —C≡C— or a single bond (provided that in P ²²¹ -Sp ²²¹ and Sp ²²¹ -X ²²¹ , C, And MG ²²¹ represents a mesogenic group, R ²²¹ represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom), a cyano group, a carbon atom. Straight or branched al 1 to 12 atoms Kill group, a straight-chain or branched alkenyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, the alkyl group and one -CH 2 in the alkenyl _- or nonadjacent two or more -CH 2 _- are each independently -O-, -S-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -CO-S-, -S-CO-, -O-CO-O-, -CO-NH-, -NH _{-CO -, - NH -, -} N (CH 3) -, - CH = CH-COO -, - CH = CH-OCO -, - COO-CH = CH -, - OCO-CH = CH -, - CH ═CH—, —CF═CF— or —C≡C— may be substituted, and one or more hydrogen atoms of the alkyl group and the alkenyl group are each independently a halogen atom (fluorine Atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, iodine atom) or cyano group Even respectively identical If a plurality substituted, may be different.

In the general formula (II-2), P ²²¹ represents a polymerizable functional group, and preferably represents a group selected from the above formulas (P-1) to (P-17). The functional group is polymerized by radical polymerization, radical addition polymerization, cationic polymerization and anionic polymerization. In particular, when ultraviolet polymerization is performed as a polymerization method, the formula (P-1), formula (P-2), formula (P-3), formula (P-4), formula (P-8), formula (P -10), Formula (P-12) or Formula (P-15) is preferred, Formula (P-1), Formula (P-2), Formula (P-3), Formula (P-4), Formula (P P-8) or formula (P-10) is more preferred, formula (P-1), formula (P-2) or formula (P-3) is more preferred, and formula (P-1) or formula (P-) 2) is particularly preferred.

In the general formula (II-2), Sp ²²¹ preferably represents an alkylene group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and one —CH ₂ — in the alkylene group or two or more non-adjacent — CH ₂ — may be independently substituted with —O—, —COO—, —OCO— or —OCO—O—, and one or more hydrogen atoms of the alkylene group may be a halogen atom. (Fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, iodine atom) or a CN group may be substituted.

In the above general formula (II-2), X ²²¹ represents —O—, —OCH ₂ —, —CH ₂ O—, —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—, —O—CO—O—, —CO. —NH—, —NH—CO—, —CF ₂ O—, —OCF ₂ —, —CH═CH—COO—, —CH═CH—OCO—, —COO—CH═CH—, —OCO—CH═ _{CH -, - COO-CH 2} CH 2 -, - OCO-CH 2 CH 2 -, - CH 2 CH 2 -COO -, - CH 2 CH 2 -OCO -, - COO-CH 2 -, - OCO-CH _2- , —CH ₂ —COO—, —CH ₂ —OCO—, —CH═CH—, —N═N—, —CH═N—N═CH—, —CF═CF—, —C≡C— or preferably a single ^bond, X 221 is _{-O -, - OCH 2 -,} - CH 2 O -, - CO -, - C _{O -, - OCO -, -} OCO-O -, - CF 2 O -, - OCF 2 -, - CH = CH-COO -, - CH = CH-OCO -, - COO-CH = CH-, _{-OCO-CH = CH -, -} COO-CH 2 CH 2 -, - OCO-CH 2 CH 2 -, - CH 2 CH 2 -COO -, - CH 2 CH 2 -OCO -, - COO-CH 2 - _{, -OCO-CH 2 -, -} CH 2 -COO -, - CH 2 -OCO -, - CH = CH -, - CF = CF -, - C≡C- or more preferably a single bond.

In the above general formula (II-2), MG ²²¹ represents a mesogenic group, and the general formula (II-2-b)
(Wherein A1, A2 and A3 are each independently 1,4-phenylene group, 1,4-cyclohexylene group, 1,4-cyclohexenyl group, tetrahydropyran-2,5-diyl group, 1, 3-dioxane-2,5-diyl group, tetrahydrothiopyran-2,5-diyl group, 1,4-bicyclo (2,2,2) octylene group, decahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group, pyridine- 2,5-diyl group, pyrimidine-2,5-diyl group, pyrazine-2,5-diyl group, thiophene-2,5-diyl group, 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl Group, 2,6-naphthylene group, phenanthrene-2,7-diyl group, 9,10-dihydrophenanthrene-2,7-diyl group, 1,2,3,4,4a, 9,10a-octahydrophenant Les -2,7-diyl group, 1,4-naphthylene group, benzo [1,2-b: 4,5-b '] dithiophene-2,6-diyl group, benzo [1,2-b: 4,5 -B '] diselenophen-2,6-diyl group, [1] benzothieno [3,2-b] thiophene-2,7-diyl group, [1] benzoselenopheno [3,2-b] selenophene-2, A 7-diyl group, a fluorene-2,7-diyl group, a cholesteryl group, or a cholesteryl group, and the substituent L ² is one or more F, Cl, CF ₃ , OCF ₃ , CN groups, 1 to C atoms An alkyl group having 8 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkanoyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkanoyloxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkoxycarbonyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and the number of carbon atoms 2 to 8 alkenyl groups, 2 carbon atoms May have an alkenyloxy group having 8 carbon atoms, an alkenoyl group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, and / or an alkenoyloxy group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, among which A1 to A3 are each independently , which may have the substituent ^{L 2} 1,4-phenylene group, 1,4-cyclohexylene group, it may represent a 2,6-naphthylene group. Examples of the substituent group ^{L 2,} F An alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms or an alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms is preferable.

In the general formula (II-2), R ²²¹ is a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom), a cyano group, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, more preferably represents a straight-chain or branched alkenyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, the alkyl group and one -CH 2 in the alkenyl _- or nonadjacent two or more -CH 2 _- are each Independently —O—, —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—, —O—CO—O—, —CH═CH—COO—, —CH═CH—OCO—, —COO—CH═CH— , -OCO-CH = CH-, -CH = CH-, or -C≡C-, wherein one or more hydrogen atoms of the alkyl group and the alkenyl group are each independently Halogen atoms (fluorine atoms, salts Atom, a bromine atom, may be substituted by an iodine atom) or a cyano group, even each identical If a plurality substituted, may be different.
Examples of the general formula (II-2) include compounds represented by the following general formulas (II-2-1) to (II-2-4), but are not limited to the following general formulas. is not.

In the formula, P ²²¹ , Sp ²²¹ , X ²²¹ and R ²²¹ each represent the same definition as in the general formula (II-2),
A11, A12, A13, A2, and A3 represent the same definitions as A1 to A3 in the general formula (II-2-b), and may be the same or different,
Z11, Z12, Z13, and Z2 represent the same definitions as Z1 to Z3 in the general formula (II-2-b), and may be the same or different,
Examples of the compounds represented by the general formulas (II-2-1) to (II-2-4) include the following general formulas (II-2-1-1) to (II-2-1-26). ) Is exemplified, but not limited thereto.

In the general formula (II-2-1-1) to general formula (II-2-1-26), R ^c represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, m represents an integer of 1 to 8, and n represents 0. Or R ²²¹ represents the same definition as in the general formulas (II-2-1) to (II-2-4), but R ²²¹ represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (fluorine atom, chlorine). Atom, bromine atom, iodine atom), cyano group, one —CH ₂ — may be substituted by —O—, —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—, It preferably represents a linear alkyl group or a linear alkenyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.

In the above general formula (II-2-1-1) to general formula (II-2-1-26), the cyclic group has one or more F, Cl, CF ₃ , OCF ₃ , CN groups as substituents, An alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkanoyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkanoyloxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and an alkoxycarbonyl having 1 to 8 carbon atoms A alkenyl group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkenyloxy group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkenoyl group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, and an alkenoyloxy group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms. good.

  Although the monofunctional polymerizable liquid crystal compound represented by the general formula (II-2) may be used alone or in combination of two or more, the total of the monofunctional polymerizable liquid crystal compound represented by the general formula (II-2) The content is preferably 30 to 90% by mass, more preferably 40 to 90% by mass, and more preferably 45 to 90% by mass, out of the total amount of the polymerizable liquid crystal compound used in the polymerizable liquid crystal composition. It is particularly preferable to contain 50 to 90% by mass.

  In this embodiment, by using a monofunctional polymerizable liquid crystal compound represented by the following general formula (II-1) as the third component, the half width (Δλ) of the wavelength exhibiting selective reflection can be further reduced. In addition, the adhesion to the substrate can be further improved. Here, in the case of a cholesteric liquid crystal having a selective reflection wavelength, the relationship between the selective reflection wavelength (λ) and the helical pitch (p) is generally λ = p · N (N is the average refractive index of the cholesteric liquid crystal composition). The full width at half maximum (Δλ) of the wavelength exhibiting selective reflection is expressed by the product of birefringence anisotropy (Δn) and p of the polymerizable liquid crystal composition. When it is desired to selectively reflect only a specific wavelength, it is desirable to reduce the wavelength width (Δλ) of this selective reflection. In the general formula (II-1), it is directly connected to a cyclic group without having a spacer group. When the polymerizable liquid crystal composition is polymerized by containing a polymerizable liquid crystal compound having one polymerizable functional group, the mesogen skeleton portion present in the polymerizable liquid crystal compound represented by each general formula is partially Thus, a polymer having a poor alignment order and a low alignment order can be obtained, so that the birefringence anisotropy (Δn) can be kept low and the wavelength width (Δλ) of selective reflection can be reduced.

(In General Formula (II-1), ^P211 represents a polymerizable functional group, and ^A211 and ^A212 each independently represent a 1,4-phenylene group, a 1,4-cyclohexylene group, a bicyclo [2. 2.2] Octane-1,4-diyl group, pyridine-2,5-diyl group, pyrimidine-2,5-diyl group, naphthalene-2,6-diyl group, naphthalene-1,4-diyl group, tetrahydro Represents a naphthalene-2,6-diyl group, a decahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group or a 1,3-dioxane-2,5-diyl group, these groups being unsubstituted or one or more May be substituted by the substituent L,
L is a fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, iodine atom, pentafluorosulfuranyl group, nitro group, cyano group, isocyano group, amino group, hydroxyl group, mercapto group, methylamino group, dimethylamino group, diethylamino group, Diisopropylamino group, trimethylsilyl group, dimethylsilyl group, thioisocyano group, optionally substituted phenyl group, optionally substituted phenylalkyl group, optionally substituted cyclohexylalkyl group, or one —CH _2- or two or more non-adjacent —CH ₂ — are each independently —O—, —S—, —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—, —CO—S—, —S—CO. ^{-, - OCO-O -,} - CO-NR 0 -, - NR 0 -CO -, - CH = CH-COO -, - CH = CH-OCO -, - C O-CH = CH -, - OCO-CH = CH -, - CH = CH -, - N = N -, - CR 0 = N -, - N = CR 0 -, - CH = N-N = CH- , —CF═CF— or —C≡C— (wherein R ⁰ represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms), and is a straight chain having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. A hydrogen atom in the alkyl group may be substituted with a fluorine atom, and when a plurality of L are present in the compound, they may be the same or different. , A ²¹² may be the same or different when there are multiple,
Z ²¹¹ _{is, -O -, - S -,} - OCH 2 -, - CH 2 O -, - CH 2 CH 2 -, - CO -, - COO -, - OCO -, - CO-S -, - S -CO-, -O-CO-O-, -CO-NH-, -NH-CO-, -OCO-NH-, -NH-COO-, -NH-CO-NH-, -NH-O-, _{-O-NH -, - SCH 2} -, - CH 2 S -, - CF 2 O -, - OCF 2 -, - CF 2 S -, - SCF 2 -, - CH = CH-COO -, - CH = CH—OCO—, —COO—CH═CH—, —OCO—CH═CH—, —COO—CH ₂ CH ₂ —, —OCO—CH ₂ CH ₂ —, —CH ₂ CH ₂ —COO—, —CH _{2 CH 2 -OCO -, - COO} -CH 2 -, - OCO-CH 2 -, - CH 2 -COO -, - CH 2 -OCO-, CH = CH-, -N = N-, -CH = N-, -N = CH-, -CH = NN-CH-, -CF = CF-, -C≡C- or a single bond. , When there are a plurality of Z ^211, they may be the same or different,
m211 represents an integer of 1 to 3,
T ²¹¹ is a hydrogen atom, —OH group, —SH group, —CN group, —COOH group, —NH ₂ group, —NO ₂ group, —COCH ₃ group, —O (CH ₂ ) _n CH ₃ , or — ( It represents CH _{2) n} CH _{3, n} is an integer of 0 to 20. )

In the general formula (II-1), ^P211 represents a polymerizable functional group, and preferably represents a group selected from the above formulas (P-1) to (P-17). The group is polymerized by radical polymerization, radical addition polymerization, cationic polymerization and anionic polymerization. In particular, when ultraviolet polymerization is performed as a polymerization method, the formula (P-1), formula (P-2), formula (P-3), formula (P-4), formula (P-8), formula (P -10), Formula (P-12) or Formula (P-15) is preferred, Formula (P-1), Formula (P-2), Formula (P-3), Formula (P-4), Formula (P P-8) or formula (P-10) is more preferred, formula (P-1), formula (P-2) or formula (P-3) is more preferred, and formula (P-1) or formula (P-) 2) is particularly preferred.

In the general formula (II-1), A ²¹¹ and A ²¹² are each independently 1,4-phenylene group, 1,4-cyclohexylene group, bicyclo [2.2.2] octane-1,4-diyl. Group, pyridine-2,5-diyl group, pyrimidine-2,5-diyl group, naphthalene-2,6-diyl group, naphthalene-1,4-diyl group, tetrahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group, decahydro Although it represents a naphthalene-2,6-diyl group or a 1,3-dioxane-2,5-diyl group, these groups may be unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents L. From the viewpoints of ease of synthesis, availability of raw materials, and liquid crystallinity, A ²¹¹ and A ²¹² are each independently unsubstituted or may be substituted with one or more substituents L -Represents a phenylene group, 1,4-cyclohexylene group, bicyclo [2.2.2] octane-1,4-diyl group, naphthalene-2,6-diyl group or naphthalene-1,4-diyl group. Preferably, each independently of the following formulas (A-1) to (A-16):
It is more preferable to represent a group selected from: In addition, from the viewpoint of low refractive index anisotropy, at least one of A ²¹¹ and A ²¹² represents a group selected from the above formula (A-2) or formula (A-10), and the rest More preferably, each independently represents a group selected from the above formulas (A-1) to (A-7) and (A-10), and at least one of A ²¹¹ and A ²¹² is the above group. It is even more preferable that the group represented by the formula (A-2) is represented, and the rest each independently represents a group selected from the above formulas (A-1) to (A-7), and A ²¹¹ and At least one of A ²¹² represents a group represented by the above formula (A-2), and the rest each independently represents a group selected from the above formulas (A-1) to (A-4). It is particularly preferred to represent. When a plurality of A ²¹² are present, they may be the same or different.

In the above general formula (II-1), L is a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom, a pentafluorosulfuranyl group, a nitro group, a cyano group, an isocyano group, an amino group, a hydroxyl group, a mercapto group, methyl Amino group, dimethylamino group, diethylamino group, diisopropylamino group, trimethylsilyl group, dimethylsilyl group, thioisocyano group, optionally substituted phenyl group, optionally substituted phenylalkyl group, optionally substituted cyclohexyl An alkyl group, or one —CH ₂ — or two or more non-adjacent —CH ₂ — are each independently —O—, —S—, —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—, -CO-S -, - S- CO -, - O-COO -, - CO-NR 0 -, - NR 0 -CO -, - CH = CH-COO , -CH = CH-OCO -, - COO-CH = CH -, - OCO-CH = CH -, - CH = CH -, - N = N -, - CR 0 = N -, - N = CR 0 - , —CH═N—N═CH—, —CF═CF—, or —C≡C— (wherein R ⁰ represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms). Represents a straight or branched alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and any hydrogen atom in the alkyl group may be substituted with a fluorine atom, but when a plurality of L are present in the compound, May be the same or different. From the viewpoint of liquid crystallinity and ease of synthesis, the substituent L is a fluorine atom, chlorine atom, pentafluorosulfuranyl group, nitro group, methylamino group, dimethylamino group, diethylamino group, diisopropylamino group, or any A hydrogen atom may be substituted with a fluorine atom, and one —CH ₂ — or two or more non-adjacent —CH ₂ — are each independently —O—, —S—, —CO—, — 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may be substituted by a group selected from COO—, —OCO—, —O—CO—O—, —CH═CH—, —CF═CF— or —C≡C—. It preferably represents a linear or branched alkyl group, and the substituent L may be a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, or an arbitrary hydrogen atom may be substituted with a fluorine atom, and one —CH ₂ — or adjacent group may be substituted. not two or more -CH ₂ - It is more preferable that each independently represents a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms which may be substituted with a group selected from —O—, —COO— or —OCO—. More preferably, L represents a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, or an arbitrary hydrogen atom, a linear or branched alkyl group or alkoxy group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, which may be substituted with a fluorine atom. L particularly preferably represents a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, or a linear alkyl group or linear alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms.

In the general formula (II-1), Z ²¹² represents —O—, —S—, —OCH ₂ —, —CH ₂ O—, —CH ₂ CH ₂ —, —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—. , -CO-S-, -S-CO-, -O-CO-O-, -CO-NH-, -NH-CO-, -OCO-NH-, -NH-COO-, -NH-CO- NH—, —NH—O—, —O—NH—, —SCH ₂ —, —CH ₂ S—, —CF ₂ O—, —OCF ₂ —, —CF ₂ S—, —SCF ₂ —, —CH = CH-COO -, - CH = CH-OCO -, - COO-CH = CH -, - OCO-CH = CH -, - COO-CH 2 CH 2 -, - OCO-CH 2 CH 2 -, - CH ₂ CH ₂ —COO—, —CH ₂ CH ₂ —OCO—, —COO—CH ₂ —, —OCO—CH ₂ —, —CH ₂ —C OO—, —CH ₂ —OCO—, —CH═CH—, —N═N—, —CH═N—, —N═CH—, —CH═N—N═CH—, —CF═CF—, —C≡C— or a single bond is represented, but when there are a plurality of Z ^212, they may be the same or different.

In the above general formula (II-1), when importance is attached to the small number of orientation defects, when there are a plurality of Z ^{212 s,} they may be the same or different from each other -OCH _2- , -CH ₂ O- , —CH ₂ CH ₂ —, —COO—, —OCO—, —CO—NH—, —NH—CO—, —CF ₂ O—, —OCF ₂ —, —CH═CH—COO—, —OCO— _{CH = CH -, - COO-} CH 2 CH 2 -, - CH 2 CH 2 -OCO -, - CH = CH -, - N = N -, - CH = N -, - N = CH -, - CH = N—N═CH—, —CF═CF—, —C≡C— or a single bond is preferable, and when there are a plurality of Z ^212, they may be the same or different —COO—, -OCO -, - CO-NH - , - NH-CO -, - CF 2 O -, - OCF 2 - —CH═CH—COO—, —OCO—CH═CH—, —CH═CH—, —N═N—, —CH═N—N═CH—, —CF═CF—, —C≡C— or More preferably, it represents a single bond, and when there are a plurality of Z ^{212 s,} they may be the same or different, —COO—, —OCO—, —CO—NH—, —NH—CO—, —CF More preferably, it represents ₂ O—, —OCF ₂ — or a single bond, and when there are a plurality of Z ^{212 s,} they may be the same or different, —COO—, —OCO—, —CF ₂ O— , —OCF ₂ — or a single bond is particularly preferred.

  In the general formula (II-1), m211 represents an integer of 1 to 3, but m211 preferably represents 1 or 2, and m211 preferably represents 1.

In the above general formula (II-1), T ²¹¹ is a hydrogen atom, —OH group, —SH group, —CN group, —COOH group, —NH ₂ group, —NO ₂ group, —COCH ₃ group, —O ( CH ₂ ) _n CH ₃ , or — (CH ₂ ) _n CH ₃ (n represents an integer of 0 to 20), T ²¹¹ is a hydrogen atom, —O (CH ₂ ) _n CH ₃ , or — ( CH _{2) n} CH ₃ (n is more preferably represents an represents) an integer of ^{0, T 211} _{is, -O (CH 2) n CH} 3, or _{- (CH} 2) n _CH 3 (n is It is particularly preferable to represent an integer of 0 to 8.

Specifically, compounds represented by the following formulas (II-1-1) to (II-1-7) are preferable as the compounds represented by the general formula (II-1).

  The monofunctional polymerizable liquid crystal compound represented by the above general formula (II-1) may be used alone or in combination of two or more, but from the viewpoint of adhesion, the monofunctional polymerization represented by the general formula (II-1) The total content of the polymerizable liquid crystal compound is preferably 5 to 50% by mass, more preferably 5 to 40% by mass, out of the total amount of the polymerizable liquid crystal compound used in the polymerizable liquid crystal composition. It is especially preferable to contain -40 mass%, and it is most preferable to contain 15-35 mass%.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (I-1) is used as the bifunctional polymerizable liquid crystal compound, and the general formula (II-1) and the above compound are used as the monofunctional polymerizable liquid crystal compound. The compound represented by the general formula (II-2) is used in combination, and in this case, the total amount of the polymerizable liquid crystal compound used in the polymerizable liquid crystal composition is a monofunctional component, the general formula ( The sum of the compounds represented by II-1) and the general formula (II-2) is in the range of 50 to 95% by mass, in the range of 60 to 95% by mass, particularly in the range of 70 to 95% by mass. Particularly preferred from the viewpoints of adhesion and heat resistance.

The polymerizable liquid crystal composition of the present embodiment may contain a polymerizable liquid crystal compound having three or more polymerizable functional groups in the molecule as long as the physical properties are not impaired. Examples of the polymerizable liquid crystal compound having three or more polymerizable functional groups in the molecule include compounds represented by the following general formula (III-1) and general formula (III-2).

In the formula, each of P ^{31 to} P ³⁵ independently represents a polymerizable functional group, and each of Sp ^{31 to} S ³⁵ independently represents an alkylene group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms or a single bond, and the alkylene group In which one —CH ₂ — or two or more non-adjacent —CH ₂ — may be each independently substituted by —O—, —COO—, —OCO— or —OCO—O—. One or two or more hydrogen atoms of the alkylene group may be substituted with a halogen atom (preferably a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom or an iodine atom) or a CN group, and X ^{31 to} X ³⁵ are Independently, —O—, —S—, —OCH ₂ —, —CH ₂ O—, —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—, —CO—S—, —S—CO—, —O -CO-O-, -CO-NH-, -NH-CO-,- _{CH 2 -, - CH 2 S} -, - CF 2 O -, - OCF 2 -, - CF 2 S -, - SCF 2 -, - CH = CH-COO -, - CH = CH-OCO -, - COO _{-CH = CH -, - OCO-} CH = CH -, - COO-CH 2 CH 2 -, - OCO-CH 2 CH 2 -, - CH 2 CH 2 -COO -, - CH 2 CH 2 -OCO-, _{-COO-CH 2 -, - OCO} -CH 2 -, - CH 2 -COO -, - CH 2 -OCO -, - CH = CH -, - N = N -, - CH = N-N = CH-, -CF = CF-, -C≡C- or a single bond (where P ³¹ -Sp ³¹ , P ³² -Sp ³² , P ³³ -Sp ³³ , P ³⁴ -Sp ³⁴ , P ³⁵ -Sp ³⁵ , Sp ^{31 -X 31, Sp 32 -X 32} , Sp 33 -X 33, Sp 34 - ^34, and the ^Sp 35 ^{-X 35,} does not include a direct bond between the oxygen atom.), Q31, q32, q34 , q35, q36, q37, q38 and q39 is 0 or 1 each independently, is j3 0 or 1 is represented, and MG ³¹ represents a mesogenic group.

In the general formulas (III-1) to (III-2), P ^{31 to} P ³⁵ are each independently represented by the following formulas (P-2-1) to (P-2-20). It is preferable to represent a substituent selected from the polymerizable group.

  Among these polymerizable functional groups, from the viewpoint of increasing the polymerizability, the formulas (P-2-1), (P-2-2), (P-2-7), (P-2-12), ( P-2-13) is preferable, and formulas (P-2-1) and (P-2-2) are more preferable.

In the general formula (III-1) to general formula (III-2), Sp ^{31 to} Sp ³⁵ each independently preferably represent an alkylene group having 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and 1 in the alkylene group -CH ₂ — or two or more non-adjacent —CH ₂ — may be each independently substituted by —O—, —COO—, —OCO— or —OCO—O—, One or two or more hydrogen atoms of the group may be substituted with a halogen atom (preferably a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom or an iodine atom) or a CN group, and Sp ^{31 to} Sp ³⁵ are independent of each other. Te, more preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, one -CH 2 in the alkylene group _- or nonadjacent two or more -CH 2 _- are each independently -O -,- OO -, - OCO- or may be substituted by --OCO-O-.

In the general formula (III-1) to general formula (III-2), X ^{31 to} X ³⁵ are each independently —O—, —OCH ₂ —, —CH ₂ O—, —CO—, —COO. -, - OCO -, - OCO -O -, - CO-NH -, - NH-CO -, - CF 2 O -, - OCF 2 -, - CH = CH-COO -, - CH = CH- _{OCO -, - COO-CH =} CH -, - OCO-CH = CH -, - COO-CH 2 CH 2 -, - OCO-CH 2 CH 2 -, - CH 2 CH 2 -COO -, - CH 2 CH _{2 -OCO -, - COO-CH} 2 -, - OCO-CH 2 -, - CH 2 -COO -, - CH 2 -OCO -, - CH = CH -, - N = N -, - CH = N- N = CH -, - CF = CF -, - C≡C- or preferably a single ^{bond, X} 31 to X ³ Each _{independently, -O -, - OCH 2 -} , - CH 2 O -, - CO -, - COO -, - OCO -, - OCO-O -, - CF 2 O -, - OCF 2 -, - CH = CH-COO -, - CH = CH-OCO -, - COO-CH = CH -, - OCO-CH = CH -, - COO-CH 2 CH 2 -, - OCO-CH 2 CH 2 _{-, - CH 2 CH 2 -COO} -, - CH 2 CH 2 -OCO -, - COO-CH 2 -, - OCO-CH 2 -, - CH 2 -COO -, - CH 2 -OCO -, - CH More preferably, it represents ═CH—, —CF═CF—, —C≡C— or a single bond.

In the above general formula (III-1) to general formula (III-2), MG ³¹ represents a mesogenic group, and the general formula (III-A)

In the formula, A1, A2 and A3 are each independently 1,4-phenylene group, 1,4-cyclohexylene group, 1,4-cyclohexenyl group, tetrahydropyran-2,5-diyl group, 1,3 -Dioxane-2,5-diyl group, tetrahydrothiopyran-2,5-diyl group, 1,4-bicyclo (2,2,2) octylene group, decahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group, pyridine-2 , 5-diyl group, pyrimidine-2,5-diyl group, pyrazine-2,5-diyl group, thiophene-2,5-diyl group-, 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl Group, 2,6-naphthylene group, phenanthrene-2,7-diyl group, 9,10-dihydrophenanthrene-2,7-diyl group, 1,2,3,4,4a, 9,10a-octahydrophenant Les -2,7-diyl group, 1,4-naphthylene group, benzo [1,2-b: 4,5-b '] dithiophene-2,6-diyl group, benzo [1,2-b: 4,5 -B '] diselenophen-2,6-diyl group, [1] benzothieno [3,2-b] thiophene-2,7-diyl group, [1] benzoselenopheno [3,2-b] selenophene-2, Represents a 7-diyl group or a fluorene-2,7-diyl group, and has one or more F, Cl, CF ₃ , OCF ₃ , CN groups, an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, or the number of carbon atoms as a substituent. An alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkanoyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkanoyloxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkoxycarbonyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, carbon C2-C8 alkenyloxy group, carbon atoms May have an alkenoyl group having 8 to 8 and / or an alkenoyloxy group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, but is present when forming the structure represented by the general formula (III-1). , to one of A2 and A3 ^- having _{(Sp ³³⁾} q34 ^-P ₃₃ group - _(X ^{33) q35.} Z1 and Z2 are each independently —COO—, —OCO—, —CH ₂ CH ₂ —, —OCH ₂ —, —CH ₂ O—, —CH═CH—, —C≡C—, —CH═. _{CHCOO -, - OCOCH = CH -} , - CH 2 CH 2 COO -, - CH 2 CH 2 OCO -, - COOCH 2 CH 2 -, - OCOCH 2 CH 2 -, - C = N -, - N = C- , -CONH -, - NHCO -, - C (CF 3) 2 -, a halogen atom (preferably fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, iodine atom) alkyl group which may C2-10 have a Or Z 1 and Z 2 are each independently —COO—, —OCO—, —CH ₂ CH ₂ —, —OCH ₂ —, —CH ₂ O—, —CH═CH—, —C≡C. -, -CH = CHCOO-, -OCOCH = CH- _{-CH 2 CH 2 COO -, -} CH 2 CH 2 OCO -, - COOCH 2 CH 2 -, - OCOCH 2 CH 2 - or preferably a single bond, r1 represents 0, 1, 2 or 3, When there are a plurality of A1 and Z1, they may be the same or different. ). Among these, it is preferable that A1, A2, and A3 each independently represent a 1,4-phenylene group, a 1,4-cyclohexylene group, or a 2,6-naphthylene group.
Examples of the general formula (III) include the following general formula (III-1-1) to general formula (III-1-8), general formula (III-2-1) to general formula) III-2-2) Although the compound represented can be mentioned, it is not necessarily limited to the following general formula.

In the formula, P ^{31 to} P ³⁵ , Sp ^{31 to} Sp ³⁵ , X ^{31 to} X ³⁵ , q31 to q39 MG ³¹ are the same as defined in the above general formula (III-1) to general formula (III-2), respectively. Represents
A11, A12, A13, A2, and A3 each represent the same definition as A1 to A3 in the general formula (III-A), and may be the same or different,
Z11, Z12, Z13, and Z2 represent the same definitions as Z1 and Z2 in the general formula (III-A), respectively, and may be the same or different.

  The compounds represented by the above general formula (III-1-1) to general formula (III-1-8), general formula (III-2-1), and general formula (III-2-2) include the following: The compounds represented by the general formulas (III-9-1) to (III-9-6) are exemplified, but not limited thereto.

In the general formulas (III-9-1) to (III-9-6), R ^f , R ^g and R ^h each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and R ⁱ , R ^j and R ^k. Each independently represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (preferably a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom), an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or a cyano group. When the group is an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms or an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, all of them are unsubstituted, or one or two or more halogen atoms (preferably a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom) , a bromine atom, may be substituted by an iodine atom), the cyclic group may contain one or more _F as _{substituents, Cl, CF 3, OCF 3} , CN group, an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, C1-C8 alkoxy , An alkanoyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkanoyloxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkoxycarbonyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, and 2 to 8 carbon atoms It may have an alkenyloxy group, an alkenoyl group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, or an alkenoyloxy group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms.
m4 to m9 each independently represents an integer of 0 to 18, and n4 to n10 each independently represents 0 or 1.

  The polyfunctional polymerizable liquid crystal compound having three or more polymerizable functional groups can be used alone or in combination of two or more.

  The total content of the polyfunctional polymerizable liquid crystal compound having three polymerizable functional groups in the molecule is 20% by mass or less of the total amount of the polymerizable liquid crystal compound used in the polymerizable liquid crystal composition. It is particularly preferred that the content be 10% by mass or less, particularly 5% by mass or less.

  Further, the polymerizable liquid crystal composition of the present embodiment may be added with a compound containing a mesogenic group having no polymerizable group, such as a normal liquid crystal device such as STN (super twisted nematic) liquid crystal, And compounds used in TN (twisted nematic) liquid crystal, TFT (thin film transistor) liquid crystal, and the like.

Specifically, the compound containing a mesogenic group having no polymerizable functional group is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (5).

The mesogenic group or mesogenic supporting group represented by MG3 has the general formula (5-b)
(In the formula, A1 ^d , A2 ^d and A3 ^d are each independently 1,4-phenylene group, 1,4-cyclohexylene group, 1,4-cyclohexenyl group, tetrahydropyran-2,5-diyl group. 1,3-dioxane-2,5-diyl group, tetrahydrothiopyran-2,5-diyl group, 1,4-bicyclo (2,2,2) octylene group, decahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group Pyridine-2,5-diyl group, pyrimidine-2,5-diyl group, pyrazine-2,5-diyl group, thiophene-2,5-diyl group-, 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalene-2 , 6-diyl group, 2,6-naphthylene group, phenanthrene-2,7-diyl group, 9,10-dihydrophenanthrene-2,7-diyl group, 1,2,3,4,4a, 9,10a- Octahydrof Enanthrene-2,7-diyl group, 1,4-naphthylene group, benzo [1,2-b: 4,5-b ′] dithiophene-2,6-diyl group, benzo [1,2-b: 4, 5-b ′] diselenophen-2,6-diyl group, [1] benzothieno [3,2-b] thiophene-2,7-diyl group, [1] benzoselenopheno [3,2-b] selenophene-2 , 7-diyl group, or fluorene-2,7-diyl group, and one or more F, Cl, CF ₃ , OCF ₃ , CN groups, C 1-8 alkyl groups, alkoxy groups as substituents , An alkanoyl group, an alkanoyloxy group, an alkenyl group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkenyloxy group, an alkenoyl group, an alkenoyloxy group,
Z0 ^d , Z1 ^d , Z2 ^d and Z3 ^d are each independently —COO—, —OCO—, —CH ₂ CH ₂ —, —OCH ₂ —, —CH ₂ O—, —CH═CH—, — _{C≡C -, - CH = CHCOO -} , - OCOCH = CH -, - CH 2 CH 2 COO -, - CH 2 CH 2 OCO -, - COOCH 2 CH 2 -, - OCOCH 2 CH 2 -, - CONH- , -NHCO-, an alkylene group which may have a halogen atom having 2 to 10 carbon atoms (preferably a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom or an iodine atom) or a single bond;
n ^e is 0, 1 or 2,
R ⁵¹ and R ⁵² each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (preferably a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom or an iodine atom), a cyano group or an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms. May be substituted by one or more halogen atoms (preferably fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, iodine atom) or CN, one CH ₂ group present in this group or two non-adjacent two The above CH ₂ groups are independent of each other, and in a form in which oxygen atoms are not directly bonded to each other, —O—, —S—, —NH—, —N (CH ₃ ) —, —CO—, —COO -, -OCO-, -OCOO-, -SCO-, -COS- or -C≡C- may be substituted. ).

Specifically, although shown below, it is not necessarily limited to these.

  Ra and Rb each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or a cyano group, and these groups have 1 carbon atom. In the case of a -6 alkyl group or a C1-C6 alkoxy group, all may be unsubstituted or may be substituted by one or more halogen atoms.

  The total content of the compound having a mesogenic group is preferably 0% by mass or more and 20% by mass or less with respect to the total amount of the polymerizable liquid crystal composition, and when used, it is preferably 1% by mass or more. It is preferably at least mass%, preferably at least 5 mass%, more preferably at most 15 mass%, preferably at most 10 mass%.

  The polymerizable liquid crystal composition in the present embodiment contains a chiral compound that may exhibit liquid crystallinity or may be non-liquid crystalline in order to give the obtained optical film cholesteric liquid crystallinity. Of the chiral compounds, it is preferable to use a polymerizable chiral compound having polymerizability.

  The polymerizable chiral compound used in this embodiment preferably has one or more polymerizable functional groups. Examples of such compounds include JP-A-11-193287, JP-A-2001-158788, JP-T 2006-52669, JP-A-2007-269639, JP-A-2007-269640, 2009. -84178 and the like, including a chiral saccharide such as isosorbide, isomannite, glucoside, etc., and a rigid site such as a 1,4-phenylene group and a 1,4-cyclohexylene group, and a vinyl group A polymerizable chiral compound having a polymerizable functional group such as an acryloyl group, a (meth) acryloyl group or a maleimide group, a polymerizable chiral compound comprising a terpenoid derivative as described in JP-A-8-239666, NATURE VOL35 467-469 pages (November 30, 1995) Published), NATURE VOL 392, pages 476 to 479 (issued on April 2, 1998), or the like, or a polymerizable chiral compound comprising a mesogenic group and a spacer having a chiral moiety, or JP-T-2004-504285. And a polymerizable chiral compound containing a binaphthyl group as described in JP-A-2007-248945. Among them, a chiral compound having a large helical twisting power (HTP) is preferable for the polymerizable liquid crystal composition of the present embodiment.

Among chiral compounds, the following general formula (3-1) to general formula (3-4) can be given as chiral compounds having a large helical twisting power (HTP), and general formula (3-1) to general formula It is more preferable to use a chiral compound selected from (3-3), and among the chiral compounds selected from the general formula (3-1) to the general formula (3-3), the following general formula (3-a) It is particularly preferable to use a polymerizable chiral compound having a polymerizable group represented by the formula, and a compound in which R ^3a and R ^3b in the general formula (3-1) are (P1) is particularly preferable.

In the formula, Sp ^3a and Sp ^3b each independently represent an alkylene group having 0 to 18 carbon atoms, and the alkylene group is a carbon atom having one or more halogen atoms, a CN group, or a polymerizable functional group. It may be substituted by an alkyl group having 1 to 8, two or more of CH ₂ groups, independently of one another each of the present in the radical is not one CH ₂ group or adjacent, each other oxygen atom in the form that does not bind directly _{to, -O -, - S -,} - NH -, - N (CH 3) -, - CO -, - COO -, - OCO -, - OCOO -, - SCO -, - COS- Or it may be replaced by -C≡C-
A1, A2, A3, A4, A5 and A6 are each independently 1,4-phenylene group, 1,4-cyclohexylene group, 1,4-cyclohexenyl group, tetrahydropyran-2,5-diyl group, 1,3-dioxane-2,5-diyl group, tetrahydrothiopyran-2,5-diyl group, 1,4-bicyclo (2,2,2) octylene group, decahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group, Pyridine-2,5-diyl group, pyrimidine-2,5-diyl group, pyrazine-2,5-diyl group, thiophene-2,5-diyl group-, 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalene-2, 6-diyl group, 2,6-naphthylene group, phenanthrene-2,7-diyl group, 9,10-dihydrophenanthrene-2,7-diyl group, 1,2,3,4,4a, 9,10a-octahydro Enanthrene-2,7-diyl group, 1,4-naphthylene group, benzo [1,2-b: 4,5-b ′] dithiophene-2,6-diyl group, benzo [1,2-b: 4, 5-b ′] diselenophen-2,6-diyl group, [1] benzothieno [3,2-b] thiophene-2,7-diyl group, [1] benzoselenopheno [3,2-b] selenophene-2 , 7-diyl group, or fluorene-2,7-diyl group, one or more F, Cl, CF ₃ , OCF ₃ , CN groups, alkyl groups having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, carbon atoms as substituents An alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkanoyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkanoyloxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkoxycarbonyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, Alkenyloxy group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms Alkenoyl group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, and / or may have a alkenoyloxy group having from 2 to 8 carbon atoms. A1, A2, A3, A4, A5 and A6 each independently preferably represents a 1,4-phenylene group, a 1,4-cyclohexylene group or a 2,6-naphthylene group, and one or more substituents F, CN group, an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, or an alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms.

n, l, k and s each independently represent 0 or 1,
Z0, Z1, Z2, Z3, Z4, Z5, and Z6 are each independently —COO—, —OCO—, —CH ₂ CH ₂ —, —OCH ₂ —, —CH ₂ O—, —CH═. CH—, —C≡C—, —CH═CHCOO—, —OCOCH═CH—, —CH ₂ CH ₂ COO—, —CH ₂ CH ₂ OCO—, —COOCH ₂ CH ₂ —, —OCOCH ₂ CH ₂ — , -CONH-, -NHCO-, an alkyl group which may have a halogen atom having 2 to 10 carbon atoms or a single bond;
n5 and m5 each independently represent 0 or 1,
R ^3a and R ^3b represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, and the alkyl group may be substituted with one or more halogen atoms or CN. two or more CH ₂ groups not one CH ₂ group or adjacent present in the radical are each, independently of one another, in the form of oxygen atoms are not directly bonded to each other, -O -, - S -, - NH—, —N (CH ₃ ) —, —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—, —OCOO—, —SCO—, —COS— or —C≡C— may be substituted,
Alternatively, R ^3a and R ^3b are represented by the general formula (3-a)
(In the formula, P ^3a represents a polymerizable functional group.)
P ^3a preferably represents a substituent selected from a polymerizable group represented by the following formula (P-1) to formula (P-20).

  Among these polymerizable functional groups, from the viewpoint of enhancing the polymerizability and storage stability, the formula (P-1) or the formulas (P-2), (P-7), (P-12), (P-13) ) Is preferable, and formulas (P-1), (P-7), and (P-12) are more preferable.

  Specific examples of the polymerizable chiral compound include compounds (3-5) to (3-26), but are not limited to the following compounds.

In the formula, m, n, k, and l each independently represent an integer of 1 to 18, R ^{1 to} R ⁴ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and 1 to 6 carbon atoms. An alkoxy group, a carboxy group, and a cyano group. When these groups are alkyl groups having 1 to 6 carbon atoms or alkoxy groups having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, all of them may be unsubstituted or substituted with one or more halogen atoms. .

  Among the polymerizable chiral compounds represented by the above general formula (3-5) to general formula (3-26), as a chiral compound having a large helical twisting power (HTP), the general formula (3-5) to the general formula ( 3-9), general formula (3-12) to general formula (3-14), general formula (3-16) to general formula (3-18), (3-25), and (3-26) It is particularly preferable to use the polymerizable chiral compound represented by formula (3-8), (3-25), and (3-26).

  In order to give the obtained optical film cholesteric properties and to obtain an optical film with good transparency, the polymerizable liquid crystal composition in the present embodiment is polymerizable using the chiral compound in the polymerizable liquid crystal composition. It is preferable to use 0.5 to 20 parts by mass, more preferably 1 to 15 parts by mass, and particularly preferably 1.5 to 10 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total liquid crystal compound.

  The polymerizable liquid crystal composition in the present embodiment preferably contains a photopolymerization initiator. As such a photopolymerization initiator, in the composition of the present embodiment, an acyl phosphine oxide photopolymerization initiator or an α-aminoalkylphenone initiator is preferable from the viewpoint of heat resistance. Specifically, as the photopolymerization initiator, acylphosphine oxide photopolymerization initiators include 2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl-diphenyl-phosphine oxide (“Irgacure TPO” manufactured by BASF), bis (2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl) -phenylphosphine oxide (“IRGACURE 819” manufactured by BASF), α-aminoalkylphenone-based initiator includes 2-methyl-1- (4-methylthiophenyl) -2 -Morpholinopropan-1-one ("Irgacure 907" manufactured by BASF), 2-benzyl-2-dimethylamino-1- (4-morpholinophenyl) -butanone-1 ("Irgacure 369E" manufactured by BASF), 2- (Dimethylamino) -2-[(4-methylphenyl) methyl] -1- [4 (4-morpholinyl) phenyl] -1-- butanone (BASF Corp. "Irgacure 379") and the like.

  In addition, the above photopolymerization initiator may be used in combination, and as such photopolymerization initiator, “Lucirin TPO”, “Darocur 1173”, “Darocur MBF”, “Esacure 1001M”, “Esacure” manufactured by LAMBSON “KIP150”, “Speed Cure BEM”, “Speed Cure BMS”, “Speed Cure MBP”, “Speed Cure PBZ”, “Speed Cure ITX”, “Speed Cure DETX”, “Speed Cure EBD”, “Speed Cure MBB” , “Speed Cure BP”, “Kayacure DMBI” manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. “TAZ-A” manufactured by Nippon Siebel Hegner (currently DKSH), “Adekaoptomer SP-152”, “Adekaopter” manufactured by ADEKA "Mer SP-170", "Adekaoptomer N-1414", "Adeka "Putomer N-1606", "Adekaoptomer N-1717", "Adekaoptomer N-1919", "Syracure UVI-6990", "Syracure UVI-6974" and "Syracure UVI-6922" manufactured by UCC. "Adekaoptomer SP-150, SP-152, SP-170, SP-172" manufactured by Asahi Denka Kogyo Co., Ltd., "PHOTOINITIATOR 2074" manufactured by Rhodia, "Irgacure 250" manufactured by BASF, and manufactured by GE Silicones “UV-9380C”, “DTS-102” manufactured by Midori Kagaku Co., Ltd. and the like can be mentioned.

  The amount of the photopolymerization initiator used is preferably 0.1 to 10 parts by mass, and 0.5 to 7 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polymerizable liquid crystal compound contained in the polymerizable liquid crystal composition. Is particularly preferred. In order to improve the curability of the optical anisotropic body, it is preferable to use a photopolymerization initiator of 3 parts by mass or more with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polymerizable liquid crystal compound. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more, and a sensitizer or the like may be added.

  An organic solvent may be added to the polymerizable liquid crystal composition in the present embodiment. Although there is no limitation in particular as an organic solvent to be used, the organic solvent in which a polymeric liquid crystal compound shows favorable solubility is preferable, and it is preferable that it is an organic solvent which can be dried at the temperature of 100 degrees C or less. Examples of such solvents include aromatic hydrocarbons such as toluene, xylene, cumene and mesitylene, ester solvents such as methyl acetate, ethyl acetate, propyl acetate and butyl acetate, methyl ethyl ketone (MEK), methyl isobutyl ketone ( MIBK), ketone solvents such as cyclohexanone and cyclopentanone, ether solvents such as tetrahydrofuran, 1,2-dimethoxyethane and anisole, amide solvents such as N, N-dimethylformamide and N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone , Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, γ-butyrolactone and chlorobenzene. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more, but any one of ketone solvents, ether solvents, ester solvents and aromatic hydrocarbon solvents It is preferable to use the above from the viewpoint of solution stability.

  The composition used in the present embodiment can be applied to a substrate when a solution using an organic solvent is used. The ratio of the organic solvent used in the polymerizable liquid crystal composition is not particularly limited as long as the applied state is not significantly impaired, but the total amount of the organic solvent in the solution containing the polymerizable liquid crystal composition is 10 to 95% by mass. It is preferable that it is 12-90 mass%, It is still more preferable that it is 15-85 mass%.

  When the polymerizable liquid crystal composition is dissolved in the organic solvent, it is preferably heated and stirred in order to uniformly dissolve the polymerizable liquid crystal composition. The heating temperature at the time of heating and stirring may be appropriately adjusted in consideration of the solubility of the composition to be used in the organic solvent, but is preferably 15 ° C to 110 ° C, more preferably 15 ° C to 105 ° C from the viewpoint of productivity, 15 to 100 degreeC is further more preferable, and it is especially preferable to set it as 20 to 90 degreeC.

  Moreover, when adding a solvent, it is preferable to stir and mix with a dispersion stirrer. Specific examples of the dispersion stirrer include a disperser having a stirring blade such as a disper, a propeller, and a turbine blade, a paint shaker, a planetary stirring device, a shaker, a shaker, or a rotary evaporator. In addition, an ultrasonic irradiation apparatus can be used.

  The stirring rotation speed when adding the solvent is preferably adjusted as appropriate depending on the stirring device to be used, but in order to obtain a uniform polymerizable liquid crystal composition solution, the stirring rotation speed is preferably 10 rpm to 1000 rpm, preferably 50 rpm to 800 rpm is more preferable, and 150 rpm to 600 rpm is particularly preferable.

  It is preferable to add a polymerization inhibitor to the polymerizable liquid crystal composition in the present embodiment. Examples of the polymerization inhibitor include phenol compounds, quinone compounds, amine compounds, thioether compounds, nitroso compounds, and the like.

  Examples of phenolic compounds include p-methoxyphenol, cresol, t-butylcatechol, 3.5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxytoluene, 2.2'-methylenebis (4-methyl-6-t-butylphenol) 2.2′-methylenebis (4-ethyl-6-tert-butylphenol), 4.4′-thiobis (3-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol), 4-methoxy-1-naphthol, 4,4′- Dialkoxy-2,2′-bi-1-naphthol, and the like.

  As quinone compounds, hydroquinone, methylhydroquinone, tert-butylhydroquinone, p-benzoquinone, methyl-p-benzoquinone, tert-butyl-p-benzoquinone, 2,5-diphenylbenzoquinone, 2-hydroxy-1,4-naphthoquinone 1,4-naphthoquinone, 2,3-dichloro-1,4-naphthoquinone, anthraquinone, diphenoquinone and the like.

  Examples of amine compounds include p-phenylenediamine, 4-aminodiphenylamine, N.I. N'-diphenyl-p-phenylenediamine, Ni-propyl-N'-phenyl-p-phenylenediamine, N- (1.3-dimethylbutyl) -N'-phenyl-p-phenylenediamine, N.I. N'-di-2-naphthyl-p-phenylenediamine, diphenylamine, N-phenyl-β-naphthylamine, 4.4'-dicumyl-diphenylamine, 4.4'-dioctyl-diphenylamine and the like.

  Examples of thioether compounds include phenothiazine and distearyl thiodipropionate.

  Examples of nitroso compounds include N-nitrosodiphenylamine, N-nitrosophenylnaphthylamine, N-nitrosodinaphthylamine, p-nitrosophenol, nitrosobenzene, p-nitrosodiphenylamine, α-nitroso-β-naphthol, and N, N-dimethyl. p-nitrosoaniline, p-nitrosodiphenylamine, p-nitronedimethylamine, p-nitrone-N, N-diethylamine, N-nitrosoethanolamine, N-nitrosodi-n-butylamine, N-nitroso-Nn-butyl- 4-butanolamine, N-nitroso-diisopropanolamine, N-nitroso-N-ethyl-4-butanolamine, 5-nitroso-8-hydroxyquinoline, N-nitrosomorpholine, N-nitroso-N-phenylhydroxylamine Ammonium salt, ditrosobenzene, 2,4.6-tri-tert-butylnitronebenzene, N-nitroso-N-methyl-p-toluenesulfonamide, N-nitroso-N-ethylurethane, N-nitroso-N- n-propyl urethane, 1-nitroso-2-naphthol, 2-nitroso 1-naphthol, sodium 1-nitroso-2-naphthol-3,6-sulfonate, sodium 2-nitroso-1-naphthol-4-sulfonate, Examples include 2-nitroso-5-methylaminophenol hydrochloride and 2-nitroso-5-methylaminophenol hydrochloride.

  The addition amount of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.01 to 1.0% by mass and more preferably 0.05 to 0.5% by mass with respect to the polymerizable liquid crystal composition.

  In the polymerizable liquid crystal composition in the present embodiment, a thermal polymerization initiator may be used in combination with a photopolymerization initiator. Known and commonly used thermal polymerization initiators can be used, such as methyl acetoacetate peroxide, cumene hydroperoxide, benzoyl peroxide, bis (4-t-butylcyclohexyl) peroxydicarbonate, t-butyl. Peroxybenzoate, methyl ethyl ketone peroxide, 1,1-bis (t-hexylperoxy) 3,3,5-trimethylcyclohexane, p-pentahydroperoxide, t-butylhydroperoxide, dicumyl peroxide, isobutyl Peroxide, di (3-methyl-3-methoxybutyl) peroxydicarbonate, organic peroxides such as 1,1-bis (t-butylperoxy) cyclohexane, 2,2′-azobisisobutyronitrile , 2,2′-azobis (2, Azonitrile compounds such as 2-dimethylvaleronitrile), azoamidin compounds such as 2,2′-azobis (2-methyl-N-phenylpropion-amidin) dihydrochloride, 2,2′azobis {2-methyl-N- [1 , 1-bis (hydroxymethyl) -2-hydroxyethyl] propionamide}, alkyl azo compounds such as 2,2′azobis (2,4,4-trimethylpentane), and the like can be used. Specifically, “V-40”, “VF-096” manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd., “Perhexyl D”, “Perhexyl I” of Nippon Oil & Fats Co., Ltd. (currently Nippon Oil Co., Ltd.) Etc.

  The amount of the thermal polymerization initiator used is preferably from 0.1 to 10 parts by weight, particularly preferably from 0.5 to 5 parts by weight, based on 100 parts by weight of the polymerizable liquid crystal compound contained in the polymerizable liquid crystal composition. . These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.

  The polymerizable liquid crystal composition in the present embodiment may contain at least one surfactant in order to reduce film thickness unevenness when an optical anisotropic body is used. Surfactants that can be included include alkyl carboxylates, alkyl phosphates, alkyl sulfonates, fluoroalkyl carboxylates, fluoroalkyl phosphates, fluoroalkyl sulfonates, polyoxyethylene derivatives, fluoro Examples thereof include alkylethylene oxide derivatives, polyethylene glycol derivatives, alkylammonium salts, fluoroalkylammonium salts and the like, and fluorine-based and acrylic surfactants are particularly preferable.

  In the present embodiment, the surfactant is not an essential component, but when it is added, the addition amount of the surfactant is 0 with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polymerizable liquid crystal compound contained in the polymerizable liquid crystal composition. It is preferably 0.01 to 2 parts by mass, and more preferably 0.05 to 0.5 parts by mass.

  In addition, by using the surfactant, when the polymerizable liquid crystal composition of the present embodiment is an optical anisotropic body, the tilt angle of the air interface can be effectively reduced.

The polymerizable liquid crystal composition according to the present embodiment is represented by the following general formula (7) other than the above-described surfactant having an effect of effectively reducing the tilt angle of the air interface when an optically anisotropic body is used. Examples thereof include compounds having a repeating unit and a weight average molecular weight of 100 or more.

In the formula, R ¹¹ , R ¹² , R ¹³ and R ¹⁴ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and one or more hydrogen atoms in the hydrocarbon group It may be substituted with a halogen atom.

  Suitable examples of the compound represented by the general formula (7) include polyethylene, polypropylene, polyisobutylene, paraffin, liquid paraffin, chlorinated polypropylene, chlorinated paraffin, and chlorinated liquid paraffin.

  The amount of the compound represented by the general formula (7) is preferably 0.01 to 1 part by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polymerizable liquid crystal compound contained in the polymerizable liquid crystal composition. It is more preferable that it is 0.05-0.5 mass part.

  In the polymerizable liquid crystal composition of the present embodiment, a compound having a polymerizable group but not a liquid crystal compound can be added. Such a compound can be used without particular limitation as long as it is generally recognized as a polymerizable monomer or polymerizable oligomer in this technical field. The addition amount of the non-liquid crystalline compound having a polymerizable group is preferably 0.01 to 15 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polymerizable liquid crystal compound contained in the polymerizable liquid crystal composition. 0.05 to 10 parts by mass is more preferable, and 0.05 to 5 parts by mass is particularly preferable. Specifically, methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate, butyl (meth) acrylate, isobutyl (meth) acrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxybutyl (meth) acrylate, octyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate, dodecyl (meth) acrylate, stearyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, Dicyclopentanyloxylethyl (meth) acrylate, isobornyloxylethyl (meth) acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, adamantyl (meth) acrylate, dimethyl Damantyl (meth) acrylate, dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate, dicyclopentenyl (meth) acrylate, dicyclopentenyloxyethyl (meth) acrylate, methoxyethyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl carbitol (meth) acrylate, tetrahydroflur Furyl (meth) acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate, phenoxyethyl (meth) acrylate, 2-phenoxydiethylene glycol (meth) acrylate, ω-carboxy-polycaprolactone (n≈2) monoacrylate, 2-hydroxy-3-phenoxypropyl Acrylate, 2-hydroxy-3-phenoxyethyl (meth) acrylate, (2-methyl-2-ethyl-1,3-dioxolan-4-yl) methyl (meth) acrylate, (3-ethyloxetane-3-yl) methyl (meth) acrylate, o-phenylphenol ethoxy (meth) acrylate, dimethylamino (meth) acrylate, diethylamino (meth) acrylate, 2,2,3,3,3-penta Fluoropropyl (meth) acrylate, 2,2,3,4,4,4-hexafluorobutyl (meth) acrylate, 2,2,3,3,4,4,4-heptafluorobutyl (meth) acrylate, 2 -(Perfluorobutyl) ethyl (meth) acrylate, 2- (perfluorohexyl) ethyl (meth) acrylate, 1H, 1H, 3H-tetrafluoropropyl (meth) acrylate, 1H, 1H, 5H-octafluoropentyl (meta ) Acrylate, 1H, 1H, 7H-dodecafluoroheptyl (meta) Acrylate, 1H-1- (trifluoromethyl) trifluoroethyl (meth) acrylate, 1H, 1H, 3H-hexafluorobutyl (meth) acrylate, 1,2,2,2-tetrafluoro-1- (trifluoromethyl ) Ethyl (meth) acrylate, 1H, 1H-pentadecafluorooctyl (meth) acrylate, 1H, 1H, 2H, 2H-tridecafluorooctyl (meth) acrylate, 2- (meth) acryloyloxyethylphthalic acid, 2- (Meth) acryloyloxyethyl hexahydrophthalic acid, glycidyl (meth) acrylate, 2- (meth) acryloyloxyethyl phosphoric acid, acryloylmorpholine, dimethylacrylamide, dimethylaminopropylacrylamide, isopropylpropylacrylamide, diethyl Mono (meth) acrylates such as chloramide, hydroxyethyl acrylamide, N-acryloyloxyethyl hexahydrophthalimide, 1,4-butanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,6-hexanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,9- Nonanediol di (meth) acrylate, neopentyldiol di (meth) acrylate, tripropylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, ethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, diethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, triethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, Ethylene oxide modified bisphenol A di (meth) acrylate, tricyclodecane dimethanol di (meth) acrylate, 9,9-bis [4- (2-acryloyloxyethoxy) phenyl ] Fluorene, glycerin di (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxy-3-acryloyloxypropyl methacrylate, acrylic acid addition product of 1,6-hexanediol diglycidyl ether, acrylic acid addition of 1,4-butanediol diglycidyl ether Products such as diacrylate, trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate, ethoxylated isocyanuric acid triacrylate, pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, ε-caprolactone modified tris- (2-acryloyloxyethyl) isocyanurate, etc. Tetra (meth) acrylates such as (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate, ditrimethylolpropane tetra (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa (meta Acrylate, oligomeric (meth) acrylate, various urethane acrylates, various macromonomers, ethylene glycol diglycidyl ether, diethylene glycol diglycidyl ether, propylene glycol diglycidyl ether, neopentyl glycol diglycidyl ether, 1,6-hexanediol diglycidyl Examples thereof include epoxy compounds such as ether, glycerin diglycidyl ether, and bisphenol A diglycidyl ether, and maleimide. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.

  In order to further improve the adhesiveness with the base material when the polymerizable liquid crystal composition in the present embodiment is an optical anisotropic body, it is also preferable to add a chain transfer agent. The chain transfer agent is preferably a thiol compound, more preferably a monothiol, dithiol, trithiol, or tetrathiol compound, and even more preferably a trithiol compound. Specifically, compounds represented by the following general formulas (8-1) to (8-13) are preferable.

In the formula, R ⁶⁵ represents an alkyl group having 2 to 18 carbon atoms, and the alkyl group may be linear or branched, and one or more methylene groups in the alkyl group are oxygen atoms. And a sulfur atom that is not directly bonded to each other, it may be substituted with an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, —CO—, —OCO—, —COO—, or —CH═CH—, and R ⁶⁶ is a carbon atom. Represents an alkylene group of 2 to 18, wherein one or more methylene groups in the alkylene group are oxygen atoms, sulfur atoms, -CO-, -OCO- , —COO—, or —CH═CH— may be substituted.

  In addition, α-methylstyrene dimer is also preferably used as a chain transfer agent other than thiol. The addition amount of the chain transfer agent is preferably 0.5 to 10 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polymerizable liquid crystal compound contained in the polymerizable liquid crystal composition, and preferably 1.0 to 5.0. More preferably, it is part by mass.

  The polymerizable liquid crystal composition of the present embodiment can contain a dye as necessary. The dye to be used is not particularly limited, and may include known and commonly used dyes as long as the orientation is not disturbed.

  Examples of the dye include a dichroic dye and a fluorescent dye. Examples of such dyes include polyazo dyes, anthraquinone dyes, cyanine dyes, phthalocyanine dyes, perylene dyes, perinone dyes, squarylium dyes and the like. From the viewpoint of addition, the dye is preferably a liquid crystal dye. . For example, US Pat. No. 2,400,877, Dreyer JF, Phys. And Colloid Chem., 1948, 52, 808., “The Fixing of Molecular Orientation”, Dreyer JF, Journal de Physique, 1969, 4, 114. ., "Light Polarization from Films of Lyotropic Nematic Liquid Crystals" and J. Lydon, "Chromonics" in "Handbook of Liquid Crystals Vol.2B: Low MolecularWeight Liquid Crystals II", D. Demus, J. Goodby, GW Gray , HW Spiessm, V. Villed, Willey-VCH, P. 981-1007 (1998), Dichroic Dyes for Liquid Crystal Display AV lvashchenko CRC Press, 1994, and `` New Developments in Functional Dye Market '', Chapter 1, 1 page, 1994, CMC Corporation light emission, etc. can be used.

Examples of the dichroic dye include the following formulas (d-1) to (d-8).
Is mentioned. The added amount of the dichroic dye or the like is preferably 0.001 to 10 parts by mass, and 0.01 to 5 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total amount of the polymerizable liquid crystal compound contained in the powder mixture. More preferably, it is a part.

  The polymerizable liquid crystal composition of the present embodiment can contain a filler as necessary. The filler to be used is not particularly limited, and may contain known and commonly used fillers as long as the thermal conductivity of the obtained polymer is not lowered. Specifically, inorganic fillers such as alumina, titanium white, aluminum hydroxide, talc, clay, mica, barium titanate, zinc oxide, glass fiber, metal powder such as silver powder, copper powder, aluminum nitride, boron nitride, Examples thereof include thermally conductive fillers such as silicon nitride, gallium nitride, silicon carbide, magnesia (aluminum oxide), alumina (aluminum oxide), crystalline silica (silicon oxide), fused silica (silicon oxide), and silver nanoparticles. .

  Furthermore, in order to adjust the physical properties, additives such as polymerizable compounds that do not have liquid crystallinity, thixotropic agents, ultraviolet absorbers, infrared absorbers, antioxidants, surface treatment agents, etc., do not significantly reduce the alignment ability of liquid crystals. To the extent that can be added.

  Next, the optical film of the present embodiment is composed of a cured product of the polymerizable liquid crystal composition described in detail above. Specific examples of the method for producing an optical film from the polymerizable liquid crystal composition of the present embodiment include a method in which the polymerizable liquid crystal composition is applied on a substrate and dried, and then irradiated with ultraviolet rays.

  The substrate used for the optical film of the present embodiment is a substrate that is usually used for liquid crystal devices, displays, optical components and optical films, and is heated during drying after the application of the polymerizable liquid crystal composition of the present embodiment. If it is the material which has heat resistance which can endure, there will be no restriction | limiting in particular. Examples of such a substrate include organic materials such as a glass substrate, a metal substrate, a ceramic substrate, and a plastic substrate. In particular, when the substrate is an organic material, examples thereof include cellulose derivatives, polyolefins, polyesters, polycarbonates, polyacrylates (acrylic resins), polyarylate, polyether sulfone, polyimide, polyphenylene sulfide, polyphenylene ether, nylon, and polystyrene. Among them, plastic base materials such as polyester, polystyrene, polyacrylate, polyolefin, cellulose derivative, polyarylate, and polycarbonate are preferable, and base materials such as polyester, polyacrylate, polyolefin, and cellulose derivative are more preferable, and PET (polyethylene terephthalate) is used as the polyester. It is particularly preferable to use COP (cycloolefin polymer) as the polyolefin, TAC (triacetyl cellulose) as the cellulose derivative, and PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate) as the polyacrylate. As a shape of a base material, you may have a curved surface other than a flat plate. These base materials may have an electrode layer, an antireflection function, and a reflection function as needed.

  In order to improve the applicability and adhesion of the polymerizable liquid crystal composition of the present embodiment, surface treatment of these substrates may be performed. Examples of the surface treatment include ozone treatment, plasma treatment, corona treatment, silane coupling treatment, and the like. In addition, in order to adjust the light transmittance and reflectance, an organic thin film, an inorganic oxide thin film, a metal thin film, etc. are provided on the surface of the substrate by a method such as vapor deposition, or in order to add optical added value. The material may be a pickup lens, a rod lens, an optical disk, a retardation film, a light diffusion film, a color filter, or the like. Among these, a pickup lens, a retardation film, a light diffusion film, and a color filter that have higher added value are preferable.

  In addition, as the substrate, a glass substrate alone or an alignment film is provided on the substrate so that the polymerizable liquid crystal composition is aligned when the polymerizable liquid crystal composition of the present embodiment is applied and dried. Preferably it is. Examples of the alignment treatment include stretching treatment, rubbing treatment, polarized ultraviolet visible light irradiation treatment, ion beam treatment, and the like. When the alignment film is used, a known and conventional alignment film is used. As such an alignment film, a hydrophilic polymer containing polyimide, polyamide, lecithin, hydroxyl group, carboxylic acid group or sulfonic acid group, a hydrophilic inorganic compound, a photo-alignment film, or the like can be used. Examples of the hydrophilic polymer include polyvinyl alcohol, polyacrylic acid, polyacrylic acid soda, polymethacrylic acid, sodium polyalginate, polycarboxymethylcellulose soda salt, pullulan, and polystyrene sulfonic acid. Examples of hydrophilic inorganic compounds include oxides such as Si, Al, Mg, and Zr, and inorganic compounds such as fluoride. Since the hydrophilic base material is effective for orienting the optical axis of the optical anisotropic body almost parallel to the normal direction with respect to the base material, it is preferable for obtaining the optical anisotropic body of the positive C plate. However, since it acts as a horizontal alignment film when a rubbing treatment is performed on a hydrophilic base material, the rubbing treatment adversely affects the vertical alignment in the hydrophilic polymer layer, so that it is preferable for obtaining an optical film of a positive C plate. Absent.

  As a method for applying the polymerizable liquid crystal composition of the present embodiment to the substrate described above, applicator method, bar coating method, spin coating method, roll coating method, direct gravure coating method, reverse gravure coating method, flexo coating method, Known and commonly used methods such as an inkjet method, a die coating method, a cap coating method, a dip coating method, and a slit coating method can be performed. After coating the polymerizable liquid crystal composition, the solvent contained in the polymerizable liquid crystal composition is dried by heating as necessary.

  The polymerization operation of the polymerizable liquid crystal composition of the present embodiment is generally performed by irradiation with light such as ultraviolet rays or heating in a state where the liquid crystal compound in the polymerizable liquid crystal composition is cholesterically aligned with respect to the substrate. When the polymerization is performed by light irradiation, specifically, it is preferable to irradiate ultraviolet light having a wavelength of 390 nm or less, and most preferably to irradiate light having a wavelength of 250 to 370 nm. However, when the polymerizable liquid crystal composition causes decomposition or the like due to ultraviolet light of 390 nm or less, it may be preferable to perform polymerization treatment with ultraviolet light of 390 nm or more. This light is preferably diffused light and unpolarized light.

  Examples of the method for polymerizing the polymerizable liquid crystal composition of the present embodiment include a method of irradiating active energy rays and a thermal polymerization method. However, since the reaction proceeds at room temperature without requiring heating, the active energy rays are used. In particular, a method of irradiating light such as ultraviolet rays is preferable because the operation is simple.

  The temperature at the time of irradiation is preferably set to 50 ° C. or less as much as possible in order to avoid the induction of thermal polymerization of the polymerizable liquid crystal composition so that the polymerizable liquid crystal composition of the present embodiment can maintain the liquid crystal phase.

In the case of irradiation with light such as ultraviolet rays, the irradiation intensity and irradiation energy greatly affect the heat resistance of the obtained optical film. When the irradiation intensity or irradiation energy is too weak, a portion where the polymerization reaction is not completed occurs, affecting the heat resistance, and even if the irradiation intensity or irradiation energy is too strong, the degree of polymerization with respect to the depth direction of the layer Differences occur and affect the heat resistance as well. The irradiation intensity is preferably 30 to 2,000 mW / cm ² UVA light (UVA is 315 to 380 nm ultraviolet light), and 50 to 1,500 mW / cm ² UVA light. It is more preferable to irradiate UV light of 120 to 1,000 mW / cm ² UVA light, and still more preferable to irradiate UV light of 250 to 1,000 mW / cm ² UVA light. Most preferred. As irradiation energy, it is preferable to irradiate UV light of UVA light of 100 to 5,000 mJ / cm ² , more preferable to irradiate UV light of UVA light of 150 to 4,000 mJ / cm ² , and 200 to 200 It is even more preferable to irradiate UV light of 3,000 mJ / cm ² UVA light, and it is most preferable to irradiate UV light of 300 to 1,000 mJ / cm ² UVA light. The UV irradiation may be performed multiple times, but the first irradiation intensity is preferably the UV intensity, and the first irradiation energy is more preferably the UV irradiation energy.

In the present embodiment, the bifunctional polymerizable liquid crystal compound represented by the general formula (I-1) and the monofunctional polymerizable liquid crystal compound represented by the general formula (II-1) are mass-based. When the abundance ratio [(I-1) / (II-1)] is 90/10 to 50/50, UVA ultraviolet rays are irradiated at a dose of 300 to 1,000 mJ / cm ^2. It is preferable that the heat resistance is good.

  The optical film obtained by polymerizing the polymerizable liquid crystal composition of the present embodiment can be peeled off from the substrate and used alone as an optical film, or can be used as an optical film as it is without being peeled off from the substrate. In particular, since it is difficult to contaminate other members, it is useful when used as a laminated substrate or by being attached to another substrate.

  The optical film thus obtained can exhibit excellent color purity as a cholesteric reflective film. As such a cholesteric reflective film, a negative C plate in which a rod-like liquid crystalline compound is cholesterically oriented with respect to a substrate, a selective reflection film (band stop filter) that reflects light of a specific wavelength, and a rod-like liquid crystalline compound on the substrate. On the other hand, it can be used as a twisted positive A plate which is horizontally oriented and takes a twisted orientation state.

  Here, the cholesteric liquid crystal layer of the present embodiment is laminated with a λ / 4 plate and a dual brightness enhancement film (DBEF) to selectively reflect only unnecessary colors out of light from the light source as a display element. Color purity can be increased.

  Further, the λ / 2 plate (or λ / 2 layer) according to the present embodiment is not particularly limited, and a known one can be used, and a preferable one can be used by appropriately changing as necessary. .

  The λ / 2 plate is obtained, for example, by stretching a cured product of a composition obtained by combining the polymerizable liquid crystal compound or a film made of a transparent resin. As the transparent resin, any resin having an average film pressure of 0.1 mm and a total light transmittance of 80% or more can be used. For example, acetate resin such as triacetyl cellulose, polyester resin, polyethersulfone resin, polycarbonate resin, chain polyolefin resin, polymer resin having alicyclic structure (norbornene polymer, monocyclic ring) Examples thereof include olefin polymers, cyclic conjugated diene polymers, vinyl alicyclic hydrocarbon polymers and hydrogenated products thereof), acrylic resins, polyvinyl alcohol resins, and polyvinyl chloride resins.

  You may add well-known additives, such as antioxidant, a heat stabilizer, a light stabilizer, a ultraviolet absorber, an antistatic agent, a dispersing agent, to the said transparent resin as needed.

(LCD panel)
Next, the structure of the liquid crystal panel in the liquid crystal display element will be described.

  A preferred embodiment of the liquid crystal panels 200A and 200B will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the structure of the electrode layer 3 of the liquid crystal display unit, and is a schematic diagram showing the electrode portions of the liquid crystal panels 200A and 200B in an equivalent circuit. FIGS. 14 and 15 are examples of the shape of the pixel electrode. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram illustrating an electrode structure of an FFS type liquid crystal display element as an example of the embodiment. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram showing a cross section of a liquid crystal panel of an FFS type liquid crystal display element. FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram showing an electrode structure of an IPS liquid crystal display element as an example of the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram showing a cross section of a liquid crystal panel of an IPS liquid crystal display element. Further, FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram showing an electrode structure of a VA liquid crystal display element as an example of this embodiment. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram showing a cross section of a liquid crystal panel of a VA liquid crystal display element. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a liquid crystal display element is driven by providing a backlight unit as illumination means for illuminating the liquid crystal panels 200A and 200B from the side surface or the back surface.

  1, 2 and 13, the electrode layers 3a and 3b include one or more common electrodes and / or one or more pixel electrodes. For example, in the FFS liquid crystal display element, the pixel electrode is disposed on the common electrode via an insulating layer (eg, silicon nitride (SiN)). In the VA liquid crystal display element, the pixel electrode is shared with the pixel electrode. The electrode is disposed opposite to the liquid crystal layer 5.

  The pixel electrode is disposed for each display pixel, and a slit-shaped opening is formed. The common electrode and the pixel electrode are transparent electrodes formed of, for example, ITO (Indium Tin Oxide), and the electrode layer 3 has a gate bus line GBL (extending along a row in which a plurality of display pixels are arranged in the display portion. GBL1, GBL2,... GBLm), a source bus line SBL (SBL1, SBL2,... SBLm) extending along a column in which a plurality of display pixels are arranged, and a vicinity of a position where the gate bus line and the source bus line intersect. In addition, a thin film transistor is provided as a pixel switch. The gate electrode of the thin film transistor is electrically connected to the corresponding gate bus line GBL, and the source electrode of the thin film transistor is electrically connected to the corresponding signal line SBL. Further, the drain electrode of the thin film transistor is electrically connected to the corresponding pixel electrode.

  The electrode layer 3 includes a gate driver and a source driver as driving means for driving a plurality of display pixels, and the gate driver and the source driver are arranged around the liquid crystal display unit. The plurality of gate bus lines are electrically connected to the output terminal of the gate driver, and the plurality of source bus lines are electrically connected to the output terminal of the source driver.

  The gate driver sequentially applies an ON voltage to the plurality of gate bus lines, and supplies the ON voltage to the gate electrode of the thin film transistor electrically connected to the selected gate bus line. Conduction is established between the source and drain electrodes of the thin film transistor in which the ON voltage is supplied to the gate electrode. The source driver supplies an output signal corresponding to each of the plurality of source bus lines. The signal supplied to the source bus line is applied to the corresponding pixel electrode through a thin film transistor in which the source and drain electrodes are electrically connected. The operations of the gate driver and the source driver are controlled by a display processing unit (also referred to as a control circuit) arranged outside the liquid crystal display element.

The display processing unit according to the present embodiment may have a low frequency driving function and an intermittent driving function for reducing driving power in addition to normal driving, and is used for driving the gate bus line of the TFT liquid crystal panel. It controls the operation of the gate driver which is an LSI and the operation of the source driver which is an LSI for driving the source bus line of the TFT liquid crystal panel. In addition, the common voltage V _COM is supplied to the common electrode to control the operation of the backlight unit. For example, the display processing unit according to the present embodiment includes a local dimming unit that divides the entire display screen into a plurality of sections and adjusts the intensity of the backlight light according to the brightness of the image displayed in each section. May be.

  An example of the FFS type liquid crystal panel in the liquid crystal display element according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a comb-shaped pixel electrode as an example of the shape of the pixel electrode, and is an enlarged plan view of a region surrounded by the XIV line of the electrode layer 3 formed on the substrate 2 in FIGS. It is. As shown in FIG. 14, the electrode layer 3 including a thin film transistor formed on the surface of the first substrate 2 includes a plurality of gate bus lines 26 for supplying scanning signals and a plurality of gate bus lines 26 for supplying display signals. The source bus lines 25 are arranged in a matrix so as to cross each other. A unit pixel of the liquid crystal display device is formed by a region surrounded by the plurality of gate bus lines 26 and the plurality of source bus lines 25, and a pixel electrode 21 and a common electrode 22 are formed in the unit pixel. ing. A thin film transistor including a source electrode 27, a drain electrode 24, and a gate electrode 28 is provided in the vicinity of the intersection where the gate bus line 26 and the source bus line 25 intersect each other. The thin film transistor is connected to the pixel electrode 21 as a switch element that supplies a display signal to the pixel electrode 21. A common line 29 is provided in parallel with the gate bus line 26. The common line 29 is connected to the common electrode 22 in order to supply a common signal to the common electrode 22.

  A common electrode 22 is formed on the back surface of the pixel electrode 21 with an insulating layer 18 (not shown) interposed therebetween. The horizontal component of the shortest separation path between the adjacent common electrode and the pixel electrode is shorter than the shortest separation distance (cell gap) between the alignment layers (or substrates). The surface of the pixel electrode is preferably covered with a protective insulating film and an alignment layer. The “horizontal component of the shortest separation path” here means that the shortest separation path connecting the adjacent common electrode and the pixel electrode is decomposed into a horizontal direction with respect to the substrate and a vertical direction (= thickness direction) with respect to the substrate. Among the components, the component in the horizontal direction with respect to the substrate. Note that a storage capacitor (not shown) for storing a display signal supplied through the source bus line 25 may be provided in an area surrounded by the plurality of gate bus lines 26 and the plurality of source bus lines 25. Good.

  FIG. 15 is a modification of FIG. 14 and shows a slit-shaped pixel electrode as an example of the shape of the pixel electrode. The pixel electrode 21 shown in FIG. 15 is formed by cutting out a substantially rectangular flat plate electrode with a triangular cutout at the center and both ends of the flat plate, and the other portions are cut out in a substantially rectangular frame shape. The shape is hollowed out at the part. The shape of the notch is not particularly limited, and a notch having a known shape such as an ellipse, a circle, a rectangle, a rhombus, a triangle, or a parallelogram can be used.

  14 and 15 show only a pair of gate bus lines 26 and a pair of source bus lines 25 in one pixel.

  FIG. 17 is one example of a cross-sectional view in which the liquid crystal display element is cut in the direction of the line III-III in FIG. A first substrate 2 in which an electrode layer 3 including a first alignment layer 4 and a thin film transistor (TFT) is formed on one surface and a first polarizing layer 1 is formed on the other surface; and a second alignment Layer 1, second polarizing layer 7, and second substrate 10 on which light conversion film 90 is formed on one surface are spaced apart from each other with a predetermined gap G so that the alignment layers face each other. A liquid crystal layer 5 containing a liquid crystal composition is filled between 2 and the second substrate 10. A gate insulating film 13, a thin film transistor (14, 15, 16, 17, 19), a passivation film 18, a planarizing film 33, a common electrode 22, an insulating film 35, a pixel electrode 21, and a part of the surface of the first substrate 2 The first alignment layers 4 are stacked in this order. Although FIG. 17 shows an example in which two layers of the passivation film 18 and the flat film 33 are separately provided, one leveling film having both the functions of the passivation film 18 and the flat film 33 may be provided. Moreover, although the example provided with the alignment layers 4 and 6 is shown in FIG. 17, as shown in the said FIG. 2, the alignment layers 4 and 6 do not need to be formed. The light conversion film 90 includes the light conversion layer and the wavelength selective transmission layer described above.

  In the FFS type liquid crystal panel in FIG. 17, the preferred embodiments of the light conversion film according to the present embodiment have been described above. However, the preferred embodiments of the light conversion film include an IPS type liquid crystal display element and a VA type liquid crystal display. The present invention can also be applied to the light conversion film 90 in the element.

  In FIG. 17, a preferred embodiment of the structure of the thin film transistor includes a gate electrode 14 formed on the surface of the substrate 2, and a gate insulating layer provided so as to cover the gate electrode 14 and cover substantially the entire surface of the substrate 2. 13, a semiconductor layer 19 formed on the surface of the gate insulating layer 13 so as to face the gate electrode 14, a protective film 20 provided so as to cover a part of the surface of the semiconductor layer 19, and the protection A drain electrode 16 which covers one side edge of the film 20 and the semiconductor layer 19 and is in contact with the gate insulating layer 13 formed on the surface of the substrate 2, the protective film 20 and the semiconductor A source electrode 17 that covers the other side end of the layer 19 and is in contact with the gate insulating layer 13 formed on the surface of the substrate 2; the drain electrode 16; Has an insulating protective layer 18 provided to cover the over scan electrodes 17. An anodic oxide film (not shown) may be formed on the surface of the gate electrode 14 for reasons such as eliminating a step with the gate electrode.

  In the embodiment of the FFS type liquid crystal display device as shown in FIG. 17, the common electrode 22 is a flat electrode formed on almost the entire surface of the gate insulating layer 13, while the pixel electrode 21 has the common electrode 22. It is a comb-shaped electrode formed on the insulating protective layer 18 to be covered. That is, the common electrode 22 is disposed at a position closer to the first substrate 2 than the pixel electrode 21, and these electrodes are disposed so as to overlap each other via the insulating protective layer 18. The pixel electrode 21 and the common electrode 22 are formed of a transparent conductive material such as ITO (Indium Tin Oxide), IZO (Indium Zinc Oxide), or IZTO (Indium Zinc Tin Oxide). Since the pixel electrode 21 and the common electrode 22 are formed of a transparent conductive material, the area opened by the unit pixel area increases, and the aperture ratio and transmittance increase.

  Further, the pixel electrode 21 and the common electrode 22 have a horizontal component of the inter-electrode path between the pixel electrode 21 and the common electrode 22 (both the horizontal component of the minimum separation path) in order to form a fringe electric field between these electrodes. R) is formed to be smaller than the thickness G of the liquid crystal layer 5 between the first substrate 2 and the second substrate 10. Here, the horizontal component R of the interelectrode path represents the distance in the horizontal direction on the substrate between the electrodes. In FIG. 17, since the flat common electrode 22 and the comb-shaped pixel electrode 21 overlap each other, an example in which the horizontal component (or interelectrode distance) of the minimum separation path is R = 0 is shown. Since the horizontal component R of the path is smaller than the thickness of the liquid crystal layer between the first substrate 2 and the second substrate 10 (also referred to as cell gap): G, a fringe electric field E is formed. . Therefore, the FFS type liquid crystal display element can use a horizontal electric field formed in a direction perpendicular to a line forming the comb shape of the pixel electrode 21 and a parabolic electric field. The electrode width of the comb-shaped portion of the pixel electrode 21: l and the width of the gap of the comb-shaped portion of the pixel electrode 21: m are such that all the liquid crystal molecules in the liquid crystal layer 5 can be driven by the generated electric field. It is preferable to form. Further, the horizontal component R of the minimum separation path between the pixel electrode and the common electrode can be adjusted by the (average) film thickness of the insulating film 35 or the like.

  An example of an IPS type liquid crystal panel, which is a modification of the FFS type liquid crystal panel in the liquid crystal display element according to the present embodiment, will be described with reference to FIGS. The configuration of the liquid crystal panel in the IPS type liquid crystal display element is a structure in which an electrode layer 3 (including a common electrode, a pixel electrode, and a TFT) is provided on a substrate on one side as in the FFS type in FIG. One polarizing layer 1, a first substrate 2, an electrode layer 3, a first alignment layer 4, a liquid crystal layer 5 containing a liquid crystal composition, a second alignment layer 6, and a second polarizing layer 7, the light conversion film 90, and the second substrate 10 are sequentially laminated.

FIG. 16 is an enlarged plan view of a part of the region surrounded by the XIV line of the electrode layer 3 formed on the first substrate 2 of FIG. 13 in the IPS liquid crystal display unit. As shown in FIG. 16, in a region surrounded by a plurality of gate bus lines 26 for supplying scanning signals and a plurality of source bus lines 25 for supplying display signals (in a unit pixel), a comb-teeth shape is formed. The first electrode (for example, pixel electrode) 21 and the comb-shaped second electrode (for example, common electrode) 22 are loosely engaged with each other (the two electrodes are spaced apart and meshed with each other while maintaining a certain distance). ). In the unit pixel, a thin film transistor including a source electrode 27, a drain electrode 24, and a gate electrode 28 is provided in the vicinity of an intersection where the gate bus line 26 and the source bus line 25 intersect each other. The thin film transistor is connected to the first electrode 21 as a switch element that supplies a display signal to the first electrode 21. Further, a common line (V _com ) 29 is provided in parallel with the gate bus line 26. The common line 29 is connected to the second electrode 22 in order to supply a common signal to the second electrode 22.

  FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view of the IPS liquid crystal panel taken along the line III-III in FIG. On the first substrate 2, a gate insulating layer 32 provided so as to cover the gate bus line 26 (not shown) and to cover substantially the entire surface of the first substrate 2, and on the surface of the gate insulating layer 32 The formed insulating protective layer 31 is provided, and the first electrode (pixel electrode) 21 and the second electrode (common electrode) 22 are provided on the insulating protective film 31 separately. The insulating protective layer 31 is a layer having an insulating function, and is formed of silicon nitride, silicon dioxide, silicon oxynitride film, or the like. In addition, the first alignment layer 4 and the electrode layer 3 including the thin film transistor are formed on one surface, and the first polarizing layer 1 is formed on the other surface, and the second alignment layer 6, the second polarizing layer 7 and the second substrate 10 on which the light conversion layer 9 is formed on one surface are spaced apart from each other so that the alignment layers face each other at a predetermined interval. The liquid crystal layer 5 is filled. The light conversion film 90 includes the light conversion layer and the wavelength selective transmission layer described above. The description of the light conversion film 90 is as described above.

  In the embodiment as shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 18, the first electrode 21 and the second electrode 22 are comb-shaped electrodes formed on the insulating protective layer 31, that is, on the same layer. It is provided in a state of being separated and meshed. In the IPS liquid crystal display unit, the interelectrode distance G between the first electrode 21 and the second electrode 22 and the thickness of the liquid crystal layer between the first substrate 2 and the second substrate 10 ( Cell gap): H satisfies the relationship G ≧ H. The distance between electrodes: G represents the shortest distance in the horizontal direction on the substrate between the first electrode 21 and the second electrode 22. In the example shown in FIGS. 16 and 18, the first electrode 21 is used. And a distance in the horizontal direction with respect to a line formed by alternately fitting the second electrode 22 and the second electrode 22. The distance H between the first substrate 2 and the second substrate 10 represents the thickness of the liquid crystal layer between the first substrate 2 and the second substrate 10, specifically, The distance (namely, cell gap) between the alignment layers 4 (outermost surface) provided in each of the substrate 2 and the second substrate 10 and the thickness of the liquid crystal layer are represented.

  18 shows an example in which the alignment layers 4 and 6 are provided, but the alignment layers 4 and 6 may not be formed as shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in the aforementioned FFS type liquid crystal panel, the thickness of the liquid crystal layer between the first substrate 2 and the second substrate 10 is the substrate between the first electrode 21 and the second electrode 22. In the IPS type liquid crystal display unit, the thickness of the liquid crystal layer between the first substrate 2 and the second substrate 10 is the first electrode 21 and the second electrode. 22 is less than the shortest horizontal distance to the substrate.

  The IPS liquid crystal panel drives liquid crystal molecules using an electric field in the horizontal direction with respect to the substrate surface formed between the first electrode 21 and the second electrode 22. The electrode width Q of the first electrode 21 and the electrode width R of the second electrode 22 are preferably formed such that all the liquid crystal molecules in the liquid crystal layer 5 can be driven by the generated electric field.

  Another embodiment of the preferred liquid crystal panel of the present embodiment is a vertical alignment type liquid crystal panel (VA type liquid crystal display). An example of a VA type liquid crystal panel of the liquid crystal display element according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 19 is an enlarged plan view of the region surrounded by the XIV line of the electrode layer 3 (or also referred to as the thin film transistor layer 3) including the thin film transistor formed on the substrate. 20 is a cross-sectional view of the liquid crystal panel shown in FIGS. 3 and 8 taken along the line III-III in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 and 8, the configuration of the liquid crystal panel in the liquid crystal display element according to the present embodiment is a (transparent) electrode layer 3b (or also referred to as a common electrode 3b), the second polarizing layer 7, and the light conversion. A first substrate 2 including a second substrate 10 provided with a layer 9, a pixel electrode and an electrode layer 3 on which a thin film transistor for controlling the pixel electrode provided in each pixel is formed; A liquid crystal layer 5 (consisting of a liquid crystal composition) sandwiched between the second substrate 10 and the alignment of the liquid crystal molecules in the liquid crystal composition when no voltage is applied to the substrates 2 and 7. A liquid crystal display element that is substantially perpendicular to the liquid crystal display device, and is characterized by using a specific liquid crystal composition as a liquid crystal layer. Moreover, it is preferable that the electrode layer 3b is comprised from the transparent conductive material like other liquid crystal display elements. Although FIG. 18 shows an example in which the light conversion film 90 is provided between the second substrate 10 and the second polarizing layer 7, it is not necessarily limited to this. Furthermore, a pair of alignment layers 4 and 6 are formed on the surfaces of the transparent electrodes (layers) 3a and 3b as necessary so as to be adjacent to the liquid crystal layer 5 according to the present embodiment and in direct contact with the liquid crystal composition constituting the liquid crystal layer 5. (Orientation layers 4 and 6 are shown in FIG. 20). The first polarizing layer 1 is provided on the surface of the first substrate 2 on the backlight unit side, and the second polarizing layer 7 is provided between the transparent electrode (layer) 3b and the light conversion film 90. It has been. Accordingly, one of the preferred forms of the liquid crystal panel in the liquid crystal display element according to the present embodiment is that the first alignment layer 4 and the electrode layer 3 including the thin film transistor are formed on one surface, and the first surface is formed on the other surface. The first substrate 2 on which the polarizing layer 1 is formed, the second alignment layer 6, the transparent electrode (layer) 3b, the second polarizing layer 7 and the light conversion film 90 are formed on one surface of the second substrate. The substrate 10 is spaced apart from the alignment layer at a predetermined interval, and a liquid crystal layer 5 containing a liquid crystal composition is filled between the first substrate 2 and the second substrate 10. The description of the light conversion film 90 is as described above.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a pixel electrode of “” ”type as an example of the shape of the pixel electrode 21, and the region surrounded by the XIV line of the electrode layer 3 formed on the substrate 2 in FIGS. 14 and 15, the pixel electrode 21 is formed in a “” ”shape over substantially the entire area surrounded by the gate bus line 26 and the source bus line 25. However, the shape of the pixel electrode is not limited to this, and may be a fishbone structure pixel electrode when used for PSVA, etc. Further, other configurations and functions of the pixel electrode 21 are as described above. Therefore, it is omitted here.

  Unlike the IPS type and FFS type, the liquid crystal panel portion of the vertical alignment type liquid crystal display element is formed on the substrate facing the TFT with the common electrode 3b (not shown) facing and separated from the pixel electrode 21. Has been. In other words, the pixel electrode 21 and the common electrode 22 are formed on different substrates. On the other hand, in the aforementioned FFS or IPS type liquid crystal display element, the pixel electrode 21 and the common electrode 22 are formed on the same substrate.

  Further, the light conversion film 90 may form a black matrix (not shown) in a portion corresponding to the thin film transistor and the storage capacitor 23 from the viewpoint of preventing light leakage.

  20 is a cross-sectional view of the liquid crystal display element shown in FIGS. 3 and 8 taken along the line III-III in FIG. That is, the liquid crystal panel 200 of the liquid crystal display element according to the present embodiment includes a first polarizing layer 1, a first substrate 2, an electrode layer (or a thin film transistor layer) 3a including a thin film transistor, and a first alignment. The layer 4, the liquid crystal layer 5 containing the liquid crystal composition, the second alignment layer 6, the common electrode 3b, the second polarizing layer 7, the light conversion film 90, and the second substrate 10 are sequentially formed. It is a laminated structure. A preferred embodiment of the thin film transistor structure (region IV in FIG. 20) of the liquid crystal display element according to the present embodiment is as described above, and is omitted here.

  The liquid crystal display element according to the present embodiment may have a local dimming technique for improving the contrast by controlling the brightness of the backlight unit 100 for each of a plurality of sections smaller than the number of pixels of the liquid crystal.

  As a local dimming method, it is possible to use a plurality of light emitting elements L as light sources for a specific area on the liquid crystal panel and control each light emitting element L according to the luminance of the display area. In this case, the plurality of light emitting elements L may be arranged in a planar shape or may be arranged in a line on one side of the liquid crystal panel 200.

  In the case of a structure having the light guide unit 102 of the backlight unit 100 and the liquid crystal panel 200 as the local dimming method, the light guide plate (and / or the light diffusing plate) and the substrate on the light source side of the liquid crystal panel In the meantime, the light guide unit 102 may include a control layer that controls the amount of light of the backlight for each specific region smaller than the number of pixels of the liquid crystal.

  As a method for controlling the amount of light of the backlight, a liquid crystal element having fewer than the number of pixels of the liquid crystal may be further included, and various existing methods can be used as the liquid crystal element. An LCD layer containing is preferable in terms of transmittance. The layer containing the (nematic) liquid crystal in which the polymer network is formed (if necessary, the layer containing the (nematic) liquid crystal in which the polymer network is sandwiched between a pair of transparent electrodes) scatters light when the voltage is OFF, In order to transmit light when the voltage is ON, an LCD layer including a liquid crystal in which a polymer network partitioned so as to divide the entire display screen into a plurality of partitions is formed, a light guide plate (and / or a light diffusion plate) and a liquid crystal panel. Local dimming can be realized by providing it between the substrate on the light source side.

  Hereinafter, a liquid crystal layer, an alignment layer, and the like, which are components of the liquid crystal panel portion of the liquid crystal display element according to the present embodiment, will be described.

The liquid crystal layer according to this embodiment has a general formula (i):
(In the formula, R ⁱ¹ and R ⁱ² are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, or 2 to 2 carbon atoms. 8 represents an alkenyloxy group, A ⁱ¹ represents a 1,4-phenylene group or a trans-1,4-cyclohexylene group, and n ⁱ¹ represents 0 or 1.) I have a thing.

  Since a liquid crystal layer containing a compound having high reliability with respect to light resistance can be constituted by the above compound, deterioration of the liquid crystal layer due to light from a light source, particularly blue light (from a blue LED) can be suppressed / prevented. Moreover, since the retardation of the liquid crystal layer can be adjusted, the decrease in the transmittance of the liquid crystal display element is suppressed or prevented.

  In the liquid crystal layer according to the present embodiment, the lower limit of the preferable content of the compound represented by the general formula (i) is 1% by mass with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment, and 2% by mass. 3% by mass 5% by mass 7% by mass 10% by mass 15% by mass 20% by mass 25% by mass 30% by mass , 35% by mass, 40% by mass, 45% by mass, 50% by mass, and 55% by mass. The upper limit of the preferable content is 95% by mass, 90% by mass, 85% by mass, 80% by mass, and 75% by mass with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment. 70% by mass, 65% by mass, 60% by mass, 55% by mass, 50% by mass, 45% by mass, 40% by mass, 35% by mass, 30% by mass % And 25% by mass.

  The liquid crystal layer according to this embodiment particularly preferably contains 10 to 50% by mass of the compound represented by the general formula (i).

  The compound represented by the general formula (i) is preferably a compound selected from the group of compounds represented by the general formulas (i-1) to (i-2).

The compound represented by general formula (i-1) is the following compound.
(In the formula, R ⁱ¹¹ and R ⁱ¹² each independently represent the same meaning as R ⁱ¹ and R ⁱ² in the general formula (i)).

R ⁱ¹¹ and R ⁱ¹² are preferably a linear alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a linear alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and a linear alkenyl group having 2 to 5 carbon atoms. .

  Although the compound represented by general formula (i-1) can also be used independently, it can also be used in combination of 2 or more compounds. There are no particular restrictions on the types of compounds that can be combined, but they are used in appropriate combinations according to the required properties such as solubility at low temperatures, transition temperatures, electrical reliability, and birefringence. The kind of compound to be used is, for example, one kind as one embodiment of this embodiment, two kinds, three kinds, four kinds, and five kinds or more.

  The lower limit of the preferable content is 1% by mass, 2% by mass, 3% by mass, 5% by mass, and 7% by mass with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment. 10% by mass, 12% by mass, 15% by mass, 17% by mass, 20% by mass, 22% by mass, 25% by mass, 27% by mass, 30% by mass %, 35% by mass, 40% by mass, 45% by mass, 50% by mass, and 55% by mass. The upper limit of the preferable content is 95% by mass, 90% by mass, 85% by mass, 80% by mass, and 75% by mass with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment. 70% by mass, 65% by mass, 60% by mass, 55% by mass, 50% by mass, 48% by mass, 45% by mass, 43% by mass, 40% by mass %, 38% by mass, 35% by mass, 33% by mass, 30% by mass, 28% by mass, 25% by mass, 23% by mass, 20% by mass is there.

When a composition having a low response speed and a high response speed is required, it is preferable that the lower limit value is high and the upper limit value is high. Moreover, maintaining high T _NI of the compositions of the present embodiment, it is preferred if good composition temperature stability is required is the upper limit value in the lower limit of the above is moderate is moderate. When it is desired to increase the dielectric anisotropy in order to keep the driving voltage low, it is preferable that the lower limit value is low and the upper limit value is low.

It is preferable that the compound represented by general formula (i-1) is a compound chosen from the compound group represented by general formula (i-1-1).
( ^Wherein R ⁱ¹² represents the same meaning as in general formula (i-1).)

The compound represented by the general formula (i-1-1) is a compound selected from the group of compounds represented by the formula (i-1-1.1) to the formula (i-1-1.3). Is preferable, and is preferably a compound represented by formula (i-1-1.2) or formula (i-1-1.3), and particularly represented by formula (i-1-1.3). It is preferable that it is a compound.

  The lower limit of the preferable content of the compound represented by the formula (i-1-1.3) with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment is 1% by mass, 2% by mass, and 3% by mass. %, 5% by mass, 7% by mass, and 10% by mass. The upper limit of the preferable content is 20% by mass, 15% by mass, 13% by mass, 10% by mass, and 8% by mass with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment. 7% by mass, 6% by mass, 5% by mass, and 3% by mass.

The compound represented by the general formula (i-1) is a compound selected from the group of compounds represented by the general formula (i-1-2), and light having a wavelength of 200 to 400 nm in the ultraviolet region as a backlight. Even when it is irradiated, it is preferable in that it has excellent durability and can express a voltage holding ratio.
( ^Wherein R ⁱ¹² represents the same meaning as in general formula (i-1).)

  The lower limit of the preferable content of the compound represented by Formula (i-1-2) with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment is 1% by mass, 5% by mass, and 10% by mass. Yes, 15% by mass, 17% by mass, 20% by mass, 23% by mass, 25% by mass, 27% by mass, 30% by mass and 35% by mass. The upper limit of the preferable content is 60% by mass, 55% by mass, 50% by mass, 45% by mass, and 42% by mass with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment. 40% by mass, 38% by mass, 35% by mass, 33% by mass, and 30% by mass.

Furthermore, the compound represented by the general formula (i-1-2) is a compound selected from the group of compounds represented by the formula (i-1-2.1) to the formula (i-1-2.4). It is preferable that it is a compound represented by Formula (i-1-2.2) to Formula (i-1-2.4). In particular, the compound represented by formula (i-1-2.2) is preferable because the response speed of the composition of the present embodiment is particularly improved. Further, when obtaining the high _{T NI} than the response speed, it is preferable to use a compound represented by the formula (i-1-2.3) or the formula (i-1-2.4). The content of the compounds represented by formula (i-1-2.3) and formula (i-1-2.4) is not preferably 30% by mass or more in order to improve solubility at low temperatures. .

  The lower limit of the preferable content of the compound represented by the formula (i-1-2.2) with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment is 10% by mass, 15% by mass, and 18% by mass. %, 20% by mass, 23% by mass, 25% by mass, 27% by mass, 30% by mass, 33% by mass, 35% by mass, and 38% by mass. Yes, 40% by mass. The upper limit of the preferable content is 60% by mass, 55% by mass, 50% by mass, 45% by mass, and 43% by mass with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment. 40% by mass, 38% by mass, 35% by mass, 32% by mass, 30% by mass, 20% by mass, 15% by mass, and 10% by mass. Among these, from the viewpoint of preventing deterioration of the liquid crystal layer with respect to blue visible light, the upper limit of the content is preferably 15% by mass, particularly 10% by mass.

  The preferred total content of the compound represented by formula (i-1-1.3) and the compound represented by formula (i-1-2.2) relative to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment The lower limit is 10% by mass, 15% by mass, 20% by mass, 25% by mass, 27% by mass, 30% by mass, 35% by mass, and 40% by mass. is there. The upper limit of the preferable content is 60% by mass, 55% by mass, 50% by mass, 45% by mass, and 43% by mass with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment. 40% by mass, 38% by mass, 35% by mass, 32% by mass, 30% by mass, 27% by mass, 25% by mass, and 22% by mass.

The compound represented by the general formula (i-1) is preferably a compound selected from the group of compounds represented by the general formula (i-1-3).
(In the formula, R ⁱ¹³ and R ⁱ¹⁴ each independently represent an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms or an alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms.)

R ⁱ¹³ and R ⁱ¹⁴ are preferably a linear alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a linear alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and a linear alkenyl group having 2 to 5 carbon atoms. .

The lower limit of the preferable content of the compound represented by Formula (i-1-3) with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment is 1% by mass, 5% by mass, and 10% by mass. Yes, 13% by mass, 15% by mass, 17% by mass, 20% by mass, 23% by mass, 25% by mass, and 30% by mass. The upper limit of the preferable content is 60% by mass, 55% by mass, 50% by mass, 45% by mass, and 40% by mass with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment. 37% by mass, 35% by mass, 33% by mass, 30% by mass, 27% by mass, 25% by mass, 23% by mass, 20% by mass, and 17% by mass %, 15% by mass, 13% by mass, and 10% by mass. Furthermore, the compound represented by the general formula (i-1-3) is a compound selected from the group of compounds represented by the formula (i-1-3.1) to the formula (i-1-3.12). It is preferable that it is a compound represented by Formula (i-1-3.1), Formula (i-1-3.3), or Formula (i-1-3.4). In particular, the compound represented by the formula (i-1-3.1) is preferable because the response speed of the composition of the present embodiment is particularly improved. Further, when obtaining the high _{T NI} than the response speed, the formula (i-1-3.3), the formula (i-1-3.4), the formula (L-1-3.11) and formula (i It is preferable to use a compound represented by (1-3.12). Sum of compounds represented by formula (i-1-3.3), formula (i-1-3.4), formula (i-1-3.11) and formula (i-1-3.12) The content of is not preferably 20% by mass or more in order to improve the solubility at low temperatures.

The compound represented by general formula (i-1) is preferably a compound selected from the group of compounds represented by general formula (i-1-4) and / or (i-1-5).
( ^Wherein R ⁱ¹⁵ and R ⁱ¹⁶ each independently represent an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms or an alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms.)

R ⁱ¹⁵ and R ⁱ¹⁶ are preferably a linear alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a linear alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and a linear alkenyl group having 2 to 5 carbon atoms. .

  The lower limit of the preferable content of the compound represented by Formula (i-1-4) with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment is 1% by mass, 5% by mass, and 10% by mass. Yes, 13% by mass, 15% by mass, 17% by mass, and 20% by mass. The upper limit of the preferable content is 25% by mass, 23% by mass, 20% by mass, 17% by mass, and 15% by mass with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment. 13% by mass and 10% by mass.

  The lower limit of the preferable content of the compound represented by the formula (i-1-5) with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment is 1% by mass, 5% by mass, and 10% by mass. Yes, 13% by mass, 15% by mass, 17% by mass, and 20% by mass. The upper limit of the preferable content is 25% by mass, 23% by mass, 20% by mass, 17% by mass, and 15% by mass with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment. 13% by mass and 10% by mass.

Furthermore, the compounds represented by general formulas (i-1-4) and (i-1-5) are represented by formulas (i-1-4.1) to (i-1-5.3). It is preferable that it is a compound chosen from the compound group which is said, and it is preferable that it is a compound represented by Formula (i-1-4.2) or Formula (i-1-5.2).

  The lower limit of the preferable content of the compound represented by the formula (i-1-4.2) with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment is 1% by mass, 2% by mass, and 3% by mass. %, 5% by mass, 7% by mass, 10% by mass, 13% by mass, 15% by mass, 18% by mass, and 20% by mass. The upper limit of the preferable content is 20% by mass, 17% by mass, 15% by mass, 13% by mass, and 10% by mass with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment. 8% by mass, 7% by mass, and 6% by mass.

  Formula (i-1-1.3), Formula (i-1-2.2), Formula (i-1-3.1), Formula (i-1-3.3), Formula (i-1- 3.4), it is preferable to combine two or more compounds selected from the compounds represented by formula (i-1-3.11) and formula (i-1-3.12). -1.3), formula (i-1-2.2), formula (i-1-3.1), formula (i-1-3.3), formula (i-1-3.4) and It is preferable to combine two or more compounds selected from the compounds represented by formula (i-1-4.2), and the lower limit of the preferable content of the total content of these compounds is the composition of the present embodiment. 1% by mass, 2% by mass, 3% by mass, 5% by mass, 7% by mass, 10% by mass, 13% by mass with respect to the total amount of the product, 15% 18% by mass %, 20% by mass, 23% by mass, 25% by mass, 27% by mass, 30% by mass, 33% by mass, 35% by mass, and the upper limit value is 80% by mass, 70% by mass, 60% by mass, 50% by mass, 45% by mass, 40% by mass, and 37% by mass with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment. %, 35% by mass, 33% by mass, 30% by mass, 28% by mass, 25% by mass, 23% by mass and 20% by mass. When emphasizing the reliability of the composition, compounds represented by formula (i-1-3.1), formula (i-1-3.3) and formula (i-1-3.4)) It is preferable to combine two or more compounds selected from the group consisting of formulas (i-1-1.3) and (i-1-2.2) when importance is attached to the response speed of the composition. It is preferable to combine two or more compounds selected from the following compounds.

It is preferable that the compound represented by general formula (i-1) is a compound chosen from the compound group represented by general formula (i-1-6).
(In the formula, R ⁱ¹⁷ and R ⁱ¹⁸ each independently represent a methyl group or a hydrogen atom.)

  The lower limit of the preferable content of the compound represented by the formula (i-1-6) with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment is 1% by mass, 5% by mass, and 10% by mass. Yes, 15% by mass, 17% by mass, 20% by mass, 23% by mass, 25% by mass, 27% by mass, 30% by mass and 35% by mass. The upper limit of the preferable content is 60% by mass, 55% by mass, 50% by mass, 45% by mass, and 42% by mass with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment. 40% by mass, 38% by mass, 35% by mass, 33% by mass, and 30% by mass.

Furthermore, the compound represented by the general formula (i-1-6) is a compound selected from the compound group represented by the formula (i-1-6.1) to the formula (i-1-6.3). Preferably there is.

The compound represented by general formula (i-2) is the following compound.
(In the formula, R ⁱ²¹ and R ⁱ²² each independently represent the same meaning as R ⁱ¹ and R ⁱ² in formula (i)).

R ⁱ²¹ is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms or an alkenyl group having 2 to 5 carbon atoms, and R ^L22 is an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 4 to 5 carbon atoms, or a carbon atom. The alkoxy group of number 1-4 is preferable.

  Although the compound represented by general formula (i-2) can also be used independently, it can also be used in combination of 2 or more compounds. There are no particular restrictions on the types of compounds that can be combined, but they are used in appropriate combinations according to the required properties such as solubility at low temperatures, transition temperatures, electrical reliability, and birefringence. The kind of compound to be used is, for example, one kind as one embodiment of this embodiment, two kinds, three kinds, four kinds, and five kinds or more.

  When emphasizing solubility at low temperatures, the effect is high when the content is set to be large. On the other hand, when the response speed is important, the effect is high when the content is set low. Furthermore, when improving dripping marks and image sticking characteristics, it is preferable to set the content range in the middle.

  The lower limit of the preferable content of the compound represented by the formula (i-2) with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment is 1% by mass, 2% by mass, and 3% by mass, 5% by mass, 7% by mass, and 10% by mass. The upper limit of the preferable content is 20% by mass, 15% by mass, 13% by mass, 10% by mass, and 8% by mass with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment. 7% by mass, 6% by mass, 5% by mass, and 3% by mass.

In the composition of the present embodiment, one or more compounds selected from the compounds represented by the general formulas (N-1), (N-2), (N-3) and (N-4) are further included. It is preferable to contain. These compounds correspond to dielectrically negative compounds (the sign of Δε is negative and the absolute value is greater than 2).

[Formula (N-1), (N -2), (N-3) and (N-4) ^{in, R N11, R N12, R} N21, R N22, R N31, R N32, R N41 and R ⁴² each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, or one or two or more non-adjacent —CH ₂ — in the alkyl chain having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, A structural moiety having a chemical structure substituted by CH═CH—, —C≡C—, —O—, —CO—, —COO— or —OCO—;
A ^N11 , A ^N12 , A ^N21 , A ^N22 , A ^N31 , A ^N32 , A ^N41 and A ^N42 are each independently (a) a 1,4-cyclohexylene group (one —CH present in this group) _2- or two or more non-adjacent —CH ₂ — may be replaced by —O—.) And (b) a 1,4-phenylene group (one —CH═ present in this group). Or two or more non-adjacent —CH═ may be replaced by —N═.)
(C) Naphthalene-2,6-diyl group, 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group or decahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group (naphthalene-2,6-diyl group or One —CH═ present in the 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group or two or more non-adjacent —CH═ may be replaced by —N═. )
(D) represents a group selected from the group consisting of 1,4-cyclohexenylene groups, and the group (a), the group (b), the group (c) and the group (d) are each a hydrogen atom in the structure Each independently may be substituted with a cyano group, a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom,
^{Z N11, Z N12, Z N21} , Z N22, Z N31, Z N32, Z N41 and ^{Z N42} are each independently a single _{bond, -CH 2 CH 2 -, -} (CH 2) 4 -, - OCH _2— , —CH ₂ O—, —COO—, —OCO—, —OCF ₂ —, —CF ₂ O—, —CH═N—N═CH—, —CH═CH—, —CF═CF— or -C≡C-
X ^N21 represents a hydrogen atom or a fluorine atom, T ^N31 represents —CH ₂ — or an oxygen atom, X ^N41 represents an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, or —CH ₂ —, and Y ^N41 represents a single bond, or -CH ₂ - ^{represents, n N11, n N12, n} N21, n N22, n N31, n N32, n N41, and ^{n N42} is an integer of independently ^{0~3, n} N11 ⁺ n ^N12 N ^N21 + n ^N22 and n ^N31 + n ^N32 are each independently 1, 2 or 3, and when there are a plurality of A ^{N11 to} A ^N32 and Z ^{N11 to} Z ^N32 , they are the same or different. at ^best, n N41 ^{+ n N42} represents an integer of 0 to ^{3, if a N41} and ^{a N42, Z N41} and ^{Z N42} there are multiple, they differ even for the same Even though it may. ]

  The compounds represented by the general formulas (N-1), (N-2), (N-3) and (N-4) are preferably compounds whose Δε is negative and whose absolute value is larger than 2. .

Formula (N-1), (N -2), (N-3) and (N-4) ^{in, R N11, R N12, R} N21, R N22, R N31, R N32, R N41 and ^{R N42} Are each independently preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms or an alkenyloxy group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms. An alkyl group having 1 to 5 atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 5 carbon atoms or an alkenyloxy group having 2 to 5 carbon atoms is preferable, and an alkyl having 1 to 5 carbon atoms Group or an alkenyl group having 2 to 5 carbon atoms is more preferable, an alkyl group having 2 to 5 carbon atoms or an alkenyl group having 2 to 3 carbon atoms is more preferable, and an alkenyl group having 3 carbon atoms (propenyl group). Especially preferred .

  Further, when the ring structure to which it is bonded is a phenyl group (aromatic), a linear alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a linear alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and carbon An alkenyl group having 4 to 5 atoms is preferable, and when the ring structure to which the alkenyl group is bonded is a saturated ring structure such as cyclohexane, pyran and dioxane, a linear alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a straight chain A linear alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms and a linear alkenyl group having 2 to 5 carbon atoms are preferable. In order to stabilize the nematic phase, the total of carbon atoms and oxygen atoms, if present, is preferably 5 or less, and is preferably linear.

The alkenyl group is preferably selected from groups represented by any one of formulas (R1) to (R5). (The black dot in each formula represents a carbon atom in the ring structure.)

A ^N11 , A ^N12 , A ^N21 , A ^N22 , A ^N31, and A ^N32 are preferably aromatic when it is required to increase Δn independently, and in order to improve the response speed, fat A trans-1,4-cyclohexylene group, 1,4-phenylene group, 2-fluoro-1,4-phenylene group, 3-fluoro-1,4-phenylene group, 3,5 -Difluoro-1,4-phenylene group, 2,3-difluoro-1,4-phenylene group, 1,4-cyclohexenylene group, 1,4-bicyclo [2.2.2] octylene group, piperidine-1 , 4-diyl group, naphthalene-2,6-diyl group, decahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group or 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group Preferred, it is more preferable that represents the following structures,
More preferably, it represents a trans-1,4-cyclohexylene group, a 1,4-cyclohexenylene group or a 1,4-phenylene group.

^{Z N11, Z N12, Z N21} , Z N22, Z N31 and ^{Z N32} _-CH 2 each _{independently O -, - CF 2 O -} , - CH 2 CH 2 -, - CF 2 CF 2 - or a single bond preferably represents _{an, -CH 2 O -, - CH} 2 CH 2 - or a single bond is more preferable, _-CH 2 O-or a single bond is particularly preferred.

^XN21 is preferably a fluorine atom.

T ^N31 is preferably an oxygen atom.

n ^N11 + n ^N12 , n ^N21 + n ^N22 and n ^N31 + n ^N32 are preferably 1 or 2, a combination in which n ^N11 is 1 and n ^N12 is 0, a combination in which n ^N11 is 2 and n ^N12 is 0, n ^A combination in which ^N11 is 1 and n ^N12 is 1, a combination in which n ^N11 is 2 and n ^N12 is 1, a combination in which n ^N21 is 1 and n ^N22 is 0, n ^N21 is 2 and n ^N22 is n A combination in which n ^N31 is 1 and n ^N32 is 0, and a combination in which n ^N31 is 2 and n ^N32 is 0 are preferable.

  The lower limit of the preferable content of the compound represented by the formula (N-1) with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment is 1% by mass, 10% by mass, and 20% by mass, 30% by mass, 40% by mass, 50% by mass, 55% by mass, 60% by mass, 65% by mass, 70% by mass, 75% by mass, 80% by mass %. The upper limit of the preferable content is 95% by mass, 85% by mass, 75% by mass, 65% by mass, 55% by mass, 45% by mass, and 35% by mass, 25% by mass and 20% by mass.

  The lower limit of the preferable content of the compound represented by Formula (N-2) with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment is 1% by mass, 10% by mass, and 20% by mass, 30% by mass, 40% by mass, 50% by mass, 55% by mass, 60% by mass, 65% by mass, 70% by mass, 75% by mass, 80% by mass %. The upper limit of the preferable content is 95% by mass, 85% by mass, 75% by mass, 65% by mass, 55% by mass, 45% by mass, and 35% by mass, 25% by mass and 20% by mass.

  The lower limit of the preferable content of the compound represented by the formula (N-3) with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment is 1% by mass, 10% by mass, and 20% by mass, 30% by mass, 40% by mass, 50% by mass, 55% by mass, 60% by mass, 65% by mass, 70% by mass, 75% by mass, 80% by mass %. The upper limit of the preferable content is 95% by mass, 85% by mass, 75% by mass, 65% by mass, 55% by mass, 45% by mass, and 35% by mass, 25% by mass and 20% by mass.

When a composition having a low viscosity and a high response speed is required, the lower limit value is preferably low and the upper limit value is preferably low. Moreover, maintaining high T _NI of the compositions of the present embodiment, it is preferred if good composition temperature stability is required a low upper limit lower the lower limit of the above. Further, when it is desired to increase the dielectric anisotropy in order to keep the driving voltage low, it is preferable that the above lower limit value is increased and the upper limit value is high.

  The liquid crystal composition according to this embodiment includes a compound represented by the general formula (N-1), a compound represented by the general formula (N-2), a compound represented by the general formula (N-3), and a general Among the compounds represented by the formula (N-4), it is preferable to have a compound represented by the general formula (N-1).

  As a compound represented by general formula (N-1), the compound group represented by the following general formula (N-1a)-(N-1g) can be mentioned.

Examples of the compound represented by the general formula (N-4) include a compound group represented by the following general formula (N-1h).
^{(Wherein, R N11} and ^{R N12} are as defined ^{R N11} and ^{R N12} in the general formula ^{(N-1), n Na11} represents 0 or ^{1, n NB11} represents 0 or ^{1, n NC11} is represents 0 or ^{1, n Nd11} represents 0 or ^{1, n NE11} is 1 or ^{2, n Nf11} is 1 or ^{2, n NG11} is 1 or ^{2, a NE11} is trans-1,4 ^{-Represents a} cyclohexylene group or a 1,4-phenylene group, and A ^Ng11 represents a trans-1,4-cyclohexylene group, a 1,4-cyclohexenylene group, or a 1,4-phenylene group, but at least one ^{Represents a} 1,4-cyclohexenylene group, Z ^Ne11 represents a single bond or ethylene, but at least one represents ethylene.)
More specifically, the compound represented by the general formula (N-1) is a compound selected from the compound group represented by the general formulas (N-1-1) to (N-1-21). preferable.

(P-type compound)
It is preferable that the composition of this embodiment further contains one or more compounds represented by the general formula (J). These compounds correspond to dielectrically positive compounds (Δε is greater than 2).

(Wherein R ^J1 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and one or two or more non-adjacent —CH ₂ — in the alkyl group are each independently —CH═CH—, — Optionally substituted by C≡C—, —O—, —CO—, —COO— or —OCO—,
n ^J1 represents 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4;
A ^J1 , A ^J2 and A ^J3 are each independently
(A) 1,4-cyclohexylene group (one —CH ₂ — present in this group or two or more non-adjacent —CH ₂ — may be replaced by —O—).
(B) a 1,4-phenylene group (one —CH═ present in the group or two or more non-adjacent —CH═ may be replaced by —N═) and (c) Naphthalene-2,6-diyl group, 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group or decahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group (naphthalene-2,6-diyl group or 1,2 , 3,4-tetrahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group, one —CH═ or two or more non-adjacent —CH═ may be replaced by —N═.
The group (a), the group (b) and the group (c) are each independently selected from the group consisting of cyano group, fluorine atom, chlorine atom, methyl group, trifluoromethyl group or trifluoro May be substituted with a methoxy group,
Z ^J1 and Z ^J2 are each independently a single bond, —CH ₂ CH ₂ —, — (CH ₂ ) ₄ —, —OCH ₂ —, —CH ₂ O—, —OCF ₂ —, —CF ₂ O—, -COO-, -OCO- or -C≡C-
When n ^J1 is 2, 3 or 4 and a plurality of A ^J2 are present, they may be the same or different, and n ^J1 is 2, 3 or 4 and a plurality of Z ^J1 is present. If they are the same or different,
X ^J1 represents a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a cyano group, a trifluoromethyl group, a fluoromethoxy group, a difluoromethoxy group, a trifluoromethoxy group, or a 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl group. )

In the general formula (J), R ^J1 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, or an alkenyloxy having 2 to 8 carbon atoms. Group is preferable, an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 5 carbon atoms or an alkenyloxy group having 2 to 5 carbon atoms is preferable. An alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms or an alkenyl group having 2 to 5 carbon atoms is more preferable, an alkyl group having 2 to 5 carbon atoms or an alkenyl group having 2 to 3 carbon atoms is further preferable, and an alkenyl group having 3 carbon atoms. (Propenyl group) is particularly preferred.

R ^J1 is preferably an alkyl group when emphasizing reliability, and is preferably an alkenyl group when emphasizing a decrease in viscosity.

  Further, when the ring structure to which it is bonded is a phenyl group (aromatic), a linear alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a linear alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and carbon An alkenyl group having 4 to 5 atoms is preferable, and when the ring structure to which the alkenyl group is bonded is a saturated ring structure such as cyclohexane, pyran and dioxane, a linear alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a straight chain A linear alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms and a linear alkenyl group having 2 to 5 carbon atoms are preferable. In order to stabilize the nematic phase, the total of carbon atoms and oxygen atoms, if present, is preferably 5 or less, and is preferably linear.

The alkenyl group is preferably selected from groups represented by any one of formulas (R1) to (R5). (The black dot in each formula represents the carbon atom in the ring structure to which the alkenyl group is bonded.)

A ^J1 , A ^J2 and A ^J3 are each preferably aromatic when it is required to independently increase Δn, and preferably aliphatic to improve the response speed. 1,4-cyclohexylene group, 1,4-phenylene group, 1,4-cyclohexenylene group, 1,4-bicyclo [2.2.2] octylene group, piperidine-1,4-diyl group, naphthalene It preferably represents a -2,6-diyl group, a decahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group or a 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group, which are substituted by fluorine atoms It is more preferable to represent the following structure,
It is more preferable to represent the following structure.

Z ^J1 and Z ^J2 each independently preferably represent —CH ₂ O—, —OCH ₂ —, —CF ₂ O—, —CH ₂ CH ₂ —, —CF ₂ CF ₂ — or a single bond, OCH ₂ —, —CF ₂ O—, —CH ₂ CH ₂ — or a single bond is more preferable, and —OCH ₂ —, —CF ₂ O— or a single bond is particularly preferable.

X ^J1 is preferably a fluorine atom or a trifluoromethoxy group, and more preferably a fluorine atom.

n ^J1 is preferably 0, 1, 2 or 3, preferably 0, 1 or 2, preferably 0 or 1 when emphasizing the improvement of Δε, and 1 or 2 when emphasizing _TNI. preferable.

  Although there is no restriction | limiting in particular in the kind of compound which can be combined, It uses combining according to desired performance, such as solubility at low temperature, transition temperature, electrical reliability, birefringence. The kind of the compound to be used is, for example, one kind as one embodiment of this embodiment, two kinds, and three kinds. Furthermore, in another embodiment of this embodiment, there are four types, five types, six types, and seven or more types.

  In the composition of the present embodiment, the content of the compound represented by the general formula (J) includes solubility at low temperature, transition temperature, electrical reliability, birefringence, process compatibility, dripping marks, and image sticking. Therefore, it is necessary to appropriately adjust according to required performance such as dielectric anisotropy.

  The lower limit of the preferable content of the compound represented by the general formula (J) with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment is 1% by mass, 10% by mass, 20% by mass, and 30%. % By mass, 40% by mass, 50% by mass, 55% by mass, 60% by mass, 65% by mass, 70% by mass, 75% by mass, and 80% by mass. It is. The upper limit of the preferable content is, for example, 95% by mass, 85% by mass, 75% by mass, and 65% by mass in one form of the present embodiment with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment. It is 55% by mass, 45% by mass, 35% by mass, and 25% by mass.

When a composition having a low response speed and a high response speed is required, it is preferable to lower the lower limit value and lower the upper limit value. Moreover, maintaining high T _NI of the compositions of the present embodiment, when temperature stability good composition is required for lowering the lower limit of the above, it is preferable to set the upper limit to lower. When it is desired to increase the dielectric anisotropy in order to keep the driving voltage low, it is preferable to increase the upper limit value while increasing the lower limit value.

R ^J1 is preferably an alkyl group when emphasizing reliability, and is preferably an alkenyl group when emphasizing a decrease in viscosity.

  As the compound represented by the general formula (J), a compound represented by the general formula (M) and a compound represented by the general formula (K) are preferable.

It is preferable that the composition of this embodiment further contains one type or two or more types of compounds represented by the general formula (M). These compounds correspond to dielectrically positive compounds (Δε is greater than 2).

(Wherein R ^M1 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and one or two or more non-adjacent —CH ₂ — in the alkyl group are each independently —CH═CH—, — Optionally substituted by C≡C—, —O—, —CO—, —COO— or —OCO—,
n ^M1 represents 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4;
A ^M1 and A ^M2 are each independently
(A) 1,4-cyclohexylene group (this is present in the group one -CH ₂ - or nonadjacent two or more -CH ₂ - may be replaced by -O- or -S- And (b) 1,4-phenylene group (one —CH═ present in the group or two or more non-adjacent —CH═ may be replaced by —N═).
A hydrogen atom on the group (a) and the group (b) may be independently substituted with a cyano group, a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom,
Z ^M1 and Z ^M2 are each independently a single bond, —CH ₂ CH ₂ —, — (CH ₂ ) ₄ —, —OCH ₂ —, —CH ₂ O—, —OCF ₂ —, —CF ₂ O—, -COO-, -OCO- or -C≡C-
When n ^M1 is 2, 3 or 4 and a plurality of A ^M2 are present, they may be the same or different, and n ^M1 is 2, 3 or 4 and a plurality of Z ^M1 is present If they are the same or different,
X ^M1 and X ^M3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a chlorine atom or a fluorine atom,
X ^M2 represents a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a cyano group, a trifluoromethyl group, a fluoromethoxy group, a difluoromethoxy group, a trifluoromethoxy group, or a 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl group.

In formula (M), R ^M1 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, or an alkenyloxy having 2 to 8 carbon atoms. Group is preferable, an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 5 carbon atoms or an alkenyloxy group having 2 to 5 carbon atoms is preferable. An alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms or an alkenyl group having 2 to 5 carbon atoms is more preferable, an alkyl group having 2 to 5 carbon atoms or an alkenyl group having 2 to 3 carbon atoms is further preferable, and an alkenyl group having 3 carbon atoms. (Propenyl group) is particularly preferred.

R ^M1 is preferably an alkyl group when emphasizing reliability, and is preferably an alkenyl group when emphasizing a decrease in viscosity.

  Further, when the ring structure to which it is bonded is a phenyl group (aromatic), a linear alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a linear alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and carbon An alkenyl group having 4 to 5 atoms is preferable, and when the ring structure to which the alkenyl group is bonded is a saturated ring structure such as cyclohexane, pyran and dioxane, a linear alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a straight chain A linear alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms and a linear alkenyl group having 2 to 5 carbon atoms are preferable. In order to stabilize the nematic phase, the total of carbon atoms and oxygen atoms, if present, is preferably 5 or less, and is preferably linear.

The alkenyl group is preferably selected from groups represented by any one of formulas (R1) to (R5). (The black dot in each formula represents the carbon atom in the ring structure to which the alkenyl group is bonded.)

A ^M1 and A ^M2 are preferably aromatic when it is required to independently increase Δn, and are preferably aliphatic to improve the response speed, and trans-1,4 -Cyclohexylene group, 1,4-phenylene group, 2-fluoro-1,4-phenylene group, 3-fluoro-1,4-phenylene group, 3,5-difluoro-1,4-phenylene group, 2, 3-difluoro-1,4-phenylene group, 1,4-cyclohexenylene group, 1,4-bicyclo [2.2.2] octylene group, piperidine-1,4-diyl group, naphthalene-2,6- It preferably represents a diyl group, decahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group or 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group, and more preferably represents the following structure:
It is more preferable to represent the following structure.

Z ^M1 and ^{Z M2} each _{independently -CH 2 O -, - CF 2} O -, - CH 2 CH 2 -, - CF 2 CF 2 - or preferably a single bond, _-CF 2 O-, —CH ₂ CH ₂ — or a single bond is more preferable, and —CF ₂ O— or a single bond is particularly preferable.

n ^M1 is preferably 0, 1, 2 or 3, preferably 0, 1 or 2, preferably 0 or 1 when emphasizing the improvement of Δε, and 1 or 2 when emphasizing T _NI preferable.

  Although there is no restriction | limiting in particular in the kind of compound which can be combined, It uses combining according to desired performance, such as solubility at low temperature, transition temperature, electrical reliability, birefringence. The kind of the compound to be used is, for example, one kind as one embodiment of this embodiment, two kinds, and three kinds. Furthermore, in another embodiment of this embodiment, there are four types, five types, six types, and seven or more types.

  In the composition of the present embodiment, the content of the compound represented by the general formula (M) includes solubility at low temperature, transition temperature, electrical reliability, birefringence, process suitability, dripping marks, and burn-in. Therefore, it is necessary to appropriately adjust according to required performance such as dielectric anisotropy.

  The lower limit of the preferable content of the compound represented by the formula (M) with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment is 1% by mass, 10% by mass, 20% by mass, and 30% by mass. %, 40% by mass, 50% by mass, 55% by mass, 60% by mass, 65% by mass, 70% by mass, 75% by mass, 80% by mass is there. The upper limit of the preferable content is, for example, 95% by mass, 85% by mass, 75% by mass, and 65% by mass in one form of the present embodiment with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment. It is 55% by mass, 45% by mass, 35% by mass, and 25% by mass.

When a composition having a low response speed and a high response speed is required, it is preferable to lower the lower limit value and lower the upper limit value. Moreover, maintaining high T _NI of the compositions of the present embodiment, when temperature stability good composition is required for lowering the lower limit of the above, it is preferable to set the upper limit to lower. When it is desired to increase the dielectric anisotropy in order to keep the driving voltage low, it is preferable to increase the upper limit value while increasing the lower limit value.

The liquid crystal composition of this embodiment preferably further contains one or more compounds represented by the general formula (L). The compound represented by the general formula (L) corresponds to a dielectrically neutral compound (Δε value is −2 to 2).

(Wherein, R ^L1 and R ^L2 each independently represent an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and one or two or more non-adjacent —CH ₂ — in the alkyl group are each independently May be substituted by —CH═CH—, —C≡C—, —O—, —CO—, —COO— or —OCO—,
n ^L1 represents 0, 1, 2 or 3,
A ^L1 , A ^L2 and A ^L3 each independently represent (a) a 1,4-cyclohexylene group (one —CH ₂ — present in this group or two or more —CH ₂ — not adjacent to each other). May be replaced by -O-) and (b) 1,4-phenylene group (one -CH = present in this group or two or more non-adjacent -CH = are -N May be replaced by =.)
(C) Naphthalene-2,6-diyl group, 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group or decahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group (naphthalene-2,6-diyl group or One —CH═ present in the 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group or two or more non-adjacent —CH═ may be replaced by —N═. )
The group (a), the group (b) and the group (c) may be each independently substituted with a cyano group, a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom,
Z ^L1 and Z ^L2 are each independently a single bond, —CH ₂ CH ₂ —, — (CH ₂ ) ₄ —, —OCH ₂ —, —CH ₂ O—, —COO—, —OCO—, —OCF _2. —, —CF ₂ O—, —CH═N—N═CH—, —CH═CH—, —CF═CF— or —C≡C—,
When n ^L1 is 2 or 3, and a plurality of A ^L2 are present, they may be the same or different, and when n ^L1 is 2 or 3, and a plurality of Z ^L2 are present, May be the same or different, but excludes compounds represented by general formulas (N-1), (N-2), (N-3), (J) and (i). )

  Although the compound represented by general formula (L) may be used independently, it can also be used in combination. There are no particular restrictions on the types of compounds that can be combined, but they are used in appropriate combinations according to desired properties such as solubility at low temperatures, transition temperatures, electrical reliability, and birefringence. The kind of compound to be used is one kind as one embodiment of this embodiment, for example. Alternatively, in another embodiment of the present embodiment, there are 2 types, 3 types, 4 types, 5 types, 6 types, 7 types, 8 types, 9 types, There are more than 10 types.

  In the composition of the present embodiment, the content of the compound represented by the general formula (L) is low temperature solubility, transition temperature, electrical reliability, birefringence, process suitability, dripping marks, image sticking. Therefore, it is necessary to appropriately adjust according to required performance such as dielectric anisotropy.

  The lower limit of the preferable content of the compound represented by the formula (L) with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment is 1% by mass, 10% by mass, 20% by mass, and 30% by mass. %, 40% by mass, 50% by mass, 55% by mass, 60% by mass, 65% by mass, 70% by mass, 75% by mass, 80% by mass is there. The upper limit of the preferable content is 95% by mass, 85% by mass, 75% by mass, 65% by mass, 55% by mass, 45% by mass, and 35% by mass, 25% by mass.

When a composition having a low response speed and a high response speed is required, it is preferable that the lower limit value is high and the upper limit value is high. Moreover, maintaining high T _NI of the compositions of the present embodiment, it is preferable if the temperature stability with good composition is required upper limit higher the lower limit of the above is high. Further, when it is desired to increase the dielectric anisotropy in order to keep the driving voltage low, it is preferable that the above lower limit value is lowered and the upper limit value is low.

When importance is attached to reliability, both R ^L1 and R ^L2 are preferably alkyl groups. When importance is attached to reducing the volatility of the compound, it is preferably an alkoxy group, and importance is placed on lowering viscosity. In this case, at least one is preferably an alkenyl group.

  The number of halogen atoms present in the molecule is preferably 0, 1, 2 or 3, preferably 0 or 1, and 1 is preferred when importance is attached to compatibility with other liquid crystal molecules.

R ^L1 and R ^L2 are a linear alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms or a linear alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms when the ring structure to which R ^L1 is bonded is a phenyl group (aromatic). When the ring structure to which the alkoxy group and the alkenyl group having 4 to 5 carbon atoms are bonded is a saturated ring structure such as cyclohexane, pyran, or dioxane, a straight chain having 1 to 5 carbon atoms is preferable. An alkyl group, a linear alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and a linear alkenyl group having 2 to 5 carbon atoms are preferable. In order to stabilize the nematic phase, the total of carbon atoms and oxygen atoms, if present, is preferably 5 or less, and is preferably linear.

The alkenyl group is preferably selected from groups represented by any one of formulas (R1) to (R5). (The black dot in each formula represents a carbon atom in the ring structure.)

n ^L1 is preferably 0 when importance is attached to the response speed, 2 or 3 is preferred for improving the upper limit temperature of the nematic phase, and 1 is preferred for balancing these. Moreover, in order to satisfy | fill the characteristic calculated | required as a composition, it is preferable to combine the compound of a different value.

A ^L1 , A ^L2, and A ^L3 are preferably aromatic when it is required to increase Δn, and are preferably aliphatic for improving the response speed, and are each independently trans- 1,4-cyclohexylene group, 1,4-phenylene group, 2-fluoro-1,4-phenylene group, 3-fluoro-1,4-phenylene group, 3,5-difluoro-1,4-phenylene group 1,4-cyclohexenylene group, 1,4-bicyclo [2.2.2] octylene group, piperidine-1,4-diyl group, naphthalene-2,6-diyl group, decahydronaphthalene-2,6 -It preferably represents a diyl group or a 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group, more preferably represents the following structure,
More preferably, it represents a trans-1,4-cyclohexylene group or a 1,4-phenylene group.

Z ^L1 and Z ^L2 are preferably single bonds when the response speed is important.
The compound represented by the general formula (L) preferably has 0 or 1 halogen atom in the molecule.

  The compound represented by the general formula (L) is preferably a compound selected from the group of compounds represented by the general formulas (L-3) to (L-8).

The compound represented by general formula (L-3) is the following compound.
(In the formula, R ^L31 and R ^L32 each independently represent the same meaning as R ^L1 and R ^L2 in General Formula (L).)
R ^L31 and R ^L32 are each independently preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 4 to 5 carbon atoms, or an alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.

  Although the compound represented by general formula (L-3) can also be used independently, it can also be used in combination of 2 or more compounds. There are no particular restrictions on the types of compounds that can be combined, but they are used in appropriate combinations according to the required properties such as solubility at low temperatures, transition temperatures, electrical reliability, and birefringence. The kind of compound to be used is, for example, one kind as one embodiment of this embodiment, two kinds, three kinds, four kinds, and five kinds or more.

  The lower limit of the preferable content of the compound represented by the formula (L-3) with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment is 1% by mass, 2% by mass, 3% by mass, 5% by mass, 7% by mass, and 10% by mass. The upper limit of the preferable content is 20% by mass, 15% by mass, 13% by mass, 10% by mass, and 8% by mass with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment. 7% by mass, 6% by mass, 5% by mass, and 3% by mass.

The compound represented by general formula (L-4) is the following compound.
(In the formula, R ^L41 and R ^L42 each independently represent the same meaning as R ^L1 and R ^L2 in General Formula (L).)

R ^L41 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms or an alkenyl group having 2 to 5 carbon atoms, and R ^L42 is an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 4 to 5 carbon atoms, or a carbon atom. The alkoxy group of number 1-4 is preferable.

  Although the compound represented by general formula (L-4) can also be used independently, it can also be used in combination of 2 or more compounds. There are no particular restrictions on the types of compounds that can be combined, but they are used in appropriate combinations according to the required properties such as solubility at low temperatures, transition temperatures, electrical reliability, and birefringence. The kind of compound to be used is, for example, one kind as one embodiment of this embodiment, two kinds, three kinds, four kinds, and five kinds or more.

  In the composition of the present embodiment, the content of the compound represented by the general formula (L-4) is low-temperature solubility, transition temperature, electrical reliability, birefringence index, process suitability, dropping trace. Therefore, it is necessary to adjust appropriately according to required performance such as image sticking and dielectric anisotropy.

  The lower limit of the preferable content of the compound represented by the formula (L-4) with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment is 1% by mass, 2% by mass, 3% by mass, 5% by mass, 7% by mass, 10% by mass, 14% by mass, 16% by mass, 20% by mass, 23% by mass, 26% by mass, 30% by mass %, 35% by mass, and 40% by mass. The upper limit of the preferable content of the compound represented by the formula (L-4) with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment is 50% by mass, 40% by mass, and 35% by mass, 30% by mass, 20% by mass, 15% by mass, 10% by mass, and 5% by mass.

The compound represented by general formula (L-5) is the following compound.
(In the formula, R ^L51 and R ^L52 each independently represent the same meaning as R ^L1 and R ^L2 in General Formula (L).)

R ^L51 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms or an alkenyl group having 2 to 5 carbon atoms, and R ^L52 is an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 4 to 5 carbon atoms, or a carbon atom. The alkoxy group of number 1-4 is preferable.

  Although the compound represented by general formula (L-5) can also be used independently, it can also be used in combination of 2 or more compounds. There are no particular restrictions on the types of compounds that can be combined, but they are used in appropriate combinations according to the required properties such as solubility at low temperatures, transition temperatures, electrical reliability, and birefringence. The kind of compound to be used is, for example, one kind as one embodiment of this embodiment, two kinds, three kinds, four kinds, and five kinds or more.

  In the composition of the present embodiment, the content of the compound represented by the general formula (L-5) includes solubility at low temperature, transition temperature, electrical reliability, birefringence, process suitability, and drop marks. Therefore, it is necessary to adjust appropriately according to required performance such as image sticking and dielectric anisotropy.

  The lower limit of the preferable content of the compound represented by the formula (L-5) with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment is 1% by mass, 2% by mass, 3% by mass, 5% by mass, 7% by mass, 10% by mass, 14% by mass, 16% by mass, 20% by mass, 23% by mass, 26% by mass, 30% by mass %, 35% by mass, and 40% by mass. The upper limit of the preferable content of the compound represented by the formula (L-5) with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment is 50% by mass, 40% by mass, and 35% by mass, 30% by mass, 20% by mass, 15% by mass, 10% by mass, and 5% by mass.

The compound represented by general formula (L-6) is the following compound.
(In the formula, R ^L61 and R ^L62 each independently represent the same meaning as R ^L1 and R ^L2 in the general formula (L), and X ^L61 and X ^L62 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a fluorine atom. )

R ^L61 and R ^L62 are each independently preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms or an alkenyl group having 2 to 5 carbon atoms, and one of X ^L61 and X ^L62 is a fluorine atom and the other is a hydrogen atom. Is preferred.

  Although the compound represented by general formula (L-6) can also be used independently, it can also be used in combination of 2 or more compounds. There are no particular restrictions on the types of compounds that can be combined, but they are used in appropriate combinations according to the required properties such as solubility at low temperatures, transition temperatures, electrical reliability, and birefringence. The kind of compound to be used is, for example, one kind as one embodiment of this embodiment, two kinds, three kinds, four kinds, and five kinds or more.

  The lower limit of the preferable content of the compound represented by the formula (L-6) with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment is 1% by mass, 2% by mass, and 3% by mass, 5% by mass, 7% by mass, 10% by mass, 14% by mass, 16% by mass, 20% by mass, 23% by mass, 26% by mass, 30% by mass %, 35% by mass, and 40% by mass. The upper limit of the preferable content of the compound represented by Formula (L-6) with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment is 50% by mass, 40% by mass, and 35% by mass, 30% by mass, 20% by mass, 15% by mass, 10% by mass, and 5% by mass. When emphasizing to increase Δn, it is preferable to increase the content, and when emphasizing the precipitation at low temperature, it is preferable to decrease the content.

The compound represented by general formula (L-7) is the following compound.
^{(Wherein, R L71} and ^{R L72} each independently represent the same meaning as ^{R L1} and ^{R L2} in Formula ^{(L), A L71} and ^{A L72} is ^{A L2} and in the general formula (L) independently A ^L3 represents the same meaning, but the hydrogen atoms on A ^L71 and A ^L72 may be each independently substituted with a fluorine atom, Z ^L71 represents the same meaning as Z ^L2 in formula (L), X ^L71 and X ^L72 each independently represent a fluorine atom or a hydrogen atom.)

In the formula, R ^L71 and R ^L72 are each independently preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 5 carbon atoms, or an alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and A ^L71 and A ^L72. Are each independently preferably a 1,4-cyclohexylene group or a 1,4-phenylene group, the hydrogen atoms on A ^L71 and A ^L72 may be each independently substituted with a fluorine atom, and Z ^L71 is a single group. A bond or COO- is preferable, a single bond is preferable, and X ^L71 and X ^L72 are preferably a hydrogen atom.

  Although there is no restriction | limiting in particular in the kind of compound which can be combined, It combines according to performance requested | required, such as solubility at low temperature, transition temperature, electrical reliability, birefringence. The kind of the compound to be used is, for example, one kind as one embodiment of this embodiment, two kinds, three kinds, and four kinds.

  In the composition of the present embodiment, the content of the compound represented by the general formula (L-7) is low temperature solubility, transition temperature, electrical reliability, birefringence, process suitability, dripping marks. Therefore, it is necessary to adjust appropriately according to required performance such as image sticking and dielectric anisotropy.

  The lower limit of the preferable content of the compound represented by the formula (L-7) with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment is 1% by mass, 2% by mass, 3% by mass, 5% by mass, 7% by mass, 10% by mass, 14% by mass, 16% by mass, and 20% by mass. The upper limit of the preferable content of the compound represented by Formula (L-7) with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment is 30% by mass, 25% by mass, and 23% by mass, 20% by mass, 18% by mass, 15% by mass, 10% by mass, and 5% by mass.

When an embodiment with a high T _NI is desired for the composition of the present embodiment, it is preferable to increase the content of the compound represented by formula (L-7), and when an embodiment with a low viscosity is desired. It is preferable to reduce the content.

The compound represented by general formula (L-8) is the following compound.
(In the formula, R ^L81 and R ^L82 each independently represent the same meaning as R ^L1 and R ^L2 in General Formula (L), and A ^L81 represents the same meaning or single bond as A ^L1 in General Formula (L)). However, each hydrogen atom on A ^L81 may be independently substituted with a fluorine atom, and X ^{L81 to} X ^L86 each independently represents a fluorine atom or a hydrogen atom.)

^{Wherein, R L81} and ^{R L82} are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group or an alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms 2 to 5 carbon atoms ^{preferably, A L81} is 1, A 4-cyclohexylene group or a 1,4-phenylene group is preferable, and the hydrogen atoms on A ^L71 and A ^L72 may be each independently substituted with a fluorine atom, and the same in general formula (L-8) The number of fluorine atoms in the ring structure is preferably 0 or 1, and the number of fluorine atoms in the molecule is preferably 0 or 1.

  Although there is no restriction | limiting in particular in the kind of compound which can be combined, It combines according to performance requested | required, such as solubility at low temperature, transition temperature, electrical reliability, birefringence. The kind of the compound to be used is, for example, one kind as one embodiment of this embodiment, two kinds, three kinds, and four kinds.

  In the composition of the present embodiment, the content of the compound represented by the general formula (L-8) includes solubility at low temperature, transition temperature, electrical reliability, birefringence, process suitability, and drop marks. Therefore, it is necessary to adjust appropriately according to required performance such as image sticking and dielectric anisotropy.

  The lower limit of the preferable content of the compound represented by the formula (L-8) with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment is 1% by mass, 2% by mass, 3% by mass, 5% by mass, 7% by mass, 10% by mass, 14% by mass, 16% by mass, and 20% by mass. The upper limit of the preferable content of the compound represented by the formula (L-8) with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment is 30% by mass, 25% by mass, and 23% by mass, 20% by mass, 18% by mass, 15% by mass, 10% by mass, and 5% by mass.

When an embodiment with a high T _NI is desired for the composition of the present embodiment, it is preferable to increase the content of the compound represented by formula (L-8), and when an embodiment with a low viscosity is desired. It is preferable to reduce the content.

  Compounds represented by general formula (i), general formula (L), (N-1), (N-2), (N-3) and (J) with respect to the total amount of the composition of the present embodiment The lower limit value of the total preferable content is 80% by mass, 85% by mass, 88% by mass, 90% by mass, 92% by mass, 93% by mass, and 94% by mass 95% by mass 96% by mass 97% by mass 98% by mass 99% by mass 100% by mass The upper limit of preferable content is 100% by mass, 99% by mass, 98% by mass, and 95% by mass. However, from the viewpoint of obtaining a composition having a large absolute value of Δε, any one of the compounds represented by the general formula (N-1), (N-2), (N-3), or (J) is 0. It is preferable that it is mass%.

  The composition of the present embodiment preferably does not contain a compound having a structure in which oxygen atoms such as a peracid (—CO—OO—) structure are bonded in the molecule.

  When emphasizing the reliability and long-term stability of the composition, the content of the compound having a carbonyl group is preferably 5% by mass or less, preferably 3% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the composition. Is more preferable, and it is still more preferable to set it as 1 mass% or less, and it is most preferable not to contain substantially.

  When importance is attached to stability by UV irradiation, the content of the compound substituted with chlorine atoms is preferably 15% by mass or less, and preferably 10% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the composition. 8% by mass or less, preferably 5% by mass or less, more preferably 3% by mass or less, and still more preferably substantially not contained.

  It is preferable to increase the content of a compound in which all the ring structures in the molecule are 6-membered rings, and the content of the compound in which all the ring structures in the molecule are 6-membered rings is 80% relative to the total mass of the composition. It is preferably at least 90% by mass, more preferably at least 90% by mass, even more preferably at least 95% by mass, and it is composed of only a compound having substantially all 6-membered ring structures in the molecule. Most preferably it constitutes a product.

  In order to suppress deterioration due to oxidation of the composition, it is preferable to reduce the content of the compound having a cyclohexenylene group as a ring structure, and the content of the compound having a cyclohexenylene group as the total mass of the composition. On the other hand, it is preferably 10% by mass or less, preferably 8% by mass or less, more preferably 5% by mass or less, and preferably 3% by mass or less, and substantially not contained. Further preferred.

When emphasizing improvements of improvement and T _NI viscosity, that a hydrogen atom to reduce the content of the compound having the optionally substituted 2-methyl-1,4-diyl group halogen in the molecule Is preferable, and the content of the compound having the 2-methylbenzene-1,4-diyl group in the molecule is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 8% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the composition. It is preferably 5% by mass or less, more preferably 3% by mass or less, and still more preferably substantially not contained.

  In the present application, the phrase “not substantially contained” means that the substance is not contained except for an unintentionally contained substance.

  When the compound contained in the composition of the first embodiment of the present embodiment has an alkenyl group as a side chain, when the alkenyl group is bonded to cyclohexane, the alkenyl group has 2 to 2 carbon atoms. Preferably, when the alkenyl group is bonded to benzene, the alkenyl group preferably has 4 to 5 carbon atoms, and the unsaturated bond of the alkenyl group and benzene are directly bonded. Preferably not.

The composition of the present embodiment can contain a polymerizable compound in order to produce a liquid crystal display element such as a PS mode, a lateral electric field type PSA mode, or a lateral electric field type PSVA mode. Examples of the polymerizable compound that can be used include a photopolymerizable monomer that undergoes polymerization by energy rays such as light. The structure has a liquid crystal skeleton in which a plurality of six-membered rings such as biphenyl derivatives and terphenyl derivatives are connected Examples thereof include a polymerizable compound. More specifically, the general formula (XX)

(Wherein, X ²⁰¹ and X ²⁰² each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a methyl group,
Sp ²⁰¹ and Sp ²⁰² are each independently a single bond, an alkylene group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, or —O— (CH ₂ ) _s — (wherein _s represents an integer of 2 to 7, Preferably bonded to an aromatic ring)
Z ²⁰¹ represents —OCH ₂ —, —CH ₂ O—, —COO—, —OCO—, —CF ₂ O—, —OCF ₂ —, —CH ₂ CH ₂ —, —CF ₂ CF ₂ —, —CH═. CH—COO—, —CH═CH—OCO—, —COO—CH═CH—, —OCO—CH═CH—, —COO—CH ₂ CH ₂ —, —OCO—CH ₂ CH ₂ —, —CH ₂ CH ₂ —COO—, —CH ₂ CH ₂ —OCO—, —COO—CH ₂ —, —OCO—CH ₂ —, —CH ₂ —COO—, —CH ₂ —OCO—, —CY ¹ ═CY ² — (Wherein Y ¹ and Y ² each independently represents a fluorine atom or a hydrogen atom), —C≡C— or a single bond;
L ²⁰¹ and L ²⁰² are each independently a fluorine atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, or an alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms,
M ²⁰¹ represents a 1,4-phenylene group, a trans-1,4-cyclohexylene group or a single bond, and all of the 1,4-phenylene groups in the formula have an arbitrary hydrogen atom as a fluorine atom and a carbon atom number of 1 It may be substituted by an alkyl group of ˜8 or an alkoxy group of 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and n201 and n202 are each independently an integer of 0-4. ) Is preferred.

X ²⁰¹ and X ²⁰² are each preferably a diacrylate derivative that represents a hydrogen atom, or a dimethacrylate derivative that has a methyl group, and a compound in which one represents a hydrogen atom and the other represents a methyl group. As for the polymerization rate of these compounds, diacrylate derivatives are the fastest, dimethacrylate derivatives are slow, asymmetric compounds are in the middle, and a preferred embodiment can be used depending on the application. In the PSA display element, a dimethacrylate derivative is particularly preferable.

Sp ²⁰¹ and Sp ²⁰² each independently represent a single bond, an alkylene group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, or —O— (CH ₂ ) _s —, but in the PSA display element, at least one is a single bond. A compound in which both represent a single bond or one represents a single bond and the other represents an alkylene group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms or —O— (CH ₂ ) _s — is preferable. In this case, the alkyl group of 1-4 is preferable, and 1-4 is preferable for s.

Z ²⁰¹ represents —OCH ₂ —, —CH ₂ O—, —COO—, —OCO—, —CF ₂ O—, —OCF ₂ —, —CH ₂ CH ₂ —, —CF ₂ CF ₂ — or a single bond. Are preferred, —COO—, —OCO— or a single bond is more preferred, and a single bond is particularly preferred.

M ²⁰¹ represents a 1,4-phenylene group, a trans-1,4-cyclohexylene group or a single bond in which any hydrogen atom may be substituted by a fluorine atom, but the 1,4-phenylene group or the single bond is preferable. When C represents a ring structure other than a single bond, Z ²⁰¹ is preferably a linking group other than a single bond. When M ²⁰¹ is a single bond, Z ²⁰¹ is preferably a single bond.

From these points, in general formula (XX), the ring structure between Sp ²⁰¹ and Sp ²⁰² is specifically preferably the structure described below.

In the general formula (XX), when M ²⁰¹ represents a single bond and the ring structure is formed of two rings, it is preferable to represent the following formulas (XXa-1) to (XXa-5), It is more preferable to represent the formula (XXa-3) from (XXa-1), and it is particularly preferable to represent the formula (XXa-1).
(In the formula, both ends shall be bonded to Sp ²⁰¹ or Sp ^202. )

  The polymerizable compounds containing these skeletons are optimal for PSA-type liquid crystal display elements because of the alignment regulating power after polymerization, and a good alignment state can be obtained, so that display unevenness is suppressed or does not occur at all.

From the above, as the polymerizable monomer, general formula (XX-1) to general formula (XX-4) are particularly preferable, and among them, general formula (XX-2) is most preferable.
(In the formula, benzene may be substituted with a fluorine atom, and Sp ²⁰ represents an alkylene group having 2 to 5 carbon atoms.)

  When the polymerizable compound is contained in the composition of the present embodiment, the content is preferably 0.01% by mass to 5% by mass, more preferably 0.05% by mass to 3% by mass, and 0 It is preferable that it is 1 mass%-2 mass%.

  When a monomer is added to the composition of the present embodiment, the polymerization proceeds even when no polymerization initiator is present, but a polymerization initiator may be contained in order to accelerate the polymerization. Examples of the polymerization initiator include benzoin ethers, benzophenones, acetophenones, benzyl ketals, acylphosphine oxides, and the like.

  The liquid crystal display element of the present embodiment may have the alignment layers 4 and 6 as described above, but in the liquid crystal composition constituting the liquid crystal layer according to the present embodiment without providing the alignment layer. Incorporating a spontaneous alignment agent, the liquid crystal is self-supported without an alignment film, or is aligned using a solvent-soluble alignment polyimide, or the liquid crystal is aligned by a photo-alignment film, especially a non-polyimide-based photo-alignment film It is preferable that the liquid crystal display element is easily manufactured.

  The liquid crystal composition according to this embodiment preferably contains a spontaneous alignment agent. The spontaneous alignment agent can control the alignment direction of the liquid crystal molecules contained in the liquid crystal composition constituting the liquid crystal layer. It is considered that the alignment direction of the liquid crystal molecules can be controlled by accumulating or adsorbing the components of the spontaneous alignment agent at the interface of the liquid crystal layer. Thereby, when a spontaneous alignment agent is included in the liquid crystal composition, the alignment layer of the liquid crystal panel can be eliminated.

  The content of the spontaneous alignment agent in the liquid crystal composition according to this embodiment is preferably 0.1 to 10% by mass in the whole liquid crystal composition. Further, the spontaneous alignment agent in the liquid crystal composition according to the present embodiment may be used in combination with the polymerizable compound.

The spontaneous alignment agent is preferably the following general formula (al-1) and / or general formula (al-2).
(In the formula, ^Ral1 , ^Ral2 , ^Zal1 , ^Zal2 , ^Lal1 , ^Lal2 , ^Lal3 , ^Spal1 , ^Spal2 , ^Spal3 , ^Xal1 , ^Xal2 , ^Xal3 , ^mal1 , ^{mal2 al3} , ^nal1 , ^nal2 , ^nal3 , ^pal1 and ^pal2 are each independently of each other,

^Ral1 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen, a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, wherein in the alkyl group, one or two or more non-adjacent CH ₂ The group is substituted by —O—, —S—, —CO—, —CO—O—, —O—CO—, —O—CO—O— so that the O and / or S atoms are not directly bonded to each other. In addition, one or more hydrogen atoms may be replaced by F or Cl.
R ^al2 represents a group having any of the following partial structures:

^Spal1 , ^Spal2 and ^Spal3 each independently represent an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms or a single bond,
^Xal1 , ^Xal2 and ^Xal3 each independently represent an alkyl group, an acrylic group, a methacryl group or a vinyl group,
^Zal1 is —O—, —S—, ^—CO— , ^—CO—O— , ^—OCO— , —O—CO—O—, —OCH ₂ —, —CH ₂ O—, —SCH ₂ —, _{-CH 2 S -, - CF 2} O -, - OCF 2 -, - CF 2 S -, - SCF 2 -, - (CH 2) n al -, - CF 2 CH 2 -, - CH 2 CF 2 - , — (CF ₂ ) _n ^al —, ^{—CH═CH—, —CF═CF—, —C≡C—, —CH═CH— COO—, —OCO— CH═CH—} , — (CR ^al3 R ^{al4 _{) n a1 -, - CH (}} -Sp al1 -X al1) -, - CH 2 CH (-Sp al1 -X al1) -, - CH (-Sp al1 -X al1) CH (-Sp al1 -X al1) −
Z ^al2 are each independently of one another, a single bond, -O -, - S -, - CO -, - CO-O -, - OCO -, - OCO-O -, - OCH 2 -, - CH 2 _{O -, - SCH 2 -,} - CH 2 S -, - CF 2 O -, - OCF 2 -, - CF 2 S -, - SCF 2 -, - (CH 2) n1 -, - CF 2 CH 2 - , —CH ₂ CF ₂ —, — (CF ₂ ) _n ^al —, —CH═CH—, —CF═CF—, —C≡C—, —CH═CH—COO—, —OCO—CH═CH— _{^{, - (CR al3 R al4)}} na1 -, - CH (-Sp al1 -X al1) -, - CH 2 CH (-Sp al1 -X al1) -, - CH (-Sp al1 -X al1) CH (- ^{Spal1 -Xal1} )-
^{L al1,} L al2, L al3 are each independently of one another, a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine _{atom, -CN, -NO 2, -NCO,} -NCS, -OCN, -SCN, - C (= O) N ( ^Ral3 ) ₂ , -C (= O) ^Ral3 , an optionally substituted silyl group having 3 to 15 carbon atoms, an optionally substituted aryl group or cycloalkyl group or Represents 1 to 25 carbon atoms, wherein one or more hydrogen atoms may be replaced by halogen atoms (fluorine atoms, chlorine atoms),
The R ^al3 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, the R ^al4 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, and the n ^al is 1 to 4 Represents an integer,
^pal1 and ^pal2 each independently represent 0 or 1, ^mal1 , ^mal2 and ^mal3 each independently represent an integer of 0 to 3, and ^nal1 , ^nal2 and ^nal3 are Each independently represents an integer of 0 to 3. )

General formula (Al-2):

^Wherein Z ⁱ¹ and Z ⁱ² are each independently a single bond, —CH═CH—, —CF═CF—, —C≡C—, —COO—, —OCO—, —OCOO—, —OOCO. _{-, - CF 2 O -,} - OCF 2 -, - CH = CHCOO -, - OCOCH = CH -, - CH 2 -CH 2 COO -, - OCOCH 2 -CH 2 -, - CH = C (CH 3) _{COO -, - OCOC (CH 3} ) = CH -, - CH 2 -CH (CH 3) COO -, - OCOCH (CH 3) -CH 2 -, - OCH 2 CH 2 O-, or number of carbon atoms 2 20 represents an alkylene group, and one or two or more non-adjacent —CH ₂ — in the alkylene group may be substituted with —O—, —COO— or —OCO—, provided that Ki ¹ is (K If -11) at least -CH ₂ mesogenic groups _{CH 2 COO -, - OCOCH 2} -CH 2 -, - CH = C (CH 3) COO -, - OCOC (CH 3) = CH -, - CH 2 -CH (CH 3) COO -, - OCOCH (CH ₃ ) including any one of —CH ₂ — and —OCH ₂ CH ₂ O—,
A ^AL21 and Aa ¹²² each independently represents a divalent 6-membered ring aromatic group or a divalent 6-membered ring aliphatic group, a divalent unsubstituted 6-membered ring aromatic group, a divalent An unsubstituted 6-membered cycloaliphatic group or a hydrogen atom in these ring structures is unsubstituted or substituted with an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or a halogen atom. It is preferable that a divalent unsubstituted 6-membered aromatic group, a group in which a hydrogen atom in the ring structure is substituted with a fluorine atom, or a divalent unsubstituted 6-membered cyclic aliphatic group Preferably, the hydrogen atom on the substituent is preferably a 1,4-phenylene group, a 2,6-naphthalene group or a 1,4-cyclohexyl group, which may be substituted by a halogen atom, an alkyl group or an alkoxy group, one of the substituents is ^P i1 ^{-Sp i1} In has been replaced,
If Z ^{i1, A AL21} and ^{Aa 122} is present in plural may each also being the same or different,
Sp ⁱ¹ preferably represents a linear alkylene group or a single bond having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, more preferably represents a linear alkylene group or a single bond having 2 to 15 carbon atoms, and more preferably a carbon atom. Represents a linear alkylene group of a number 3 to 12 or a single bond,
^Ral21 represents a hydrogen atom, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a halogenated alkyl group, or P ⁱ¹ —Sp ⁱ¹ —, and —CH ₂ — in the alkyl group represents —O -, -OCO-, or -COO- is preferable (however, -O- is not continuous), more preferably a hydrogen atom, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, or P ^i1-. Sp ⁱ¹ — represents —CH ₂ — in the alkyl group represents —O— or —OCO— (wherein —O— is not continuous).

K ⁱ¹ represents a substituent represented by the following general formula (K-1) to general formula (K-11),
P ⁱ¹ represents a polymerizable group, and represents a substituent selected from the group represented by the following formulas (P-1) to (P-15) (in the formula, the black dot on the right end represents a bond). To express.),
When there are a plurality of Z ⁱ¹ , Z ⁱ² , A ^al21 , ^miii1 and / or ^Aal22 , they may be the same or different from each other, provided that at least one of A ⁱ¹ and A ⁱ² is at least When substituted with one P ⁱ¹ -Sp ⁱ¹ — and K ⁱ¹ is (K-11), Z ⁱⁱ¹ is at least —CH ₂ —CH ₂ COO—, —OCOCH ₂ —CH ₂ —, —CH _2. Including —CH (CH ₃ ) COO—, —OCOCH (CH ₃ ) —CH ₂ —, —OCH ₂ CH ₂ O—,
m ⁱⁱⁱ¹ represents an integer of 1 to 5,
m ⁱⁱⁱ² represents an integer of 1 to 5,
G ⁱ¹ represents a divalent, trivalent or tetravalent branched structure, or a divalent, trivalent or tetravalent aliphatic or aromatic ring structure;
m ⁱⁱⁱ³ represents an integer smaller than the valence of G ⁱ¹ . )
In addition, as a means for eliminating the alignment layer of the liquid crystal panel, when the liquid crystal composition containing the polymerizable compound is filled between the first substrate and the second substrate, the crystal composition is filled in a state of Tni or higher. And a method of curing the polymerizable compound by irradiating the liquid crystal composition containing the polymerizable compound with UV.

The composition in the present embodiment can further contain a compound represented by the general formula (Q).
(Wherein, R ^Q represents a straight-chain alkyl group or branched alkyl group having from 1 22 carbon atoms, one or two or more CH ₂ groups in the alkyl group, so that the oxygen atoms are not directly adjacent a, -O -, - CH = CH -, - CO -, - OCO -, - COO -, - C≡C -, - CF 2 O -, - OCF 2 - may be replaced by, ^{M Q} is trans -1,4-cyclohexylene group, 1,4-phenylene group or a single bond is represented.)
R ^Q represents a linear alkyl group having 1 to 22 carbon atoms or a branched alkyl group, and one or two or more CH ₂ groups in the alkyl group are —O—so that the oxygen atom is not directly adjacent to each other. -, - CH = CH -, - CO -, - OCO -, - COO -, - C≡C -, - CF 2 O -, - OCF 2 - may be substituted with, but 1 to 10 carbon atoms Linear alkyl group, linear alkoxy group, linear alkyl group in which one CH ₂ group is substituted by —OCO— or —COO—, branched alkyl group, branched alkoxy group, one CH ₂ group is —OCO— Or a branched alkyl group substituted with —COO—, a linear alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a linear alkyl group in which one CH ₂ group is substituted with —OCO— or —COO—, branched Chain alkyl group, branched alkoxy group, one CH ₂ group Is more preferably a branched alkyl group substituted with —OCO— or —COO—. ^MQ represents a trans-1,4-cyclohexylene group, a 1,4-phenylene group or a single bond, and a trans-1,4-cyclohexylene group or a 1,4-phenylene group is preferable.

More specifically, the compound represented by the general formula (Q) is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (Qa) to general formula (Qd).

In the formula, R ^Q1 is preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, R ^Q2 is preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and R ^Q3 is A straight-chain alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, a branched-chain alkyl group, a straight-chain alkoxy group or a branched-chain alkoxy group is preferred, and L ^Q is preferably a straight-chain alkylene group or branched-chain alkylene group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms. . Of the compounds represented by general formula (Qa) to general formula (Qd), compounds represented by general formula (Qc) and general formula (Qd) are more preferable.

  In the composition of this embodiment, it is preferable to contain 1 type or 2 types of compounds represented by general formula (Q), it is more preferable to contain 1 type to 5 types, and the content is 0.001. Is preferably 1 to 1% by mass, more preferably 0.001 to 0.1% by mass, and particularly preferably 0.001 to 0.05% by mass.

  In the composition containing the polymerizable compound of the present embodiment, the polymerizable compound contained therein is polymerized by ultraviolet irradiation so that liquid crystal alignment ability is imparted, and the amount of transmitted light is increased by utilizing the birefringence of the composition. Used for controlling liquid crystal display elements.

  In the case where the liquid crystal composition of the present embodiment contains a polymerizable compound, an appropriate polymerization rate is desirable as a method for polymerizing the polymerizable compound in order to obtain good alignment performance of the liquid crystal. A method of polymerizing by irradiating active energy rays such as single or combined or sequentially. When ultraviolet rays are used, a polarized light source or a non-polarized light source may be used. Further, when the polymerization is carried out in a state where the polymerizable compound-containing composition is sandwiched between two substrates, at least the substrate on the irradiated surface side must be given adequate transparency to the active energy rays. Don't be. Moreover, after polymerizing only a specific part using a mask during light irradiation, the orientation state of the unpolymerized part is changed by changing conditions such as an electric field, a magnetic field, or temperature, and further irradiation with active energy rays is performed. Then, it is possible to use a means for polymerization. In particular, when ultraviolet exposure is performed, it is preferable to perform ultraviolet exposure while applying an alternating electric field to the polymerizable compound-containing composition. The alternating electric field to be applied is preferably an alternating current having a frequency of 10 Hz to 10 kHz, more preferably a frequency of 60 Hz to 10 kHz, and the voltage is selected depending on a desired pretilt angle of the liquid crystal display element. That is, the pretilt angle of the liquid crystal display element can be controlled by the applied voltage. In a horizontal electric field type MVA mode liquid crystal display element, the pretilt angle is preferably controlled from 80 degrees to 89.9 degrees from the viewpoint of alignment stability and contrast.

The temperature during irradiation is preferably within a temperature range in which the liquid crystal state of the composition of the present embodiment is maintained. Polymerization is preferably performed at a temperature close to room temperature, that is, typically at a temperature of 15 to 35 ° C. As a lamp for generating ultraviolet rays, a metal halide lamp, a high-pressure mercury lamp, an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp, or the like can be used. Moreover, as a wavelength of the ultraviolet rays to irradiate, it is preferable to irradiate ultraviolet rays in a wavelength region other than the absorption wavelength region of the composition, and it is preferable to cut and use the ultraviolet rays as necessary. Intensity of ultraviolet irradiation is preferably from ^{0.1mW / cm2~100W / cm 2, 2mW} / cm 2 ~50W / cm 2 is more preferable. The amount of energy of ultraviolet rays to be irradiated can be adjusted as appropriate, but is preferably 10 mJ / cm 2 to 500 J / cm 2, and more preferably 100 mJ / cm 2 to 200 J / cm 2. When irradiating with ultraviolet rays, the intensity may be changed. The time for irradiating with ultraviolet rays is appropriately selected depending on the intensity of the irradiated ultraviolet rays, but is preferably from 10 seconds to 3600 seconds, and more preferably from 10 seconds to 600 seconds.

  In the preferred liquid crystal display element of the present embodiment, the liquid crystal molecules of the liquid crystal layer 5 are aligned on the surface in contact with the liquid crystal composition between the first substrate and the second substrate. May be provided. In a liquid crystal display element that requires an alignment layer, it is disposed between the light conversion layer and the liquid crystal layer. Even if the alignment layer is thick, the light emitting property that constitutes the light conversion layer is as thin as 100 nm or less. It does not completely block the interaction between the dye such as nanocrystal particles and pigment and the liquid crystal compound constituting the liquid crystal layer.

  In a liquid crystal display element that does not use an alignment layer, the interaction between the light-emitting nanocrystal particles constituting the light conversion layer, the pigment such as a pigment, and the liquid crystal compound constituting the liquid crystal layer is further increased.

  The alignment layer according to this embodiment is preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of a rubbing alignment layer and a photo alignment layer. In the case of a rubbing alignment layer, there is no particular limitation, and a known polyimide-based alignment layer can be suitably used.

  As the rubbing alignment layer material, transparent organic materials such as polyimide, polyamide, BCB (Penzocyclobutene Polymer), polyvinyl alcohol and the like can be used. In particular, p-phenylenediamine, 4,4′-diaminodiphenyl. Aliphatic or alicyclic tetracarboxylic acid anhydride such as diamine such as aliphatic or alicyclic diamine such as methane, butanetetracarboxylic acid anhydride, 2,3,5-tricarboxycyclopentylacetic acid anhydride, pyromellitic acid A polyimide alignment layer obtained by imidizing a polyamic acid synthesized from an aromatic tetracarboxylic anhydride such as dianhydride is preferable. When used for a vertical alignment layer or the like, it can also be used without imparting alignment.

  In the case where the alignment layer according to the present embodiment is a photo-alignment layer, it is sufficient if it includes at least one photoresponsive molecule. The photoresponsive molecule is a photoresponsive dimerization-type molecule that forms a cross-linked structure by dimerization in response to light, a photoresponsiveness that isomerizes in response to light and is oriented substantially perpendicular or parallel to the polarization axis. At least one selected from the group consisting of an isomerized molecule and a photoresponsive decomposable polymer in which a polymer chain is cleaved in response to light is preferred, and the photoresponsive isomerized molecule is sensitive and orientation-regulating. This is particularly preferable.

  Another embodiment of the image display element includes a pair of electrode substrates provided with a first electrode substrate and a second electrode substrate facing each other, an electroluminescence layer provided between the first electrode and the second electrode, The light conversion layer that converts the light emitted from the electroluminescence layer having a blue emission spectrum into a different wavelength, the first electrode or the second electrode, and the light conversion layer. It is an organic EL display element (OLED) which has the wavelength selective transmission layer provided in the.

  FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view showing an embodiment of an image display element (OLED). An image display element (OLED) 1000C according to an embodiment includes a first electrode 52 and a second electrode 58 as a pair of opposing electrodes, and includes an electroluminescence layer 500 between the electrodes. On the surface opposite to the electroluminescence layer 500, a wavelength selective transmission layer 8A (8) and a light conversion layer 9A (9) are provided in this order from the electroluminescence layer 500 side.

  The electroluminescent layer 500 only needs to include at least the light emitting layer 55, and more preferably includes the electron transport layer 56, the light emitting layer 55, the hole transport layer 54, and the hole injection layer 53. The electroluminescence layer 512 preferably includes an electron injection layer 57, an electron transport layer 56, a light emitting layer 55, a hole transport layer 54, and a hole injection layer 53. An electron blocking layer (not shown) may be provided between the light emitting layer 55 and the hole transport layer 54 in order to increase the external quantum efficiency and improve the light emission intensity. Similarly, a hole blocking layer (not shown) may be provided between the light emitting layer 55 and the electron transport layer 56 in order to increase the external quantum efficiency and improve the light emission intensity.

  In the image display element (OLED) 1000C, the electroluminescence layer 500 has a hole injection layer 53 in contact with the first electrode 52, and the hole transport layer 54, the light emitting layer 55, and the electron transport layer 56 are sequentially stacked. Have

  In the present embodiment, the first electrode 52 is used as an anode and the second electrode 58 is used as a cathode for the sake of convenience. However, the configuration of the image display element (LED panel) 1000C is not limited to this, and the first electrode 52 may be a cathode, the second electrode 58 may be an anode, and the stacking order between these electrodes may be reversed. In other words, from the second electrode 58 on the anode side, the hole injection layer 53, the hole transport layer 54, the electron blocking layer provided if necessary, the light emitting layer 55, the hole blocking layer provided if necessary, the electron transport layer 56, and The electron injection layer 57 may be stacked in this order.

  The light conversion layer 9A (9) and the wavelength selective transmission layer 8A (8) may be the same as the light conversion layer 9 and the wavelength selective transmission layer 8 in the above-described liquid crystal display element, respectively. This embodiment is characterized in that such a light conversion layer 9A (9) and a wavelength-selective transmission layer 8A (8) are used as substitute members for a color filter.

  In this embodiment, when light having a main peak near 450 nm (light having a blue emission spectrum) is emitted by the electroluminescence layer 500, the light conversion layer 9A (9) uses the blue light as blue. be able to. Therefore, when the light emitted from the electroluminescence layer 500 as a light source is blue light, among the light conversion pixel layers (NC-Red, NC-Green, NC-Blue) of the respective colors, FIG. 21 shows. As described above, the light conversion pixel layer (NC-Blue) may be omitted, and the backlight of blue may be used as it is. In this case, the color layer displaying blue can be constituted by a transparent material or a color material layer (so-called blue color filter) (CF-Blue) containing a blue color material.

  The red color layer R, the green color layer G, and the blue color layer B may include a color material as necessary. The layer (NCL) containing the nanocrystal NC for light emission may contain a color material corresponding to each color.

  From the above, in the image display element 1000C shown in FIG. 21, when a voltage is applied between the first electrode 52 and the second electrode 58, electrons are injected from the second electrode 58 serving as the cathode into the electroluminescence layer 500, From the first electrode 52 that is the anode, a current flows as holes are injected into the electroluminescence layer 500. The injected electrons and holes recombine to form excitons. Accordingly, the light emitting material included in the light emitting layer 55 is excited, and light emission is obtained from the light emitting material.

  Thereafter, the light emitted from the light emitting layer 55 passes through the electron transport layer 56, the electron injection layer 57, and the second electrode 58, and the light selected in the specific wavelength region by the wavelength selective transmission layer 8A (8). Incident in the plane of the light conversion layer 9A (9). The light incident on the light conversion layer 9A (9) is absorbed by the luminescent nanocrystal particles and converted into an emission spectrum into one of red (R), green (G), and blue (B). , Red (R), green (G), or blue (B). In addition, the light conversion layer 9A (9) is adjacent to the wavelength selective transmission layer 8A (8), and light other than the specific wavelength region to be transmitted is reflected. It can be focused in one direction.

  Note that the electroluminescent layer 500 is used for the purpose of lowering the potential barrier of hole or electron injection, the purpose of increasing the transportability of holes or electrons, the purpose of hindering the transportability of holes or electrons, or the quenching phenomenon caused by electrodes. For the purpose of suppressing / preventing, a single layer or a plurality of layers may be formed as necessary to exhibit various effects.

  An overcoat layer 59 may be provided as a protective film so as to cover the light conversion layer 9A (9) and the wavelength selective transmission layer 8A (8). If necessary, a substrate such as glass is provided on the overcoat layer 59. 60 may be bonded over the entire surface. At this time, a known adhesive layer (for example, thermosetting or ultraviolet curable resin) may be provided between the overcoat layer 59 and the substrate 60 as necessary. When the light emitting element is a top emission type in which light is displayed from the substrate 60, the overcoat layer 59 and the substrate 60 are preferably made of a transparent material. On the other hand, in the case of the bottom emission type, the overcoat layer 59 and the substrate 51 are not particularly limited.

  In FIG. 21, the form which has formed the 1st electrode 52 on the board | substrate 51 is shown, and the said board | substrate is the 1st electrode 52, the electroluminescent layer 500, the 2nd electrode 58, 9 A (9) of light conversion layers, and It is a support body which supports the laminated body containing wavelength selective transmission layer 8A (8), A well-known thing can be used.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 21, the electroluminescence light is light from an organic EL, but in another embodiment, the electroluminescence light may be light derived from luminescent nanocrystal particles. In this case, the image display element Is also called QLED. In this case, the configuration of the electroluminescence layer may be a known configuration capable of emitting electroluminescence light derived from the luminescent nanocrystal particles.

  Hereinafter, although an example is given and the present invention is explained still in full detail, the present invention is not limited by these. The following abbreviations are used for the description of compounds in the examples. Note that n represents a natural number.

(Side chain)
-N -C _n H _{2n + 1} linear alkyl group with n carbon atoms _n -C _n H _{2n + 1} -linear alkyl group with n carbon atoms -On -OC _n H _{2n + 1} linear chain with n carbon atoms Jo alkoxyl group nO- C _n H _2n + 1 O- carbon atoms n linear alkoxyl group -V -CH = CH ₂
V- CH ₂ = CH-
-V1 -CH = CH-CH ₃
1V- CH ₃ -CH = CH-
_{-2V -CH 2 -CH 2 -CH = CH} 3
_{V2- CH 2 = CH-CH 2} -CH 2 -
_{-2V1 -CH 2 -CH 2 -CH = CH} -CH 3
_{1V2- CH 3 -CH = CH-CH} 2 -CH 2
(Linking group)
-N- -C _n H _2n-
-NO- -C _n H _2n -O-
-On- _{-O-C n H 2n} -
-COO- -C (= O) -O-
-OCO- -O-C (= O)-
-CF2O- -CF ₂ -O-
-OCF2- -O-CF ₂ -
(Ring structure)

In the examples, the measured characteristics are as follows.
T _NI : Nematic phase-isotropic liquid phase transition temperature (° C.)
Δn: Refractive index anisotropy at 20 ° C. Δε: Dielectric anisotropy at 20 ° C. η: Viscosity at 20 ° C. (mPa · s)
γ ₁ : rotational viscosity at 20 ° C. (mPa · s)
K ₁₁ : elastic constant K ₁₁ (pN) at 20 ° C.
K ₃₃ : Elastic constant at 20 ° C. K ₃₃ (pN)
K _AVG : Average value of K ₁₁ and K ₃₃ (K _AVG = (K ₁₁ + K ₃₃ ) / 2) (pN)

VHR measurement (voltage holding ratio (%) at 333K under conditions of frequency 60Hz and applied voltage 1V)
LED light resistance test with main emission peak at 450 nm:
VHR before and after exposure for 1 week with a visible light LED light source having a main emission peak at 450 nm of 20,000 cd / m ² was measured.
LED light resistance test with main emission peak at 385 nm:
The VHR before and after irradiation with 130 J for 60 seconds was measured with a monochromatic LED having a peak at 385 nm.

<Production of light conversion film>
"Production of luminescent nanocrystal particles"
The operation for producing the following luminescent nanocrystal particles and the operation for producing the ink were carried out in a glove box filled with nitrogen or in a flask under a nitrogen stream with the atmosphere shut off.
In addition, all the raw materials exemplified below were used by previously replacing the atmosphere in the container with nitrogen gas by introducing nitrogen gas into the container. As for the liquid material, nitrogen gas was introduced into the liquid and dissolved oxygen was replaced with nitrogen gas. Titanium oxide was heated at 120 ° C. under reduced pressure of 1 mmHg for 2 hours and allowed to cool in a nitrogen gas atmosphere before use.
In addition, the organic solvent and the liquid material used below were dehydrated and dried for 48 hours or more by adding 1 g of Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd. Molecular Sieve 3A in a nitrogen atmosphere at a rate of 10 g.

[Production of red light-emitting nanocrystal particles]
A 1000 ml flask was charged with 17.48 g of indium acetate, 25.0 g of trioctylphosphine oxide, and 35.98 g of lauric acid, and stirred at 160 ° C. for 40 minutes while bubbling with nitrogen gas. The mixture was further stirred at 250 ° C. for 20 minutes and then heated to 300 ° C. to continue stirring. In a glove box, 4.0 g of tris (trimethylsilyl) phosphine was dissolved in 15.0 g of trioctylphosphine and then filled into a glass syringe. This was poured into the flask heated to 300 ° C. and reacted at 250 ° C. for 10 minutes. Further, 5 ml of a mixed solution in which 7.5 g of tris (trimethylsilyl) phosphine was dissolved in 30.0 g of trioctylphosphine was dropped into the above reaction solution over 12 minutes in the glove box, and then 5 ml of the reaction solution at 15 minute intervals until it was used up. Added to.
In a separate three-necked flask, 5.595 g of indium acetate, 10.0 g of trioctylphosphine oxide, and 11.515 g of lauric acid were charged and stirred at 160 ° C. for 40 minutes while bubbling with nitrogen gas. The mixture was further stirred at 250 ° C. for 20 minutes and heated to 300 ° C., and then the mixed solution cooled to 70 ° C. was added to the reaction solution. In a glove box, 5 ml of a mixed solution in which 4.0 g of tris (trimethylsilyl) phosphine was dissolved in 15.0 g of trioctylphosphine was dropped again into the above reaction solution over 12 minutes, and then 5 ml was reacted at 15 minute intervals until used up. Added to the solution. After stirring for 1 hour and cooling to room temperature, 100 ml of toluene and 400 ml of ethanol were added to aggregate the fine particles. After precipitating fine particles using a centrifuge, the supernatant is discarded, and the precipitated fine particles are dissolved in trioctylphosphine to obtain a trioctylphosphine solution of indium phosphide (InP) red light emitting nanocrystalline particles. It was.

[Production of green light-emitting nanocrystal particles]
A 1000 ml flask was charged with 23.3 g of indium acetate, 40.0 g of trioctylphosphine oxide, and 48.0 g of lauric acid, and stirred at 160 ° C. for 40 minutes while bubbling with nitrogen gas. The mixture was further stirred at 250 ° C. for 20 minutes and then heated to 300 ° C. to continue stirring. In a glove box, 10.0 g of tris (trimethylsilyl) phosphine was dissolved in 30.0 g of trioctylphosphine and then filled into a glass syringe. This was poured into the flask heated to 300 ° C. and reacted at 250 ° C. for 5 minutes. The flask was cooled to room temperature, and 100 ml of toluene and 400 ml of ethanol were added to aggregate the fine particles. After precipitating fine particles using a centrifuge, the supernatant is discarded, and the precipitated fine particles are dissolved in trioctylphosphine to obtain a trioctylphosphine solution of indium phosphide (InP) green light-emitting nanocrystal particles. It was.

[Production of InP / ZnS core-shell nanocrystals]
After adjusting to 3.6 g of InP and 90 g of trioctylphosphine in the trioctylphosphine solution of the indium phosphide (InP) red-emitting nanocrystal particles synthesized above, the mixture was put into a 1000 ml flask, and further 90 g of trioctylphosphine oxide. Add 30 g of lauric acid. On the other hand, a stock solution was prepared by mixing 162 g of trioctylphosphine with 42.9 ml of 1M hexane solution of diethylzinc and 92.49 g of a 9.09 wt% solution of bistrimethylsilyl sulfide in a glove box. After replacing the inside of the flask with a nitrogen atmosphere, the temperature of the flask was set at 180 ° C., and when the temperature reached 80 ° C., 15 ml of the stock solution was added, and then 15 ml was continuously added every 10 minutes. (Flask temperature is maintained at 180 ° C.). After the last addition was completed, the reaction was terminated by maintaining the temperature for another 10 minutes. After completion of the reaction, the solution was cooled to room temperature, and 500 ml of toluene and 2000 ml of ethanol were added to aggregate the nanocrystals. After the nanocrystals are precipitated using a centrifuge, the supernatant is discarded, and the precipitate is dissolved again in chloroform so that the nanocrystal concentration in the solution is 20% by mass, whereby InP / ZnS core-shell nanocrystals are dissolved. A chloroform solution (QD dispersion 1) of (red light emitting) was obtained.
Further, instead of indium phosphide (InP) red light emitting nanocrystal particles, the above indium phosphide (InP) green light emitting nanocrystal particles are used, and a chloroform solution of InP / ZnS core-shell nanocrystals (green light emitting) ( A QD dispersion 2) was obtained.

[QD ligand exchange]
By referring to JP-A No. 2002-121549 (published patent publication of Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation), triethylene glycol monomethyl ether ester (triethylene glycol monomethyl ether mercaptopropionate) (TEGMEMP) of 3-mercaptopropanoic acid was synthesized, Dry under reduced pressure.
In a container filled with nitrogen gas, QD dispersion 1 (including the above InP / ZnS core-shell nanocrystals (red light emitting property)) and 80 g of a chloroform solution in which 8 g of TEGMEMP synthesized above were mixed were mixed at 80 ° C. Ligand exchange was performed by stirring for 2 hours, and then cooled to room temperature.
Thereafter, toluene / chloroform was evaporated while stirring at 40 ° C. under reduced pressure, and the solution was concentrated until the liquid volume became 100 ml. Four times the weight of n-hexane was added to this dispersion to aggregate QD, and the supernatant was removed by centrifugation and decantation. 50 g of toluene was added to the precipitate and redispersed with ultrasound. This washing operation was performed three times in total to remove the free ligand component remaining in the solution. The precipitate after decantation was vacuum-dried at room temperature for 2 hours to obtain 2 g of QD (QD-TEGMEMP) powder modified with TEGMEMMP.

"Preparation of ink composition"
[Preparation of titanium oxide dispersion]
In a container filled with nitrogen gas, 6 g of titanium oxide, 1.01 g of a polymer dispersant, and 1,4-butanediol diacetate were mixed so as to have a nonvolatile content of 40%. Dispersion of the compound by adding zirconia beads (diameter: 1.25 mm) to the compound in the container filled with nitrogen gas and then shaking the sealed container filled with nitrogen gas for 2 hours using a paint conditioner Went. Thereby, the light scattering particle dispersion 1 was obtained. All of the above materials were those in which nitrogen gas was introduced and dissolved oxygen was replaced with nitrogen gas.

[Preparation of Ink Composition 1]
After uniformly mixing the following (1), (2) and (3) in a container filled with nitrogen gas, the mixture is filtered with a filter having a pore size of 5 μm in the glove box, and further nitrogen gas is put into the ink. The nitrogen gas was introduced and saturated. Subsequently, the ink composition was obtained by removing nitrogen gas under reduced pressure. In this way, a final ink composition 1 that was deoxygenated and substantially free of moisture was obtained.

The materials used are as follows.
[Light scattering particles]
・ Titanium oxide: MPT141 (Ishihara Sangyo Co., Ltd.)
[Thermosetting resin]
・ Glycidyl group-containing solid acrylic resin: “Fine Dick A-254”
(DIC Corporation, epoxy equivalent 500)
[Polymer dispersant]
・ Polymer dispersant: BYK-2164
(Product name by BYK, “DISPERBYK” is a registered trademark)
[Organic solvent]
・ 1,4-Butanediol diacetate (manufactured by Daicel Corporation)

(1) QD-TEGMEMMP dispersion 1 (the above-mentioned InP / ZnS core-shell nanocrystals (red light emitting properties) in which the organic solvent 1,4-butanediol diacetate was mixed with the QD-TEGMEMMP prepared above to make the nonvolatile content 30% )): 22.5g
(2) Thermosetting resin: “Fine Dick A-254” (6.28 g) manufactured by DIC Corporation, curing agent: 1-methylcyclohexane-4,5-dicarboxylic acid anhydride (1.05 g), Curing accelerator: dimethylbenzylamine (0.08 g) dissolved in organic solvent: 1,4-butanediol diacetate so as to have a nonvolatile content of 30%: 12.5 g of thermosetting resin solution
(3) Light scattering particle dispersion 1: 7.5 g
Titanium oxide was heated at 120 ° C. for 2 hours under a reduced pressure of 1 mmHg before mixing and allowed to cool in a nitrogen gas atmosphere.

[Preparation of Ink Composition 2]
An ink composition 2 was obtained in the same manner as the ink composition 1 using the QD dispersion 2 (including the InP / ZnS core-shell nanocrystal (green light emitting property)) instead of the QD dispersion 1.

[Preparation of ink composition 3]
Ink composition 3 was obtained in the same manner as ink composition 1, using 1,4-butanediol diacetate as (1) instead of QD-TEGMEM dispersion 1 in (1).

[Preparation of Ink Composition 4]
0.50 parts by mass of Y138 (manufactured by BASF Corporation) was ground together with 1.50 parts by mass of sodium chloride and 0.75 parts by mass of diethylene glycol. Thereafter, this mixture was poured into 600 parts by mass of warm water and stirred for 1 hour. The water-insoluble matter was separated by filtration and washed well with warm water, and then air-dried at 90 ° C. for pigmentation. The pigment particle system was 100 nm or less, and the average length / width ratio of the particles was less than 3.00. The following dispersion test and color filter evaluation test were performed using the yellow pigment of the obtained quinophthalone compound.
0.660 parts by mass of Y138 (manufactured by BASF Corporation) pigmented by the above method is put in a glass bottle, 6.42 parts by mass of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, DISPERBYK (registered trademark) LPN-6919 (manufactured by BYK Chemie Corporation) 0 467 parts by mass, DIC Corporation acrylic resin solution Unidic (registered trademark) ZL-295 0.700 parts by mass, 0.3-0.4 mmφ Sepul beads 22.0 parts by mass, paint conditioner (Toyo Seiki Co., Ltd.) For 4 hours to obtain a pigment dispersion. Furthermore, 2.00 parts by mass of the obtained pigment dispersion, 0.490 parts by mass of acrylic resin solution Unidic (registered trademark) ZL-295 manufactured by DIC Corporation, and 0.110 parts by mass of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate are put in a glass bottle. Ink composition 4 was produced.

"Production of light conversion layer"
The ink compositions 1 and 2 obtained above were each applied on a glass substrate (support substrate) in a glove box filled with nitrogen with a spin coater so that the film thickness after drying was 3.5 μm. did. The coating film is cured by heating to 180 ° C. in nitrogen, and a red light-emitting light conversion layer (1) and a green light-emitting layer are formed on the glass substrate as a layer (light conversion layer) made of a cured product of the ink composition. Each of the light conversion layers (2) was formed.

"Formation of wavelength selective transmission layer"
(Wavelength selective transmission layer of cholesteric liquid crystal layer)
[Preparation of polymerizable liquid crystal composition]
The following cholesteric liquid crystal layers are selected from the group consisting of polymerizable liquid crystal compounds represented by the following formulas (A-1) to (A-4) and formulas (B-1) to (B-9). One selected from the group consisting of polymerizable chiral compounds represented by formula (C-1) to formula (C-3) with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total amount of one or two or more compounds Or two or more compounds and one or more compounds selected from the group consisting of polymerization initiators represented by formulas (D-1) to (D-6) and a polymerization inhibitor ( E-1), (F-1) as a surfactant, (I-1) to (I-3) as a solvent, or a mixture thereof, and an alignment controller (H-1), respectively, are appropriately blended to form a polymerizable liquid crystal. A composition was prepared.
Specifically, 9 parts by mass of the compound represented by the formula (A-1), 4 parts by mass of the compound represented by the formula (A-2), 12 parts by mass of the compound represented by the formula (B-3), For 100 parts by mass of the total value of 75 parts by mass of the compound represented by formula (B-9), 4.6 parts by mass of compound represented by formula (C-3) and 6 parts by mass of (D-4) Part, 0.1 part by mass of (E-1), and (G-1) which is an organic solvent so that the solid content is 30%, and using a stirrer having a stirring propeller, stirring speed Was stirred for 15 minutes under conditions of 500 rpm and a solution temperature of 60 ° C., and then filtered through a 0.2 μm membrane filter to obtain a polymerizable liquid crystal composition (1).

  Similarly, polymerizable liquid crystal compositions (2) to (17) were prepared at the composition ratios shown in Table 1-1 to Table 1-5 below, and separately used for the λ / 2 wavelength plate in the same manner as described above. A product (10) was also prepared.

  Hereinafter, the composition table of the polymerizable liquid crystal compositions (1) to (17) used in the examples is shown below.

Polymerization inhibitor: 4-methoxyphenol (MEHQ) (E-1)
Surfactant: BYK-352 (manufactured by Big Chemie) (F-1)
Orientation control agent: Polypropylene (H-1)
Solvent: Toluene (I-1), Methyl ethyl ketone (I-2), Cyclopentanone (I-3)

[Formation of cholesteric liquid crystal layer]
(Example 1)
On the green light-emitting light conversion layer (2) rubbed with the prepared polymerizable liquid crystal composition (11), it was applied by spin coating at room temperature (25 ° C.) at a rotation speed of 800 rpm for 15 seconds, and at 60 ° C. After drying for 2 minutes and leaving at 25 ° C. for 1 minute, using a high-pressure mercury lamp, UV light having a maximum UVA illuminance of 300 mW / cm ² is irradiated to 420 mJ / cm ^2, whereby a right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (11 ) Was formed on the green light-emitting light conversion layer (2). Further, after the surface of the formed right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (11) was subjected to a rubbing treatment, the prepared polymerizable liquid crystal composition (10) was applied at room temperature (25 ° C.) at a rotational speed of 800 rpm by a spin coating method for 15 seconds. Then, after drying at 60 ° C. for 2 minutes and leaving at 25 ° C. for 1 minute, using a high pressure mercury lamp, UVA having a maximum illuminance of 300 mW / cm ² is irradiated with 420 mJ / cm ² to obtain λ / 2 A layer was formed on the right-handed cholesteric layer (11). Further, the prepared polymerizable liquid crystal composition (11) was coated on the λ / 2 layer by the same method, dried at 60 ° C. for 2 minutes, and allowed to stand at 25 ° C. for 1 minute, and then UVA using a high pressure mercury lamp. maximum illuminance by 420 mJ / cm ² UV light of 300 mW / cm ² of forming a cholesteric liquid crystal layer of the right winding (11) to the lambda / 2 layer on a supporting substrate - green-emitting light The light conversion film (1) which is a laminated body of the conversion layer (2) -right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (11)-(lambda) / 2 layer-right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (11) was created. The central value (λ) of the selective reflection wavelength of the light conversion film (1) was 550 nm.

(Example 2)
Instead of the polymerizable liquid crystal composition (11), the polymerizable liquid crystal composition (8) was used, and in the same manner as in Example 1, a support substrate-green light-emitting light conversion layer (2) -right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer ( 8) A light conversion film (2) which is a laminate of -λ / 2 layer-right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (8) was prepared. The central value (λ) of the selective reflection wavelength of the light conversion film (2) was 570 nm.

(Example 3)
The prepared polymerizable liquid crystal composition (4) was rubbed on the red light-emitting light conversion layer (1) at room temperature (25 ° C.) at a rotation speed of 800 rpm for 15 seconds by spin coating, and at 60 ° C. after 2 minutes drying by irradiating 420 mJ / cm ² maximum illumination intensity of the UVA has a UV light of 300 mW / cm ² using a high pressure mercury lamp after standing for 1 minute at 25 ° C., the cholesteric liquid crystal layer of the right winding (4 ) Was formed on the red light-emitting light conversion layer (1). Further, after the surface of the formed right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (4) is subjected to a rubbing treatment, the prepared polymerizable liquid crystal composition (10) is applied by spin coating at room temperature (25 ° C.) at a rotation speed of 800 rpm for 15 seconds. Then, after drying at 60 ° C. for 2 minutes and leaving at 25 ° C. for 1 minute, using a high pressure mercury lamp, UVA having a maximum illuminance of 300 mW / cm ² is irradiated with 420 mJ / cm ² to obtain λ / 2 A layer was formed on the right-handed cholesteric layer (4). Further, the prepared polymerizable liquid crystal composition (4) was coated on the λ / 2 layer by the same method, dried at 60 ° C. for 2 minutes, and left at 25 ° C. for 1 minute, and then UVA was used using a high pressure mercury lamp. maximum illuminance by 420 mJ / cm ² UV light of 300 mW / cm ² of forming a cholesteric liquid crystal layer of the right winding (4) to the lambda / 2 layer on a supporting substrate - red luminescent light A light conversion film (3), which is a laminate of the conversion layer (1) —the right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (4) —λ / 2 layer—the right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (4), was prepared. The central value (λ) of the selective reflection wavelength of the light conversion film (3) was 630 nm.

(Example 4)
A polymerizable liquid crystal composition (9) was used in place of the polymerizable liquid crystal composition (4), and in the same manner as in Example 3, a support substrate-a red light-emitting light conversion layer (1) -a right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer ( 9) A light conversion film (4) which is a laminate of -λ / 2 layer-right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (9) was prepared. The central value (λ) of the selective reflection wavelength of the light conversion film (4) was 670 nm.

(Example 5)
A polymerizable liquid crystal composition (12) was used in place of the polymerizable liquid crystal composition (4), and the support substrate-red light emitting light conversion layer (1) -right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer ( 12) A light conversion film (5) which was a laminate of -λ / 2 layer-right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (12) was prepared. The central value (λ) of the selective reflection wavelength of the light conversion film (5) was 660 nm. FIG. 5 shows an example of transmission spectrum data of the wavelength transmissive selective membrane of Example 5. According to FIG. 5, the wavelength-transmitting selective film having a layer structure of right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (12) -λ / 2 layer-right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (12) transmits light of around 620 nm or less. It is confirmed that light having a wavelength in the region of about 620 nm to 700 nm is reflected and light having a wavelength of about 700 nm or more is transmitted.

(Example 6)
The prepared polymerizable liquid crystal composition (5) was rubbed onto the green light-emitting light conversion layer (2) by spin coating at room temperature (25 ° C.) at a rotation speed of 800 rpm for 15 seconds, and at 60 ° C. After drying for 2 minutes and leaving at 25 ° C. for 1 minute, a right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (5) is irradiated with 420 mJ / cm ² of UV light having a maximum illuminance of 300 mW / cm ² using a high-pressure mercury lamp. ) Was formed on the green light-emitting color light conversion layer (2). Further, the surface of the formed right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (5) was subjected to a rubbing treatment, and then the prepared polymerizable liquid crystal composition (1) was rotated on the cholesteric liquid crystal layer (1) at a rotational speed of 800 rpm at room temperature (25 ° C.). For 15 seconds, dried at 60 ° C. for 2 minutes, left at 25 ° C. for 1 minute, and then used a high-pressure mercury lamp to emit UV light having a maximum UVA illumination of 300 mW / cm ² to 420 mJ / cm ^2. By irradiation, a left-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (1) is formed on the right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (5), and the support substrate-green light-emitting light conversion layer (2) -right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal is formed. The light conversion film (6) which is a laminated body of layer (5) -left-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (1) was created. The central value (λ) of the selective reflection wavelength of the light conversion film (6) was 560 nm.

(Example 7)
Instead of the polymerizable liquid crystal composition (1), the polymerizable liquid crystal composition (2) was used, and in the same manner as in Example 6, a support substrate-green light-emitting light conversion layer (2) -right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer ( 5) A light conversion film (7) which is a laminate of the left-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (2) was prepared. The central value (λ) of the selective reflection wavelength of the light conversion film (7) was 550 nm.

(Example 8)
The polymerizable liquid crystal composition (3) was used instead of the polymerizable liquid crystal composition (1), and the support substrate-green light-emitting light conversion layer (2) -right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer ( 5) A light conversion film (8) which is a laminate of the left-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (3) was prepared. The central value (λ) of the selective reflection wavelength of the light conversion film (3) was 550 nm.

Example 9
A red light-emitting light conversion layer (1) is used in place of the green light-emitting light conversion layer (2), and a polymerizable liquid crystal composition (15) is used in place of the polymerizable liquid crystal composition (5). Using the polymerizable liquid crystal composition (16) instead of the liquid crystal composition (1), the support substrate-the red light-emitting light conversion layer (1) -the right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (15) in the same manner as in Example 6. ) —A light conversion film (9) which is a laminate of the left-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (16) was prepared. The central value (λ) of the selective reflection wavelength of the light conversion film (9) was 660 nm.

(Example 10)
The prepared polymerizable liquid crystal composition (6) was rubbed on the green light-emitting light conversion layer (2) by spin coating at room temperature (25 ° C.) at a rotation speed of 800 rpm for 15 seconds, and at 60 ° C. After drying for 2 minutes and leaving at 25 ° C. for 1 minute, a right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (6) is irradiated with 420 mJ / cm ² of UV light having a maximum illuminance of 300 mW / cm ² using a high-pressure mercury lamp. ) Was formed on the light conversion layer (2). Further, the surface of the formed right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (6) was subjected to a rubbing treatment, and then the prepared polymerizable liquid crystal composition (10) was applied at room temperature (25 ° C.) at a rotation speed of 800 rpm by a spin coating method for 15 seconds. Then, after drying at 60 ° C. for 2 minutes and leaving at 25 ° C. for 1 minute, using a high pressure mercury lamp, UVA having a maximum illuminance of 300 mW / cm ² is irradiated with 420 mJ / cm ² to obtain λ / 2 A layer was formed on the right-handed cholesteric layer (6). Further, the prepared polymerizable liquid crystal composition (6) was applied on the λ / 2 layer by the same method, dried at 60 ° C. for 2 minutes, and allowed to stand at 25 ° C. for 1 minute, and then UVA using a high pressure mercury lamp. maximum illuminance by 420 mJ / cm ² UV light of 300 mW / cm ² of forming a cholesteric liquid crystal layer of the right winding (6) to the lambda / 2 layer on a supporting substrate - green-emitting light A light conversion film (10), which is a laminate of the conversion layer (2) -right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (6) -λ / 2 layer-right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (6), was prepared. The central value (λ) of the selective reflection wavelength of the light conversion film (1) was 470 nm.

(Example 11)
The red light-emitting light conversion layer (1) is used in place of the green light-emitting light conversion layer (2), and the support substrate-red light-emitting light conversion layer (1) -right-hand winding is used in the same manner as in Example 10. A light conversion film (11), which is a laminate of cholesteric liquid crystal layer (6) -λ / 2 layer-right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (6), was prepared. The central value (λ) of the selective reflection wavelength of the light conversion film (9) was 470 nm.

(Example 12)
In place of the polymerizable liquid crystal composition (6), the polymerizable liquid crystal composition (7) was used, and in the same manner as in Example 11, the support substrate-the red light-emitting light conversion layer (1) -the right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer ( 7) A light conversion film (12) as a laminate of -λ / 2 layer-right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (7) was prepared. The central value (λ) of the selective reflection wavelength of the light conversion film (12) was 462 nm.

(Example 13)
The prepared polymerizable liquid crystal composition (7) was applied on a glass substrate with a rubbing alignment film by spin coating at room temperature (25 ° C.) at a rotation speed of 800 rpm for 15 seconds, dried at 60 ° C. for 2 minutes, and then 25 After left standing at 1 ° C. for 1 minute, UV light having a maximum UVA illuminance of 300 mW / cm ² is irradiated with 420 mJ / cm ² using a high-pressure mercury lamp, so that the right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (7) is placed on the rubbing alignment film. Formed. Further, after the surface of the formed right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (7) is subjected to a rubbing treatment, the prepared polymerizable liquid crystal composition (10) is applied at room temperature (25 ° C.) at a rotation speed of 800 rpm by a spin coating method for 15 seconds. Then, after drying at 60 ° C. for 2 minutes and leaving at 25 ° C. for 1 minute, using a high pressure mercury lamp, UVA having a maximum illuminance of 300 mW / cm ² is irradiated with 420 mJ / cm ² to obtain λ / 2 A layer was formed on the right-handed cholesteric layer (7). Further, the prepared polymerizable liquid crystal composition (7) was coated on the λ / 2 layer by the same method, dried at 60 ° C. for 2 minutes, and allowed to stand at 25 ° C. for 1 minute, and then UVA using a high pressure mercury lamp. maximum illuminance by 420 mJ / cm ² UV light of 300 mW / cm ² of forming a cholesteric liquid crystal layer of the right winding (7) to the lambda / 2 layer on a supporting substrate - rubbed alignment film - right A laminated body of the wound cholesteric liquid crystal layer (7) -λ / 2 layer-right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (7) was formed.

  Next, a glove box filled with nitrogen with a spin coater so that the film thickness after drying of the ink composition 1 obtained above on the right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (7) on the surface is 3.0 μm. Applied in. The coating film was cured by heating at 180 ° C. in nitrogen to form a red light-emitting light conversion layer (1) as a light conversion layer. Then, the surface of the formed red light-emitting light conversion layer (1) is rubbed, and in the same manner as in Example 3, the support substrate-rubbing alignment film-right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (7) -λ / 2 Layer-Right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (7) -Red light emitting light conversion layer (1) -Right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (4) -λ / 2 layer-Right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (4) A light conversion film (13) was prepared. The center value (λ) of the selective reflection wavelength of the light conversion film (13) was 462 nm and 630 nm.

(Example 14)
A green light-emitting light conversion layer (2) is used in place of the red light-emitting light conversion layer (1), and a polymerizable liquid crystal composition (6) is used in place of the polymerizable liquid crystal composition (7). The polymerizable liquid crystal composition (8) was used instead of the liquid crystal composition (4), and the support substrate-rubbed alignment film-right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (6) -λ / 2 layer-right was used in the same manner as in Example 13. Light which is a laminate of a rolled cholesteric liquid crystal layer (6) -green light-emitting light conversion layer (2) -right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (8) -λ / 2 layer-right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (8) A conversion film (14) was prepared. The central value (λ) of the selective reflection wavelength of the light conversion film (14) was 470 nm and 570 nm.

(Comparative Example 1)
The green light-emitting light conversion layer (2) formed on the glass substrate was used as the film of Comparative Example 1.

(Comparative Example 2)
The red light-emitting light conversion layer (1) formed on the glass substrate was used as the film of Comparative Example 2.

(Calculation of selective reflection wavelength)
On the glass substrate, the polymerizable compositions (1) to (17) were each applied at room temperature (25 ° C.) by a spin coating method at a rotation speed of 800 rpm for 15 seconds, dried at 60 ° C. for 2 minutes, and then 1 at 25 ° C. After being allowed to stand, a UV-visible spectrophotometer V-560 (manufactured by JASCO Corporation) was obtained by irradiating 420 mJ / cm ² with UV light having a maximum illuminance of 300 mW / cm ² using a high-pressure mercury lamp. ), The spectral transmittance was measured, and the central value (λ) of the selective reflection wavelength was determined therefrom. For example, when the cholesteric liquid crystal layer (12) is prepared using the polymerizable liquid crystal composition (12) and the selective reflection wavelength is measured, the selective reflection wavelength as shown in FIG. 5 is obtained.

  Evaluation was performed in the following procedures using the light conversion film obtained above.

  Using a blue LED (peak emission wavelength: 450 nm), an integrating sphere is connected to the radiation spectrophotometer (trade name “MCPD-9800”) manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd., and the integrating sphere is installed above the blue LED. did. A light conversion film was inserted between the blue LED and the integrating sphere, and the spectrum observed by turning on the blue LED and the illuminance at each wavelength were measured.

  More specifically, the light conversion films (1) to (9) and the light conversion films (13) to (14) produced in Examples 1 to 9 are installed so as to provide a cholesteric liquid crystal layer on the blue LED side. The cholesteric liquid crystal layer was arranged so as to directly irradiate the light of the blue LED. In other words, the illuminance at each wavelength was measured in the order of blue LED-cholesteric liquid crystal layer-light conversion layer- (cholesteric liquid crystal layer) -support substrate-integrating sphere.

  On the other hand, the light conversion films (10) to (12) produced in Examples 10 to 14 were installed so as to provide a support substrate (glass substrate) on the blue LED side, and the blue LED directly on the glass substrate. It arrange | positioned so that light might be irradiated. In other words, the illuminance at each wavelength was measured by arranging blue LED-supporting substrate-light conversion layer-cholesteric liquid crystal layer-integrating sphere in this order.

  From the spectrum measured by the above measuring device, the total illuminance at 400 to 500 nm was blue light illuminance, the total illuminance at 500 to 600 nm was green light illuminance, and the total illuminance at 600 to 700 nm was red light illuminance.

[External quantum efficiency (EQE)]
Using the blue LED (peak emission wavelength: 450 nm), an integrating sphere was connected to the radiation spectrophotometer (trade name “MCPD-9800”) manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd., and the integrating sphere was above the blue LED. Was installed. A base material having a light conversion layer was inserted between the blue LED and the integrating sphere, and the spectrum observed by turning on the blue LED and the illuminance at each wavelength were measured.

From the spectrum and illuminance measured by the above measuring device, the external quantum efficiency was determined as follows. This value is a value indicating how much of the light (photons) incident on the light conversion layer is emitted as fluorescence to the observer side. Accordingly, a large value indicates that the light conversion layer is excellent, and is an important evaluation index.
External quantum efficiency of red light-emitting light conversion layer = P (Red) / E (Blue) × 100 (%) = (hereinafter also referred to as R / B value)
External quantum efficiency of green light emitting conversion layer = P (Green) / E (Blue) × 100 (%)
= (Hereinafter also referred to as G / B value)
Here, E (Blue), P (Red), and P (Green) each represent the following.
E (Blue):
The total value in this wavelength region of “illuminance × wavelength ÷ hc” at a wavelength of 380 to 490 nm is represented. Here, h is a Planck constant, and c is the speed of light. (This is a value corresponding to the number of observed photons.)
P (Red):
The total value in this wavelength region of “illuminance × wavelength ÷ hc” at a measurement wavelength of 490 to 590 nm is represented. (Corresponds to the number of observed photons)
P (Green):
The total value in this wavelength region of “illuminance × wavelength ÷ hc” at a measurement wavelength of 590 to 780 nm is represented. (Corresponds to the number of observed photons)

  From Table 2, it was confirmed that the light conversion film (1) produced in Example 1 had increased green light illuminance due to the presence of the cholesteric liquid crystal layer as compared with Comparative Example 2. This is because part of the light emitted to the blue LED side is converted by the selective reflection property of the cholesteric liquid crystal layer that is emitted to the blue LED side from the light converted by the light conversion layer (2). This is due to reflection on the spectroradiometer side, and proves the effect of the present invention.

  Moreover, it is confirmed from Table 2 that the light conversion film (3) produced in Example 3 has an increased red light illuminance due to the presence of the cholesteric liquid crystal layer, as compared with Comparative Example 1. Expected to be effective.

  Regarding the light conversion films 6 to 9 produced in Examples 6 to 9, it was confirmed that the red and green illuminances were increased by the presence of the cholesteric liquid crystal layer as compared with Comparative Examples 1 and 2. In the experimental results of Examples 6 to 9, since R / B and G / B were improved, it was confirmed that the color purity of red and green was also increased.

  The experimental results of the blue light transmittance and EQE (external quantum efficiency) of Examples 10 to 11 were as follows.

  Comparing Comparative Example 1 and Example 10, by providing a blue-shielding cholesteric liquid crystal layer on the green light-emitting light conversion layer (1), the blue transmittance is reduced by about 11% and the EQE is about 1 20 times.

  Comparing Comparative Example 2 and Example 11, by providing a blue-shielding cholesteric liquid crystal layer on the red light-emitting light conversion layer (2), the blue transmittance is reduced by about 11%, and the EQE is about 1. 18 times.

  From these facts, it is considered that the blue-shielded cholesteric liquid crystal layer is effective in improving the optical characteristics of the light conversion layer.

(Wavelength selective transmission layer of dielectric multilayer film)
The ink composition 1 containing the red light-emitting nanocrystal particles was applied onto a glass substrate with a spin coater so that the film thickness after drying was 3 μm. The coating film was dried and cured in a nitrogen gas atmosphere to prepare a red light-emitting light conversion layer (1).

  Similarly, a green light-emitting light conversion layer (2) was prepared using the ink composition 2 containing green light-emitting nanocrystal particles.

(Example 15)
A flattening film composition (trade name PIG-7424: manufactured by JNC Corporation) is applied to the red light-emitting light conversion layer (1) by spin coating, dried, and post-baked to form a flattening film. Obtained. Next, a dielectric multilayer film (a dichroic filter (DFB-500 (manufactured by Optical Solutions)) that transmits light in a wavelength region of 500 nm or less and reflects light in a wavelength region of 510 nm or more) is a transparent double-sided adhesive sheet without a core material. A light conversion film substrate 15 was produced by bonding using (MHM-FWV manufactured by Niei Kaiko Co., Ltd.).

(Example 16)
In the same manner as in Example 16, a dielectric multilayer film (a dichroic filter that transmits light in a wavelength region of 500 nm or less and reflects light in a wavelength region of 510 nm or more with respect to the green light-emitting light conversion layer (2). (DFB-500 (manufactured by Optical Solutions)) was bonded to produce a light conversion film substrate 16.

(Comparative Example 1)
The red light-emitting light conversion layer (1) formed on the glass substrate as in Comparative Example 1 was used as the film of Comparative Example 1.

(Comparative Example 2)
The green light-emitting light conversion layer (2) formed on the glass substrate as in Comparative Example 2 was used as the film of Comparative Example 2.

  The following evaluation was performed using the light conversion films 10 and 11 obtained above and the films of Comparative Examples 1 and 2.

[Evaluation of fluorescence emission intensity of light conversion film]
A blue LED (peak emission wavelength: 450 nm) manufactured by CCS Co., Ltd. was used as a surface light source. The measuring device was an integrating sphere connected to a radiation spectrophotometer (trade name “MCPD-9800”) manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd., and the integrating sphere was installed above the blue LED. The spectrum observed by turning on the blue LED and the illuminance at each wavelength were measured. At this time, the sample shown in Table 1 below was placed on the blue LED, and the fluorescence intensity (illuminance) at the observed wavelength of 450 nm and the peak wavelength of fluorescence was measured, and S (450) and S (PL ). The fluorescence intensity S (PL) corresponds to the fluorescence emission intensity from the light conversion layer. Therefore, a large value indicates that the light conversion layer is excellent, and is an important evaluation index.

The evaluation results using the dielectric multilayer film are shown in Tables 3-1 and 3-2.
(The fluorescence intensity was evaluated relative to 100 when no wavelength-selective transmission layer was used.)
(The fluorescence intensity was evaluated relative to 100 when no wavelength-selective transmission layer was used.)
Note) The positional relationship of the measurement systems of Examples 15 and 16 is, in order from the bottom, blue LED, wavelength selective transmission layer (DFB-500), light conversion layer (1) or (2), and integrating sphere.
* 1: P (Blue) is 380 to 500 nm.

  From the experimental results shown in Table 3-1 and Table 3-2, it was found that the emission intensity was significantly increased by installing the dielectric multilayer film between the blue LED and the light conversion layer. Similar results were obtained when DIF-50S-BLE manufactured by Sigma Koki was used instead of DIF-500.

FIG. 22 shows a comparison of experimental data between the light conversion layer of Comparative Example 1 and the light conversion film of Example 15. The experimental data in FIG. 22 shows the relationship between each wavelength region and illuminance. For example, as shown in FIG. 22, from the experimental results in Table 3-1, the peak intensity (642 nm) of the R light is 1.22 times greater than the R light / The ratio (area ratio) of B light was changed from 0.417 to 0.586 (1.40 times), and the ratio (area ratio) of R light / (R light + B light) was changed from 0.294 to 0.369. (1.25 times). Moreover, it was confirmed that the external quantum efficiency (EQE) calculated by the following formula increased from 1.3.6% to 18.8%, which was 1.38 times.
(EQE = number of photons of R light / (number of photons of B light when only Filter is measured) × 100 (%)
The B light (blue light) means light in the wavelength region RB of 400 to 520 nm, and the R light (red light) means light in the wavelength region RR of 580 to 720 nm.

  Thereby, it was confirmed that the light conversion film substrate provided with the dielectric multilayer film has improved red and green color purity.

<Method for Producing Liquid Crystal Panel, Backlight Unit, and Liquid Crystal Display Element>
[Production of light conversion film]
First, a substrate (BM substrate) having a light-shielding portion called a black matrix (BM) was manufactured by the following procedure. That is, after applying a black resist (“CFPR-BK” manufactured by Tokyo Ohka Kogyo Co., Ltd.) on a glass substrate made of alkali-free glass (“OA-10G” manufactured by Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd.), pre-baking, pattern exposure, development And the pattern-shaped light shielding part was formed by performing post-baking. The exposure was performed by irradiating the black resist with ultraviolet rays at an exposure amount of 250 mJ / cm ² . The pattern of the light shielding portion is a pattern having an opening corresponding to a sub-pixel of 200 μm × 600 μm, the line width is 20 μm, and the thickness is 2.6 μm.

  The ink composition 1 (red light emission), the ink composition 2 (green light emission), and the ink composition 3 (transparent) are printed on the opening portion on the BM substrate by an inkjet method, and then dried and irradiated with ultraviolet rays. Subsequently, it heated at 150 degreeC under nitrogen atmosphere for 30 minutes. As a result, the ink composition was cured to form a pixel portion made of a cured product of the ink composition. Thus, a pixel portion that transmits and scatters blue light, a pixel portion that converts blue light into red light, and a pixel portion that converts blue light into green light are formed on the BM substrate. By the above operation, a patterned light conversion layer (3) including a plurality of types of pixel portions was obtained.

(Example 17)
Next, a planarizing film composition (trade name PIG-7424: manufactured by JNC Corporation) was applied and dried by spin coating on one surface of the light conversion layer (3), and post-baked to obtain a planarizing film. After the planarization film (passivation film) was formed, a light conversion film substrate (17) on which a wavelength selective transmission layer (dielectric multilayer film) was laminated was produced.

Here, the dielectric multilayer film is formed by sputtering TiO ₂ on a glass substrate, and further 14 layers of SiO ₂ and TiO ₂ are sputtered alternately. After forming the SiO ₂ film, SiO ₂ and 12 layers of TiO ₂ were alternately formed, and finally, SiO ₂ was formed. The optical film thickness of each layer conformed to the multilayer optical interference film that transmits blue light described in Table 1 of JP-A-10-31982. This dielectric multilayer film transmits light of 500 nm or less and reflects light of 500 nm or more.

  The planarizing film is bonded to the dielectric multilayer film surface of the glass substrate on which the dielectric multilayer film has been formed via a transparent double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet (MHM-FWV manufactured by NHIEI KAKO Co., Ltd.). A conversion film substrate (17) was obtained.

  Thereby, the light conversion film substrate (17) which is a laminate of the supporting substrate, the patterned light conversion layer (3) having a plurality of types of pixel portions, the planarization film, and the wavelength selective transmission layer (dielectric multilayer film) is obtained. Obtained.

(Example 18)
After rubbing the light conversion layer (3) in which the pixel portion that transmits and scatters blue light, the pixel portion that converts blue light into red light, and the pixel portion that converts blue light into green light are formed. For the pixel portion that converts blue light into green light, the dextrorotatory polymerizable composition (13) is printed by an ink jet method, dried, irradiated with ultraviolet rays, and then irradiated at 150 ° C. in a nitrogen atmosphere at 30 ° C. After heating for a minute and forming a cholesteric liquid crystal layer (13) which is a coating film of the polymerizable composition (13), the polymerizable composition (14) is further printed thereon by an ink jet method and then dried. The mixture was irradiated with ultraviolet rays and then heated at 150 ° C. for 30 minutes in a nitrogen atmosphere to form a levorotatory cholesteric liquid crystal layer (14). Similarly, a cholesteric liquid crystal layer (15) derived from a dextrorotatory polymerizable composition (15) and a cholesteric liquid crystal derived from a levorotatory polymerizable composition (16) for a pixel portion that converts blue light into red light. Layer (16) was formed. Thereafter, a planarizing film composition (trade name PIG-7424: manufactured by JNC Corporation) is applied and dried by spin coating on the surface on which the cholesteric liquid crystal layer is formed, and a planarizing film is formed by post-baking. , A light conversion layer with a pattern including a plurality of types of pixel portions (3) -cholesteric liquid crystal layer (cholesteric liquid crystal layer (13) -cholesteric liquid crystal layer (14) on a green pixel, cholesteric liquid crystal layer (15) on a red pixel ) -Cholesteric liquid crystal layer (16))-light conversion film substrate (18) which is a laminate of a flattening film was obtained.

(Example 19)
After rubbing the light conversion layer (3) in which the pixel portion that transmits and scatters blue light, the pixel portion that converts blue light into red light, and the pixel portion that converts blue light into green light are formed. The polymerizable liquid crystal composition (17) of the present invention was applied on one side by a spin coating method and dried at 80 ° C. for 2 minutes. The obtained coating film was placed on a hot plate at 60 ° C., and a 15 mW / cm ² high-pressure mercury lamp adjusted so that ultraviolet light (UV light) of only around 365 nm was obtained with a band-pass filter. Irradiated with UV light for 10 seconds at intensity. Next, the bandpass filter was removed, and UV light was irradiated for 20 seconds at an intensity of 70 mW / cm ² to obtain a cholesteric liquid crystal layer (17). Further, after rubbing the surface of the right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (17), the prepared polymerizable liquid crystal composition (10) was applied at room temperature (25 ° C.) at a rotational speed of 800 rpm for 15 seconds by a spin coating method, and 60 After drying for 2 minutes at 25 ° C and leaving for 1 minute at 25 ° C, a high pressure mercury lamp is used to irradiate UV light with a maximum illuminance of 300 mW / cm ² to 420 mJ / cm ² to form a λ / 2 layer did. Subsequently, the prepared polymerizable liquid crystal composition (17) was applied on the λ / 2 layer by the same method, dried at 60 ° C. for 2 minutes, and allowed to stand at 25 ° C. for 1 minute, and then UVA using a high pressure mercury lamp. maximum illuminance by 420 mJ / cm ² UV light of 300 mW / cm ² of forming a cholesteric liquid crystal layer of the right winding (17) to the lambda / 2 layer on a supporting substrate - a plurality of types of pixel portions A light conversion film (19), which is a laminate of a patterned light conversion layer (3) -right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (17) -λ / 2 layer-right-handed cholesteric liquid crystal layer (17), was prepared. It was a reflection wavelength region (540 to 690 nm) of cholesteric liquid crystal.

(Example 20)
On the support substrate of the light conversion film substrate (17) of Example 17 obtained by the above method, the ink composition 4 was applied by a spin coater and then dried. Subsequently, after heating at 230 ° C. for 1 hour, a yellow color filter showing each green chromaticity when using a C light source in the color standard for high color reproduction was formed on the support substrate of the light conversion film (17). This obtained the light conversion film (20) which is a laminated body of yellow color filter-support substrate-light conversion layer (3) -flattening film-wavelength selective transmission layer (dielectric multilayer film).

(Example 21)
On the support substrate of the light conversion film (18) of Example 18 obtained by the above method, the ink composition 4 was applied by a spin coater and then dried. Subsequently, after heating at 230 degreeC for 1 hour, the yellow color filter which shows each green chromaticity at the time of using C light source in the color specification for high color reproduction was formed on the support substrate of a light conversion film (18). This obtained the light conversion film (21) which is a laminated body of a yellow color filter-support substrate-light conversion layer (3) -flattening film-wavelength selective transmission layer (cholesteric liquid crystal layer).

(Comparative Example 3)
The light conversion layer (3) was used as Comparative Example 3.

"Manufacture of electrode substrate with in-cell polarizing layer"
[Fabrication of counter substrate 1]
After applying and drying a “Poval 103” aqueous solution (solid content concentration 4 mass%) manufactured by Kuraray Co., Ltd. on the wavelength-selective transmission layer (dielectric multilayer film) of the produced light conversion film (17), a rubbing treatment is performed. gave.
Next, 0.03 parts by mass of MegaFuck F-554 (manufactured by DIC Corporation), 1 part by mass of an azo dye of the following formula (az-1), and an azo dye of the following formula (az-2) on the rubbing treated surface 1 part by mass,
98 parts by mass of chloroform, 2 parts by mass of ethylene oxide-modified trimethylolpropane triacrylate (V # 360, manufactured by Osaka Organic Chemical Co., Ltd.), 2 parts by mass of dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate (KAYARAD DPHA, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), Irgacure A polarizing layer and a light conversion film (17) are prepared by applying and drying a polarizing layer coating solution consisting of 0.06 parts by mass of 907 (manufactured by Ciba Specialty Chemicals) and Kayacure DETX (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.). A substrate 1 was prepared. Thereafter, ITO was deposited by sputtering to produce the counter substrate 1 (= second (electrode) substrate).

[Fabrication of counter substrate 2]
A polarizing layer is formed on the wavelength-selective transmission layer (cholesteric liquid crystal layer) of the light conversion film (18) in the same manner as the substrate 1 provided with the light conversion film (17), and then ITO is formed by sputtering. The counter substrate 2 (= second (electrode) substrate) was produced by deposition.

[Fabrication of counter substrate 3]
A polarizing layer is formed on the wavelength-selective transmission layer (dielectric multilayer film) of the light conversion film (20) in the same manner as the substrate 1 provided with the light conversion film (17), and the counter substrate 3 (= A second (electrode) substrate was produced.

[Fabrication of counter substrate 4]
A polarizing layer is formed on the wavelength-selective transmission layer (cholesteric liquid crystal layer) of the light conversion film (19) in the same manner as the substrate 1 provided with the light conversion film (17), and then ITO is formed by sputtering. The counter substrate 4 (= second (electrode) substrate) was produced by deposition.

[Fabrication of counter substrate 5]
Sputtering deposition of aluminum is performed on the glass surface opposite to the dielectric multilayer film surface of the glass substrate on which the wavelength-selective transmission layer (dielectric multilayer film) used in the light conversion film (17) produced above is formed ( About 100 nm (manufactured by Shibaura Mechatronics Co., Ltd.), and a silicon oxide film and a silicon film were formed thereon in that order by sputtering. A photocurable resist was uniformly applied on the film formation surface to a thickness of 100 nm by a spin coating method, and then the resist layer was dried in an oven at 70 ° C. for 5 minutes. With a resin mold (pattern mold: line & space pattern with a pitch of 130 nm, duty 0.4, pattern height of 180 nm) uniformly pressed onto a dried resist layer, ultraviolet light including a wavelength of 365 nm is 1000 mJ / After irradiation with a light amount of cm ² and photocuring, the resin mold was peeled off. Further, a concave portion of the resist pattern was selectively etched by plasma with oxygen gas using an RIE apparatus (Reactive Ion Etching processing apparatus), and a resist mask was obtained leaving only the convex portion.

After forming the resist mask, anisotropic etching treatment was performed on the silicon layer and the silicon oxide layer in a direction perpendicular to the substrate by a plasma using CHF ₃ gas in an RIE apparatus. In addition, in the RIE apparatus, a layer made of aluminum was anisotropically etched in the film thickness direction of the substrate (perpendicular to the substrate) by plasma with Cl gas. Next, the resist mask remaining on the upper part of the silicon layer was removed by etching with plasma using oxygen gas, and a substrate provided with a light conversion film (17) having a wire grid polarizing layer on its surface was produced. Thereafter, ITO was deposited by sputtering to produce the counter substrate 5 (= second (electrode) substrate).

[Fabrication of counter substrate 6]
A flattening film composition (trade name PIG-7424: manufactured by JNC Corporation) is applied onto the cholesteric liquid crystal layer of the light conversion film (19) prepared above by spin coating, dried, and post-baked to form a flattening film. After the formation, a wire grid polarizing layer was provided on the cholesteric liquid crystal layer of the light conversion film (19) under the same conditions as the method for producing the counter substrate 5. Thereafter, ITO was deposited by sputtering to produce a counter substrate 6 (= second (electrode) substrate).

(Preparation of counter substrate 7)
The flattening film composition (trade name PIG-7424: manufactured by JNC Corporation) is applied and dried by spin coating on the dielectric multilayer film of the light conversion film (21) produced as described above, followed by post-baking. After forming, the wire grid polarizing layer was provided on the said planarization film | membrane of the light conversion film (21) on the same conditions as the preparation methods of the opposing board | substrate 5. FIG. Thereafter, ITO was deposited by sputtering to produce a counter substrate 7 (= second (electrode) substrate).

(Preparation of counter substrate 8)
A flattening film composition (trade name PIG-7424: manufactured by JNC Corporation) is applied and dried by spin coating on the cholesteric liquid crystal layer of the produced light conversion film (18) and post-baked to form a flattening film. After the formation, a wire grid polarizing layer was provided on the planarizing film of the light conversion film (18) under the same conditions as in the method for manufacturing the counter substrate 5. Thereafter, ITO was deposited by sputtering to produce a counter substrate 8 (= second (electrode) substrate).

(Preparation of counter substrate 9)
As Comparative Example 3, a planarization film composition (trade name PIG-7424: manufactured by JNC Corporation) was applied on the light conversion layer (3) prepared above by spin coating, dried, and post-baked to form a planarization film. After forming, the wire grid polarizing layer was provided on the light conversion layer (3) on the same conditions as the manufacturing method of the opposing substrate 3. FIG. Thereafter, ITO was deposited by sputtering to produce the counter substrate 9 (= second (electrode) substrate).

(Production of counter substrate 10)
A flattening film composition (trade name PIG-7424: manufactured by JNC Corporation) is applied and dried by spin coating on the cholesteric liquid crystal layer of the produced light conversion film (18) and post-baked to form a flattening film. After the formation, a wire grid polarizing layer is provided on the planarizing film of the light conversion film (18) under the same conditions as the manufacturing method of the counter substrate 5, and the counter substrate 10 (= second (electrode) substrate) is mounted. Made (without ITO).

"VA liquid crystal panel"
(Example 22)
After forming a vertical alignment layer on the ITO of the second (electrode) substrate (counter substrate 8) and the transparent electrode of the first (electrode) substrate with TFT, the transparent electrode and the vertical alignment layer are formed. The first substrate and the second (electrode) substrate (counter substrate 8) on which the vertical alignment layer is formed are opposed to each other, and the alignment direction of the alignment layer is the anti-parallel direction (180 °). The VA liquid crystal cell was manufactured by adhering the peripheral part with a sealant in a state where a constant gap (4 μm) was maintained between the two substrates. Next, in the cell gap partitioned by the alignment layer surface and the sealing agent, the liquid crystal compositions (Composition Examples 1 to 4) shown in Table 4 below are filled by vacuum injection, and the polarizing plate is the first. VA-type liquid crystal panels 1 to 4 were produced by pasting on a substrate (VA-type liquid crystal cell using composition example 3 is referred to as VA-type liquid crystal panel 3). The liquid crystal panels 1 to 4 thus produced were used as evaluation elements, and VHR measurement and fluorescence emission intensity similar to the above were performed.

(Comparative Example 4)
As a comparative example, in place of the counter substrate 8, the counter substrate 9 not provided with the wavelength selective transmission layer is used, and the composition example 1 is filled as the liquid crystal composition. A comparative liquid crystal panel 5 was prepared by the method, and the fluorescence emission intensity was measured.

  As a result, even when the liquid crystal panels 1 to 4 are irradiated with light having a main emission peak at 450 nm for one week, the VHR becomes 98% or more. It is considered that a stable effect is exhibited. Moreover, as a result of comparing the evaluation of the fluorescence emission intensity of the VA type liquid crystal panels 1 to 4 and the fluorescence emission intensity of the liquid crystal panel 5, it is found that the emission intensity is remarkably increased due to the presence of the cholesteric liquid crystal layer. The same tendency as the fluorescence intensity measurement results of 1 to 5 was confirmed.

(Example 23)
Further, the counter substrate 5 is used in place of the counter substrate 8 of Example 22, and the composition example 1 is filled as the liquid crystal composition, and the VA type liquid crystal panel 6 is formed by the same method as the manufacturing method of the liquid crystal panels 1 to 4. It produced and performed fluorescence emission intensity. As a result, it was found that the emission intensity was remarkably increased by the presence of the wavelength selective transmission layer (dielectric multilayer film), and the same tendency as the fluorescence intensity measurement results of Examples 15 and 16 was confirmed.

(Example 24)
Further, the counter substrate 4 is used in place of the counter substrate 8 and the composition example 1 is filled as the liquid crystal composition. Luminescence intensity was performed. As a result, it was confirmed that the presence of the cholesteric liquid crystal layer not only significantly increased the emission intensity, but also improved the R / B ratio or G / B ratio.

"PSVA liquid crystal panel"
(Example 25)
After forming a polyimide alignment film that induces vertical alignment on the ITO of the second (electrode) substrate (counter substrate 2) and the transparent electrode of the first substrate with TFT, the transparent electrode and the vertical alignment layer are The first substrate formed and the second (electrode) substrate (counter substrate 2) on which the vertical alignment layer is formed face each other, and the alignment direction of the alignment layer is the anti-parallel direction (180 The peripheral portion was bonded with a sealant in a state where a constant gap (4 μm) was maintained between the two substrates. Next, in the cell gap defined by the alignment layer surface and the sealing agent, the following polymerizable compound
A polymerizable compound-containing liquid crystal composition 1 in which 0.3 part by mass and 99.7 parts by mass of Composition Example 1 were mixed was injected by a vacuum injection method. As a material for forming a vertical alignment film, JALS2096 manufactured by JSR Corporation was used. Moreover, the board | substrate with ITO of fishbone structure was used for the 1st board | substrate.

Thereafter, the liquid crystal panel into which the liquid crystal composition containing the polymerizable compound was injected was irradiated with ultraviolet rays through a filter that cuts out ultraviolet rays of 325 nm or less using a high-pressure mercury lamp with a voltage of 10 V applied at a frequency of 100 Hz. In this case, illuminance measured at the center wavelength of 365nm condition was adjusted to 100 mW / cm ^2, was irradiated with ultraviolet light at an accumulated light intensity of 10J / cm ^2. Then, using a fluorescent UV lamp, the illuminance was measured at a center wavelength of 313nm is adjusted to 3 mW / cm ^2, further irradiated with ultraviolet light at an accumulated light intensity 10J / cm ^2, the PSVA liquid crystal panel 1 In the same manner as in Composition Example 1, the light resistance test using light having a main light emission peak at 450 nm and the light resistance test using light having a main light emission peak at 385 nm were evaluated. As a result, in all cases of light having a main emission peak at 450 nm and a main emission peak at 385 nm, the results were almost the same as those of the VA liquid crystal panels 1 to 4. Moreover, it turned out that emission intensity increases remarkably by existence of a wavelength selective transmission layer (cholesteric liquid crystal layer), The same tendency as the fluorescence intensity measurement result of Examples 1-5 was confirmed.

(Example 26)
After forming a polyimide alignment film for inducing vertical alignment on the ITO of the second (electrode) substrate (counter substrate 1) and the transparent electrode of the first substrate with TFT, the transparent electrode and the vertical alignment layer are formed. The formed first substrate and the second (electrode) substrate (counter substrate 1) on which the vertical alignment layer is formed are opposed to each other, and the alignment direction of the alignment layer is the anti-parallel direction (180 The peripheral portion was bonded with a sealant in a state where a constant gap (4 μm) was maintained between the two substrates. Next, in the cell gap defined by the alignment layer surface and the sealing agent, the following polymerizable compound (XX-5),
A polymerizable compound-containing liquid crystal composition 2 obtained by mixing 99.7 parts by mass of Composition Example 2 was injected by a vacuum injection method. As a material for forming a vertical alignment film, JALS2096 manufactured by JSR Corporation was used. Moreover, the board | substrate with ITO of fishbone structure was used for the 1st board | substrate.

Thereafter, the liquid crystal panel into which the liquid crystal composition containing the polymerizable compound was injected was irradiated with ultraviolet rays through a filter that cuts out ultraviolet rays of 325 nm or less using a high-pressure mercury lamp with a voltage of 10 V applied at a frequency of 100 Hz. In this case, illuminance measured at the center wavelength of 365nm condition was adjusted to 100 mW / cm ^2, was irradiated with ultraviolet light at an accumulated light intensity of 10J / cm ^2. Then, using a fluorescent UV lamp, the illuminance was measured at a center wavelength of 313nm is adjusted to 3 mW / cm ^2, further irradiated with ultraviolet light at an accumulated light intensity 10J / cm ^2, the PSVA liquid crystal panel 2 In the same manner as in Composition Example 1, the light resistance test using light having a main light emission peak at 450 nm and the light resistance test using light having a main light emission peak at 385 nm were evaluated. As a result, in all cases of light having a main emission peak at 450 nm and a main emission peak at 385 nm, the results were almost the same as those of the VA liquid crystal panels 1 to 4. Further, it was found that the emission intensity was remarkably increased by the presence of the wavelength selective transmission layer (dielectric multilayer film), and the same tendency as the fluorescence intensity measurement results of Examples 15 and 16 was confirmed.

"Spontaneous alignment type VA liquid crystal panel"
(Example 27)
The first substrate on which the transparent electrode with TFT is formed and the second substrate (counter substrate 2) are arranged so that the respective electrodes face each other, and a certain gap (4 μm) is provided between the two substrates. In the state where it was kept, the peripheral part was pasted with a sealant (the alignment film was not formed). Next, 2 parts by mass of a spontaneous alignment agent (the following formula (al-1)) and the polymerizable compound with respect to the liquid crystal composition 1 (100 parts by mass) in the cell gap partitioned by the sealant (XX-2) 0.5 part by mass
The added liquid crystal composition was filled by a vacuum injection method, a polarizing plate was bonded onto the first substrate, and ultraviolet rays were irradiated under the same conditions as in Example 25 to produce a VA liquid crystal panel 8.

(Example 28)
(VA type liquid crystal panel 8)
A VA type liquid crystal panel 9 was produced in the same manner except that the second substrate (counter substrate 2) was changed to the counter substrate 7.

(Example 29)
A first substrate on which a transparent electrode with TFT is formed and a second transparent electrode substrate (the counter substrate 1) are arranged so that the respective electrodes face each other, and a certain gap ( 4 μm), the peripheral part was bonded with a sealing agent (without forming an alignment film). Next, 2 parts by mass of a spontaneous alignment agent (the following formula (P-1-2)) with respect to the liquid crystal composition 1 (100 parts by mass) in the cell gap partitioned by the alignment layer surface and the sealing agent. And the polymerizable compound (XX-5),
The added liquid crystal composition was filled by a vacuum injection method, a polarizing plate was bonded onto the first substrate, and ultraviolet rays were irradiated under the same conditions as in Example 20 to produce a VA liquid crystal panel 10.

  As a result of evaluating the fluorescence emission intensity for the spontaneous alignment type VA liquid crystal panels 8 to 10 produced in Examples 27 to 29, it was confirmed that the emission intensity was remarkably increased as compared with the case without the wavelength selective transmission layer. It was also confirmed that the R / B value and G / B value increased.

(Example 30)
On the first substrate on which the transparent electrode with TFT is formed, the vertical alignment layer solution used in Example 22 of International Publication No. 2013/002260 is formed by spin coating, and the dry thickness is 0.1 μm. A layer was formed. Similarly, a photo-alignment layer was formed on the surface of the second transparent electrode substrate (counter substrate 2). The first substrate on which the transparent electrode and the photo-alignment layer are formed and the second (electrode) substrate (counter substrate 2) on which the photo-alignment layer is formed are opposed to each other, and the alignment direction of the alignment layer Was placed in an anti-parallel direction (180 °), and the peripheral part was bonded with a sealant in a state where a constant gap (4 μm) was maintained between the two substrates. Next, the liquid crystal composition 1 is filled into the cell gap defined by the alignment layer surface and the sealing agent by a vacuum injection method, and a polarizing plate is bonded onto the first substrate, thereby VA type liquid crystal. Panel 11 was produced.

(Example 31)
The counter substrate 2 in the manufacturing method of the VA type liquid crystal panel 11 was replaced with the counter substrate 1, and a VA type liquid crystal panel 12 was manufactured by the same method as the manufacturing method of the VA type liquid crystal panel 10.

  As a result of evaluating the fluorescence emission intensity of the VA type liquid crystal panels 10 to 11 produced in Examples 30 to 31, it was confirmed that the emission intensity was remarkably increased as compared with the case without the wavelength selective transmission layer. It was confirmed that the B value and the G / B value increased.

"IPS liquid crystal panel"
(Example 32)
A horizontal alignment layer solution is formed by spin coating on a pair of comb electrodes formed on a transparent substrate, and an alignment layer is formed to produce a first substrate on which the comb-shaped transparent electrode and the alignment layer are formed. did. Also, after forming a horizontal alignment layer solution on the counter substrate 3 (second (electrode) substrate) by spin coating and forming the alignment layer, each alignment layer is opposed and irradiated with linearly polarized light, or Arranged so that the direction of rubbing in the horizontal direction was an anti-parallel direction (180 °), and the peripheral part was pasted with a sealant in a state where a constant gap (4 μm) was maintained between the two substrates. Next, the liquid crystal composition (Composition Example 3) is filled into the cell gap defined by the alignment layer surface and the sealing agent by a vacuum injection method, and then the pair of polarizing plates is formed on the first substrate and the second substrate. An IPS-type liquid crystal panel was produced by pasting the top.

  As a result of evaluating the fluorescence emission intensity of the IPS type liquid crystal panel produced in Example 32, it was confirmed that the emission intensity was remarkably increased as compared with the case without the wavelength selective transmission layer, and the R / B value, G / It was confirmed that the B value increased.

"FFS type liquid crystal panel"
(Example 33)
After forming a flat common electrode on the first transparent substrate, an insulating layer film is formed, a transparent comb electrode is further formed on the insulating layer film, and an alignment layer solution is then applied on the transparent comb electrode. A first electrode substrate was formed by spin coating. A horizontal alignment layer solution was formed on the counter substrate 10 (second (electrode) substrate) by a spin coating method to form an alignment layer. Next, the first substrate on which the comb-shaped transparent electrode and the alignment layer were formed, and the second substrate on which the alignment layer, the polarizing layer, and the light conversion film were formed were opposed to each other and irradiated with linearly polarized light. Alternatively, the rubbing direction was arranged to be an anti-parallel direction (180 °), and the peripheral portion was bonded with a sealant in a state where a constant gap (4 μm) was maintained between the two substrates. Next, the liquid crystal composition (Composition Example 2) was filled into the cell gap partitioned by the alignment layer surface and the sealing agent by a dropping method, to produce an FFS type liquid crystal panel.

  As a result of evaluating the fluorescence emission intensity of the FFS type liquid crystal panel produced in Example 33, it was confirmed that the emission intensity was remarkably increased as compared with the case without the wavelength selective transmission layer, and the R / B value, G / It was confirmed that the B value increased.

<Liquid crystal display device>
(Preparation of backlight unit 1)
A blue LED light source was installed at the end of one side of the light guide plate, the portion excluding the irradiated surface was covered with a reflective sheet, and a diffusion sheet was placed on the irradiation side of the light guide plate to produce a backlight unit 1.

(Preparation of backlight unit 2)
A blue LED is arranged in a lattice pattern on the lower reflection plate that scatters and reflects light, a diffusion plate is arranged immediately above the irradiation side, and a diffusion sheet is further arranged on the irradiation side to produce a backlight unit 2. .

(3) Production of liquid crystal display element and measurement of color reproduction region Color reproduction by attaching backlight units 1 and 2 produced above to VA liquid crystal panels 1 to 11 and PSVA type liquid crystal panels obtained above, respectively. The area and fluorescence emission intensity were measured. As a result, it was confirmed that the color reproduction area was expanded and the color purity was increased in the former in both the liquid crystal display element having the light conversion film and the conventional liquid crystal display element not having the light conversion film. It was.

  Similarly, the backlight units 1-2 produced above were attached to the IPS liquid crystal panel obtained above, and the color reproduction region and the fluorescence emission intensity were measured. As a result, it was confirmed that the color reproduction area was expanded and the color purity was increased in the former in both the liquid crystal display element having the light conversion film and the conventional liquid crystal display element not having the light conversion film. It was.

  The backlight units 1-2 produced above were attached to the obtained FFS type liquid crystal panel, and the color reproduction region and the fluorescence emission intensity were measured. As a result, it was confirmed that in both the liquid crystal display element having the light conversion layer and the conventional liquid crystal display element not having the light conversion film, the color reproduction area is expanded and the color purity is increased in the former. It was.

<Light emitting element or organic EL image display element>
(Example 34)
An ITO electrode was deposited on the wavelength-selective transmission layer (dielectric multilayer film) on the surface of the TFT laminated glass substrate on which the light conversion film (17) was laminated, and then, on the ITO electrode, “Appl. After providing the light-emitting element 1 having an electroluminescent layer that emits blue light by the method described in “Interfaces 2013, 5, 7341-7351”, the ITO electrode and the TFT layer are electrically connected through a contact hole. Thus, an image display element 1 corresponding to the light conversion film (17) was produced.

(Example 35)
After depositing an ITO electrode on the wavelength-selective transmission layer (cholesteric liquid crystal layer) on the surface of the TFT laminated glass substrate on which the light conversion film (18) was laminated, the light was obtained in the same manner as in Example 34. An image display element 2 corresponding to the conversion film (18) was produced.

(Comparative Example 5)
After depositing an ITO electrode on the light conversion layer (3) on the surface of the TFT laminated glass substrate on which the light conversion layer (3) was laminated, the light conversion layer (3 The image display element 3 corresponding to) was produced.

  Specifically, each of the light-emitting elements 1 including the electroluminescence layer emitting blue light has the following configuration.

As the hole transport layer of the light-emitting element 1, the following TAPC was used.

The following mCP was used as the electronic block layer of the light emitting device 1.

As a 1st light emitting layer of the said light emitting element 1, a light emitting material (dopant) uses the following compounds,

The following mCP was used as a host material for the first light emitting layer of the light emitting device 1.

As a 2nd light emitting layer of the said light emitting element 1, a light emitting material (dopant) uses the following compounds,

The following UGH2 was used as a host material for the second light emitting layer of the light emitting device 1.

  As the hole blocking layer of the light emitting device 1, the UGH2 described above was used.

As the electron transport layer of the light-emitting element 1, the following compounds were used.

  On the ITO electrode, the hole transport layer, the electron blocking layer, the first light emitting layer, the second light emitting layer, the hole blocking layer, and the electron transport layer are arranged in this order. Patterning is performed to form a blue light emitting layer by the method described in “Appl. Mater. Interfaces 2013, 5, 7341-7351.”, And a (LiF / Al) electrode and a protective layer as a cathode are formed in this order. Then, image display elements 1 and 2 each including a light emitting element that emits blue light were produced.

  With respect to the obtained image display elements 1 and 2, the color reproduction region and the fluorescence emission intensity were measured. As a result, it was confirmed that in both the image display element provided with the light conversion film and the conventional image display element not provided with the light conversion film, the color reproduction area was expanded and the color purity increased. It was.

  1000A, 1000B: liquid crystal display element, 100A, 100B: backlight unit, 101A, 101B: light source part, 102: light guide part, 200A, 200B: liquid crystal panel, L: light emitting element, NC: luminescent nanocrystal particle (compound Semiconductor), 1: first polarizing layer, 2: first substrate, 3: electrode layer, 3a: first electrode layer (pixel electrode), 3b: second electrode layer (common electrode), 4: first 1 alignment layer, 5: liquid crystal layer, 6: second alignment layer, 7: second polarizing layer, 8, 11: wavelength selective transmission layer, 9: light conversion layer, 10: second substrate, 12 : Support substrate, 13: gate insulating film, 14: gate electrode, 16: drain electrode, 17: source electrode, 18: passivation film, 19: semiconductor layer, 20: protective film, 21: pixel electrode, 22: common electrode, 23, 25: Insulating layer, 1000C: Image table Element (LED panel), 51: substrate, 52: first electrode, 53: hole injection layer, 54: hole transport layer, 55: light emitting layer, 56: electron transport layer, 57: electron injection layer, 58: first Two electrodes, 59: overcoat layer, 60: substrate, 500: electroluminescence layer.

Claims (11)

A light conversion layer containing luminescent nanocrystal particles that emit light by converting light having a predetermined wavelength into red, green, or blue light; and
A wavelength conversion transmissive layer provided on at least one side of the light conversion layer and transmitting light in a specific wavelength region.   The light conversion film according to claim 1, wherein the wavelength-selective transmission layer is a layer that transmits light having the predetermined wavelength and reflects light emitted from the light conversion layer. The light having the predetermined wavelength is blue light;
The light conversion layer absorbs light having the predetermined wavelength and emits green light by absorbing red light having red light-emitting nanocrystal particles that emit red light and light having the predetermined wavelength. The light conversion film according to claim 1, further comprising: a green pixel portion containing green luminescent nanocrystal particles to be transmitted; and a blue pixel portion that transmits light having the predetermined wavelength.   The light conversion film as described in any one of Claims 1-3 provided with the said wavelength selective transmission layer, the said light conversion layer, and a 2nd wavelength selective transmission layer. A light source unit;
A light conversion layer containing luminescent nanocrystal particles that emit light by converting light having a predetermined wavelength into red, green, or blue light; and
An image display element comprising: a wavelength selective transmission layer that is provided on at least one side of the light conversion layer and transmits light in a specific wavelength region. The wavelength-selective transmission layer is a layer that is provided so that light from the light source unit is incident thereon, transmits light from the light source unit, and reflects light emitted from the light conversion layer,
The light conversion layer is provided on the side of the wavelength selective transmission layer opposite to the light source unit, and converts the transmitted light transmitted through the wavelength selective transmission layer into light of red, green, or blue and emits light. The image display element according to claim 5, wherein the image display element is a layer containing luminescent nanocrystal particles. The light from the light source unit is blue light,
The light conversion layer includes a red pixel portion containing red light emitting nanocrystal particles that emit red light by absorbing the transmitted light, and green light emitting nanocrystal particles that absorb the transmitted light and emit green light. The image display element of Claim 6 which has a green pixel part to contain and a blue pixel part which permeate | transmits the said transmitted light.   The image display element according to claim 6 or 7, further comprising a second wavelength selective transmission layer on the opposite side of the light conversion layer from the wavelength selective transmission layer.   The image display element according to claim 6, further comprising a liquid crystal layer on a side opposite to the light conversion layer of the wavelength selective transmission layer.   The image display element according to any one of claims 6 to 8, further comprising a liquid crystal layer on a side of the light conversion layer opposite to the wavelength selective transmission layer.   The image display element as described in any one of Claims 5-10 whose light from the said light source part is electroluminescence light.